De kiem tra Tieng Anh

§Ò MÉU & C¸C KIÕN THøC TRäNG T¢M
M¤N TIÕNG ANH (2003-2004)

PHÇN I §Ò MÉU

§Õ 1 §Ò TUYÓN SINH §¹I HäC Vµ CAO §¼NG N¡M HäC 2002
I Chän tõ thÝch hîp vµo « trèng (20 points)
1 In recent years, more and more people ___________ for things with credit cards
A pay B paid C are paying D have been paying
2 What people _______________ Benetton stores is that the quality is always high?
A like B like very much C like about D like a lot
3 Paolo would like to ____________ by the time he is 40
A travel B be traveling C be going to travel D have traveled
4 Poverty is a problem in many cities _____________ whole families can only afford to live in own room
A when B where C even D if
5 The world would be a better place if everyone showed ______________ cooperation as John
A as much B so much C too much D much
6 He turned on the TV, ______________ I though was rather surprising
A and B so C that D which
7 My car would not start, _______________ Jenny’s started immediately
A whereas B though C however D nevertheless
8 They stayed for hours, which I was very ______________
A annoyed B annoyed about C annoying D annoying me
9 That was a very strange question _______________
A you ask B you are asking C for asking D to ask
10 _____________ a movie to be entertaining, it has to have an interesting story
A So that B In order that C In order for D In order to
II Chän tõ cã c¸ch phµt ©m víi tø cßn l¹i
11 A hear B clear C bear D ear
12 A heat B great C beat D beak
13 A blood B pool C food D tool
14 A university B unique C unit D undo
15 A mouse B could C would D put
III T×m thÓ ®óng cña tõ cho trong ngoÆc
16 The duty of the police is the _______________of low and order (MAINTAIN)
17 Our tomatoes are ____________________nicely; they’ll be ready to eat in about a week (RIPE)
18 Look at this picture of Bill and his father – you can see the _____________clearly, can’t you? (LIKE)
19 He said “ Good morning” in a most __________________way (FRIEND)
20 Playing for the national team for the first time was an ___________experience for Hong Son (FORGET)
21 “This is not a good essay,” said the lecturer. “I find your arguments __________________ (CONVINCE)
22 It’s a lovely old house, I agree, but can we afford to _____________it? (MODERN)
23 George and I have been friends since_____________: he used to live next door (CHILD)
24 In winter it is important for farmers to provide food and ____________for their animals (WARM)
25 Pele ______________Ronaldo to take part in 2002 World Cup (COURAGE)
IV §iÒn mét tõ thich hîp v¸o « tr«ng
In the world today, there are 5000 to 6000 living languages (1)_________________ which English is by far the most widely used. As a (2)_____________ tongue, it ranks second only (3)________________ Chinese, (4)______________ is little used outside China. Approximately 350 million people speak English as their first (5)____________. About the same number use it (6)______________ a second language. It is (7)_______________ English language that is used as the language (8)______________ aviation, International sport and pop music 75% of the world’s mail is in English, 60% of the world’s radio stations (9)________________ in English and (10)_______________ than half of the world’s periodicals are printed in English
V §oc vµ tr¶ lêi c©u hái
For thousands of years, the ancient art form of Feng Shui has played a major role in Chinese life. Feng Shui means “wind and water” and it is based on an appreciation of the relationship between people and the environment. It involves changing the design of your living or working space to improve your fortune. For instance, soon after a Hong Kong millionaire moved his business to a new skyscraper, his business began to do very badly. He immediately called in Feng Shui experts. They told him that the only thing he could do to prevent this loss of energy was to build a swimming pool on the roof. The millionaire followed their western countries, where companies such as B & Q’s stores in Britain, consulted a Feng Shul expert. The expert advised him to create a lot of free space around the store. Brian followed the advice, and within a year, the store was the most successful B&Q store in the country.
36 What kind of relationship does Feng Shul concern?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
37 According to Feng Shul, what’s wrong with a round building?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
38 What did the Feng Shul expert advise Britain to do?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
39 How did Britain’s store benefit from following this advice?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
40 What can be said about the winter’s attitude towards Feng Shul?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
VI . ViÕt l¹i c©u sao kh«ng thay ®æi nghÜa
41 It’s common knowledge that he has been in prison several times
He is known ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
42 “ I hate to be criticized by non-professionals,: the film start said
The film star objected …………………………………………………………………………………………….
43 She can’t get into the habit of studying every evening
She can’t get used ………………………………………………………………………………………………..
44 I regret not paying much attention to the lecture
I wish ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
45 Perhaps I didn’t get a better job because I didn’t study hard enough
I might ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
46 Please don’t mention it again
I’d rather …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
47 Ms. Quyen began teaching Chinese ten years ago
Ms Quyen has …………………………………………………………………………………………………….
48 We haven’t visited the museum before
This is ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….….
49 Peter missed the train because he woke up too late
if Peter …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
50 The robber forced the cashier to hand over the money
The cashier …………………………………………………………………………………………………..….
VII . Dóng tø gîi ý ®Ó ho¸n thµnh c©u
51 Jack London / life and writing / represent / American love / adventure.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
52. He / San Francisco, 1876
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
53. He quit / fourteen / become / sailor.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
54. He / travel / good / deal / his short lifetime.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
55. He/ travel / many / place / Europe / United States / Far East
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
56. 1897 / Jack London / 21/ year / old / gold / discover / Alaska
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
57. He / answer / call of adventure
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
58. He / take part / famous “gold rush”.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
59. experiences / wild northern / country / provide / him / material / may of / later stories and novels
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
60. his best known novels / include / “The call of the wild”, “The sea – wolf”.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

§Õ 2 §Ò TUYÓN SINH §¹I HäC ( WRITTEN BY G6*)
Question 1 : Choose the best answer (5 points)
01 There’s someone at the door. _________________ it
A I’m answering B I answer C I’ll answer D I answered
02 Lee is _________________ at the local Chinese restaurant. Four waiters work there altogether
A a waiter B an waiter C the waiter D water
03 I can’t stop eating chocolate. I have been ____________________ on it since I was about four years old
A addicted B fixed C hooked D enslaved
04 This time tomorrow _____________________ by my swimming pool
A I’m relaxing B I’ll be relaxing C I relax D I’m relaxed
05 My sister Jo is ________________ person in our family
A the shortest B the shorter C the most short D shorter
06 This film is sad. I think _________________
A I’m going to cry B I’ll cry C I cry D I’m crying
07 He kept his marriage a secret for years, but eventually the truth _______________
A came out B came through C went out D went through
08 We’re having terrible for our holiday. I just can’t _______________ it for much longer
A put up B put on C take up D put up with
09 Her parents gave her everything she asked for. She’s a completely ______________ child
A wounded B spoilt C damaged D destroyed
10 If you know my exam results, please tell me. Don’t keep me ________________
A in suspension B under suspense C in suspense D in suspicions
11 Over the past 50 years, many serious illness have been brought _______________ control
A in B under C to D over
12 At the end of this month, ______________ here for ten years
A we’ll have been living B we’re living C we live D we’ll be living here
13 I cannot help you with your homework tonight, ________________ football in ten minutes
A I play B I’ll have played C I’ll playing D I’ll play
14 Paulo is the head __________________ at the Buckingham Hotel. He is famous for his fish recipes
A cooker B chief C waiter D chef
15 I soon as I break ________________ for the summer holidays, my parents are taking me to Spain for three weeks
A up B in C out D down
16 There’s a new suspension bridge over ______________ at Darford
A Thames B the Thames C River Thames D Thames River
17 Don’t try to phone me. By the time you read this letter ________________
A I’ve left B I’ll have left C I’ll leave D I’m leaving
18 Did you see the first _________________ of the new Agatha Christle on TV last night?
A serial N series C episode D story
19 Can you remember the first time you ______________ in love?
A fell B felt C went D found
20 My brother has always had a reputation _______________ hard
A in working B about working C to work D for working
21 Many pop and rock starts love being the ______________ of attention
A middle B point C element D center
22 We always _________________ lots of photos while we’re on holiday
A make B take C catch D do
23 Barbara’s gradually getting ________________ a bad cold, Which kept her off work for nearly a week
A over B up C on D into
24 They arrived __________________ the blue one afternoon. I didn’t even know they were back from African
A in B under C out of D from
25 Do you want to come to my birthday party at the weekend? ________________ 18
A I’m being C I’ll be C I’m to be D I be
Questions 2: Finding & correcting the mistakes in the following sentences if necessary (10 points)
___________________01 The company representative sold to the manager a sewing machine for forty dollars
___________________02 George is not enough intelligent to pass this mathematics class without help
___________________03 Even on the most careful prepared trip, problems will sometimes develop
___________________04 An uncultivated tea plant might grow about 10 meters height
___________________05 The virtues of ordinary life is focus of many poems
___________________06 My aunt was well – known all over of the town
___________________07 Don’t forget finding out how many are coming on Saturday
___________________08 Where were you at this morning? It’s nearly midday
___________________09 I enjoyed the book that you told me to read it
___________________10 The chemistry instructor explained the experiment in such of a way that it was easily understood
Question 3 Rewrite the sentence without changing the meaning( 15 points)
01 I think that no city in the world is more beautiful than Paris ® I think Paris
02 The flight to Moscow lasted three and a half hours ® It took
03 He has not been to his home village for over 30 years now ® It is
04 Although Peter was the stronger of the two, his attacker soon overpowered him ® Despite his
05 I will be happy to give you a lift ® I do not mind
06 They do not allow smoking in here ® Smoking
07 We not only lost all our money but we cam close to losing our lives as well ® Not only
08 I will take the car to the garage for a service ® I will have
09 This book is not very expensive ® This book does not
10 Students can borrow some money from the bank to complete their education ® The bank
Questions 4 Put the right verb form (5 marks )
01 Each of the nurses (report) to the operating room when his or her name is called
02 I (not see) her since we left school
03 He said the earth (be) round
04 Mark Twain (know) for his stories about life on the Mississippi
05 I remember (pay) him. I gave him $5
06 Can we stop walking soon? I (start) to feel very tired
07 What would you do if you (be) in my situation?
08 The game (play) well by both teams last Sunday
09 If you press that button, a receptionist (come) to help you
10 The children enjoy (allow) to stay up late when there is enjoy something special on TV
Question 5 Write T if the sentence is true Write F if the sentence is false Write NI if there is no information given (10 points)
Before the invention of the postage stamp, it was difficult to send a letter to another country. the sender paid for the letter to travel in his or own country, Then the person in the other country paid for that part of the trip. If a letter crossed several countries, the problem was worse. Rowland Hill, a British teacher, had the idea a postage stamp with glue on the back. The British post office made the first stamps in 1840. They were the Penny Black and the Two pence Blue. A person bought a stamp and put it on a letter. The post office delivered the letter. When people received letters, they didn’t have to pay anything. The letters were prepaid. Postage stamps became popular in Great Britain immediately. Other countries started making their own postage stamps very quickly. There were still problems with international mail. Some countries did not want to accept letters with stamps from another country. Finally, in 1874, a German organized the Universal Postal System. Each country in the UPS agreed to accept letters with prepaid postage from the other members. Today, the offices of the UPS are in Switzerland. Almost every country in the world is a member of this organization. It takes care of any international mail problems.
_____ 01 Before postage stamps, two people paid for letters to travel in two countries
_____ 02 A teacher invented the postage stamp
_____ 03 He was American
_____ 04 The first two stamps were colored black and blue
_____ 05 A stamp shows that the postage is prepaid
_____ 06 The United States was the mail problems immediately
_____ 07 Postage stamps solved all mail problems immediately
_____ 08 Members of the UPS accept letters from other countries
_____ 09 Kuwait is a member of the UPS
_____ 10 All the UPS officials are Swiss
_____ 11 Stamp collecting is a popular hobby
Question 6 : Choose the best answer (5 points)
One in six drivers Britain is aged between 17 and 25. But more drivers in __(0)__ age group are responsible __(1)__ a greater number of accidents than older drivers, in __(2)__ one accident in four is the fault of a young, inexperienced driver. A team of researchers has __(3)__ two years studying the driving performance, attitudes and behaviour of young people. The report __(4)__ that not all young drivers are dangerous, __(5)__ a large number of males, particularly those aged 17 to 20, do not drive as carefully __(6)__ other age groups. These young drivers are more likely to have __(7)__ accident in their first year of driving __(8)__ when their experience increases. The report also notes that men are more likely to __(9)__ driving rules than women, and that a girlfriend or wife in the car has a calming __(10)__ on the driving pattern of young men.
______00 A this B some C one D that
______01 A to B for C with D from
______02 A order B place C time D fact
______03 A done B put C given D spent
______04 A says B tells C speaks D talks
______05 A and B but C since D because
______06 A so B like C as D that
______07 A the B this C an D some
______08 A than B until C or D while
______09 A crash B break C tear D escape
______10 A way B effort C method D influence
Question 7 : Only one word (15 points)
After (1)______________dynamite, Swedish-born Alfred Nobel became a very rich man. However , he foresaw its universally destructive power (2)_____________ late .Nobel preferred not to (3)_____________remembered as the inventor of dynamite , so in 1859 , just 2 weeks before his (4) ______________he created a fund to be useful for awarding (5)_______________ to people who had made worthwhile contributions (6)________________ mankind . Originally there were (7)______________ awards: literature , physics ,chemistry , medicine and peace . Economics was (8)________________ in 1968 , just sixty-seven years after the first awards ceremony . Nobel’s original legacy of nine million (9)________________ was invested , and the interest of this sum is used for the awards which vary (10)____________ 30,000 dollars to 125,000 dollars .Every year on December 10, the (11)_____________ of Nobel’s death , the awards (gold medal, illuminated diploma and money ) are presented to the (12)_____________ . Sometimes politics plays an important (13)______________ in the judges’ decisions .Americans have (14)____________ numerous science awards , but relatively few literature prizes . No awards were presented from 1940 to 1942 at the beginning of the Word War II . Some people have won 2 prizes , but this is rare ; other have (15)____________ their prizes
Question 8 : Put the right word form (15 points)
01 To be ___________________it is generally to be well – educated success
02 These shoes look quite elegant but they’re terribly ________________ comfort
03 Many people still believe that smoking is __________________ harm
04 My colleagues are very pleasant , but the manager is a little __________________ friend
05 We have decided to interview only the six best __________________ apply
06 The ______________of those who have nowhere to live is ignored miserable
07 The number of _________________people increases daily home
08 The minister of Finance is responsible for ___________________affairs economy
09 Robots and computer-controlled machines have already joined the work force in highly ____________country industry
10 They walk around with a broad smile on their faces , saying ____________how amazing it was repeat
Question 9: Pick out the word whose italic and bold part is pronounces differently from the rest (5 points)
1 A name B flame C man D fame
2 A page B game C go D gift
3 A count B sound C found D should
4 A noon B tool C blood D spoon
5 A how B town C power D slow
Question 10 Use the words or phrases given to complete the sentences(10 points)
Dear Clara
01 I write/tell/how much/I enjoy/few hours/I spend/you/your family/yesterday evening

02 I be/England/since/beginning/October/and/this be/first invitation/dinner/English family

03 I find/conversation/most interesting/and glad/practice/English

04 I also like/congratulate you/excellent cooking

05 I/very grateful/all/helpful information/you give/courses/English

06 I hope/find/suitable school/next few days

07 and English courses/not/too hard/me/study

08 You give/best wishes/husband/children?

09 Thank you again/ extremely pleasant evening

10 I look forward/see/you/next month

Your sincerely, Maria

§Õ 3 §Ò TUYÓN SINH §¹I HäC (Biªn so¹n: NguyÔn H¶I)
C©u 1: Cho thÓ ®óng cña tõ in ®Ëm vµo chç trèng
01 A word was omitted from the telegram by mistake, and this .............has confused us all.
02 After the accident there was blood everywhere. A man was ............from a bad cut on his leg.
03 After the terrible heat, the cool weather was like heaven........ Yes, it was.........., wasn't it?
04 A lot of the old city was destroyed in an earthquake. After its .........., stronger buildings were put up.
05 Although Joan's young, she shows a lot of good sense. And her brother's very ...........too.
06 Are you hungry? ............is the least of my problems at the moment.
07 I suppose Jenny's jealous because her little brother got so many presents... Not really, ____isn't a big problem with her.
08 Before the people leave the church, the priest blesses them, and they go out soon after this ________.
09 Can you add the names of your students to this list? .... Yes, and in ______, I can give you the ones in Mary's class, and some _____ones from last year .
10 Can you prove that Bill did it? No, I have no real_____.
Bµi 2: §iÒn giíi tõ thÝch hîp vµo « trèng
01 ______the absence of the Principal, Mr . Jones is in charge of the school.
02 According _______Larry, the weather has been beautiful in Miami.
03 I've never been accused _______ coming to work late, I'm glad to say.
04 Are you accustomed ________heat, or does it make you tired?
05 The medicine acts ________the brain.
06 ______(1) addition _______(2) all my other work, I now have to do the accounts.
07 We've decided to admit Tom ________our club.
08 Japan is _______(1) advance _______(2) most other countries in making cars.
09 Sally has a big advantage ________most girls when it comes to games because she's so tall.
10 I'm amazed ________how much English your son already speaks.
Bµi 3: §iÒn mét tõ thÝch hîp vµo « trèng
It was past midnight. We were walking (1)........... the beach enjoying the cool sea (2)............ Then one of us spotted (3)........... we had come to look for (4)........... of the sea came a giant leatherback turtle, crawling slowly (5)........... the beach. It had a great hard shell upon its (6)........... and used its flippers to (7)........... about effortlessly.
The turtle (8)........... the middle of the beach and began digging (9)........... at it Large scoops of (10)........... were flung everywhere as the turtle worked (11)........... deep concentration, oblivious (12)........... our prying eyes. When a deep (13)........... had been dug , the turtle settled over it (14)...........ten minutes. As it got up, it began (15)........... the hole with sand again.
In the bright moonlight, we could see numerous round, white (16)........... In a month's (17)..........., tiny turtles will hatch (18)........... them. These baby turtles would all crawl to the (19)........... as if guided by instinct and swim away. When they reach adulthood, they (20)........... would return to this spot to lay their eggs.
Bµi 4: Chia ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc
1. I can’t bear the thought of you (go)................home without someone (ac­company).............. you.
2. I’d rather (live)...................in ancient Greece.
3. He insisted that the new baby (name) ..............after his grandfather.
4. There (be).................. no further business, I declare the meeting closed.
5. The uneaten breakfast was still on the table. She (call)...............away in a hurry.
6. I (write).................photographs every week, I promised, and I (try) to make them legible.
7. Were I (know)..................the answer, I’d tell you right away.
8. It’s no use crying over (spill)................. milk.
Bµi 5: §äc ®o¹n v¨n sau, mçi dßng cã mét lçi sai (ng÷ ph¸p hoÆc chÝnh t¶) g¹ch ch©n vµo lçi sai vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng
Last week I went to theatre. I had a very good seat. The play was very interesting. I did not enjoy them. A young man and a young women were sitting behind me. They were taking loudly. I got very angry. I could not hear the actors. I turned around.
I looked at the man and the woman angry. They did not pay any notice. In the end, I could not bear it. I turned round again. ' I can not hear a word" I said angrily. ' It's none of your bussiness,' the young man said rudely. ' This is a private conversasion ! ,
Bµi 6:§äc ®o¹n v¨n sau råi tr¶ lêi c©u hái
The dolphin
For many years people believed that the cleverest animals after man were chimpanzees. Now, however, there is proof that dolphins may be even cleverer than these big apes.
Although a dolphin lives in the sea it is not a fish. It is a mammal. It is in many ways, therefore, like a human being.
Dolphins have a simple language. They are able to talk to one another. It may be possible for man to learn how to talk to dolphins. But this will not be easy because dolphins can not hear the kind of sounds man can make. If man wants to talk to dolphins. therefore, he will have to make a third language which both he and the dolphins can understand.
Dolphins are also very friendly towards man. They often follow ships. There are many stories of dolphins guiding ships through difficult and dangerous waters.
________1. Which animals do people think may be the cleverest?
A. Chimpanzees B. Dolphins C. Big apes D. Mammals
________2. What other beings are dolphins like in many ways?
A. Fish B. Animals C. Reptiles D. Men
________3. What have scientists discovered about dolphins?
A. They understand simple language B. They can speak to one another
C. Men can now talk to them. D. They can teach men their languages.
________4. Why is a third language necessary if man wants to talk to dolphins?
A. Most men do not speak English. B. The dolphins' language is hard to learn.
C. Dolphins cannot hear men speaking. D. Men want to talk to dolphins in secret
________5. In what way are dolphins friendly to man?
A. They like interesting things about man. B. They often follow ships.
C. They often jump on to ships D. They seem to like stories.
Bµi 7:ViÕt l¹i c©u sau kh«ng thay ®æi nghÜa, kh«ng ®­îc thay ®æi h×nh thøc tõ cho trong ngoÆc
1. I found the stories she told very interesting (fascinated)
2. Making money interests him more than anything else (interested)
3. I've lost interest in this programme (bored)
4. I envy their happy relationship (envious)
5. I'm sorry, but I'm rather busy at the moment (afraid)
6. He said that the was sorry he hadn't told me before (apologized)
7. I didn't like leaving that house because I liked living there (sorry).
8. We won't be able to come to your party and we're sorry (regret)
9. I'm not surprised that he has got money problems (comes)
10. I was surprised by his rudeness (aback)
Bµi 8: Chän c©u tr¶ lêi ®óng
The difficulties that would have to be encountered by anyone (0)........ would be incomparably greater than those who have to be faced in the endeavor to reach the summit of Mount Jolmo Lungma. In two respects only the lunar explorer have the advantage. (1)............ movement would be less fatiguing because the gravitational pull of the Moon is not very great, the weight of the Moon (2)......... of that of the Earth. If the Moon had an atmosphere like that of the Earth, a man playing golf on the Moon would find that he could drive his ball for a smile (3).......... The second advantage the lunar explorer would have over the climbers on Mount Jolmo Lungma would be the absence of strong wind to contend against. The Moon (4)..........., there can be no wind; nor, of course, can there be any noise, for sound is carried by the air . The Moon is a world (5)........... and where utter silence prevails.

A. being only about one-eighteenth
B. who attempted to explore the Moon
C. that is completely still
D. In the first place
E. without any reason F. without much difficulty
G. which consists
H having no atmosphere
I.In the end
Bµi 9: S¾p xÕp l¹i c¸c tõ sau ®©y sao cho c©u cã nghÜa, kh«ng ®­îc bá tõ ®· cho, cã thÓ thay ®æi sè, th× , d¹ng cña tõ
1. manager / along / all / The / well / his / get / employees / with
2. promised / in / with / Jame / to / us / she / while / keep / Australia / was / touch / in.
3. did / like / having / I / not / feel / breakfast / because / this / I / morning / headache / a / had.
4. great / long / will / of / In / run / vase / the / this / be / value .
5. Thèng NhÊt / named / Lenin / Park / after
Bµi 10: Khoanh trßn chç sai ë phÇn g¹ch ch©n vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng
1. Soybeans can provides vegetarians with a nutritionally balanced diet for a low
A B C D
2. The flotation process devised to separate minerals from other chemical compounds
A B C D
3. Of searching for underground deposits of oil, geologists often rely on magnetometers.
A B D C
4. New York City, which is one of the largest cities in the world, is larger than any other cities in the United States.
A B C D
5. Radiation usual travels from a source in straight light, but charged particles travel in curved paths within magnetic fields
A B C D
Bµi 11: ViÕt mét ®o¹n v¨n ng¾n hoµn chØnh kho¶ng 80 - 100 tõ vÒ t×nh lµng xãm n¬i b¹n ®ang c­ tró

PHÇN II KIÕN THøC TRäNG T¢M
A §äc hiÓu
§äc hiÓu c¸c néi dung chÝnh c¸c ®o¹n v¨n kho¶ng(150 - 350 tõ) vÒ chñ ®IÓm nh­ : B¶n th©n, së thÝch c¸ nh©n, viÖc lµm, ®Êt n­íc, vui chíi, thÓ thao, n­íc Anh vµ ng­êi Anh.TiÕng Anh, lÞch sö cña Anh vµ ph­¬ng ph¸p häc. TiÓu sö cña mét sè nhµ khao häc næi tiÕng. Nghµnh khoa häc tù nhiªn, søc khoÎ, n«ng nghiÖp m«i tr­êng vµ viÖc b¶o vÖ m«I tr­êng
B KiÕn thøc ng«n ng÷
N¾m ®­îc c¸c kiÕn thøc c¬ b¶n sau
§éng tõ
Yªu cÇu n¾m ®­îc d¹ng vµ c¸ch dïng c¶u c¸c thêi, phèi hîp nhuÇn nhuyÔn ë c¸c d¹ng chñ ®éng vµ bÞ ®éng
C¸c d¹ng ®éng tõ V + Ving ; V +(O) to V ; V + O + V ; V + O + PII
C¸c c¸ch dïng c¸c ®éng tõ t×nh th¸I:
Can, could, may, might, should, would……., had better, would rather, have to …..
Tõ nh÷ng d¹ng kiÕn thøc nµy ph¶I hiÓu vµ ¸p dông ®­îc trong c¸c d¹ng bµI tËp trong ®Ò thi
Chia ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc ;§IÒn tõ ; Ch÷a lçi sai ;ViÕt l¹I c©u ;
Giíi tõ
Danh tõ
Danh tõ ®Õm ®­îc, kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc, sè it, sè nhiÒu, dïng c¸c l­îng tõ phèi hîp v¬I danh tõ phï hîp c¸ch nhËn bÕt vµ h×nh thµnh danh tõ b»ng c¸ch thªm c¸c hËu tè: tion, ment, -ing, -er…..
BµI tËp ¸p dông trong ®Ò thi
Chia thÓ ®óng cña tõ cho trong ngoÆc ;Ch÷a lçi sai vÒ d¹ng tõ ; Chia ®éng tõ b»ng c¸ch phèi hîp N vµ V , viÕt l¹I c©u
TÝnh tõ
NhËn biÕt ®­îc tÝnh tõ, vÞ trÝ cña tÝnh tõ trong c©u
§Æc biÖt so s¸nh cña tÝnh tõ
BµI tËp
Chia thÓ ®óng cña tõ cho trong ngoÆc ; Ch÷a lçi sai ; ViÕt l¹I c©u ; §IÒn tõ
Tr¹ng tõ
So s¸nh trangh tõ
§¹I tõ
N¾m ®­îc d¹ng vµ c¸ch dïng cña c¸c tr¹ng tõ c¬ b¶n. Chó träng c¸ch dïng c¸c ®¹I tõ quan hÖ
BµI tËp
§IÒn tõ ;Ch÷a lèi sai ;ViÕt l¹I c©u ;
Qu¸n tõ
BiÕt c¸ch dïng c¸c qu¸n tõ a, an, the
Giíi tõ
Sö dông ®­îc mét sè giíi tõ
Thêi gian, vÞ trÝ, ph­¬ng h­íng, môc ®Ých ….
V + pre
N + pre
Adj + pre
C©u ®IÒu kiÖn, c©u ­íc
C¸c d¹ng trùc tiÕp, gi¸n tiÕp
Liªn tõ
§¼ng lËp : and, or, but
KÕt hîp: either ……. Or, neither ….. nor……, both …. And
Phô thuéc : after , before ,when ,while ….. although trong c©u phøc
c¸c cÊu tróc c©u dïng ®Ó viÕt l¹i c©u (biªn so¹n : nghaijim g6 - hnu)
FOCUS ON I THE FIRST & THE LAST

01. S + haven't done smt + before
have never done smt + before
This / it is the first time + S + have done smt
Never have S done smt before
S is / are / am Ving for the first time

02. S + have not + done smt + for + time
Since + clause
S + (last) did smt + time + ago
when + clause
at/on/in/-------
® The last time + S + did smt + was + time + ago
when + clause
at/on/in ------
® It is + time + since + S + (last) did smt

FOCUS ON II IT + BE + TIME + SINCE …

03. S + have done for time ® It is time since S + Ved
04. S + had done for time ® It is time since S + Ved
05 S + Ved + ago ® It is time since S + Ved

FOCUS ON III PRESENT PERFECT CONTINOUS & SIMPLE PAST

06. S + have been + Ving for time ® S + began to V time ago
started Ving time ago
07. How long + have not + S + done smt? ® When did S + V ?
® How long is it since S + Ved ?
08. S haven’t been to + a place ® It + be + one’s first visit to a place

FOCUS ON IV IT + BE + THE MOST …

09. S + have never V3 + such + adj + noun ® This is + superlative adj + noun + S +have ever V3
10. S + have never V3 comparative adj + noun ® S + be + superlative adj + noun + S +have ever V3

FOCUS ON V S + BE + SUPERLATIVE & NO OTHER + NOUN

11. S + be superlative adj + noun ® No other + noun + be + as adj as + S

FOCUS ON VI COMPARIsONS

12 . Comparision of superiority ® Comparison of inequality
13. Superiority ® No noun be comparative
14 . S1 + be + less + adj + than S2 ® S2 + be + not + as + adj + as S1
15 S + out +V ® S + V + adverd in comparative form
16 S + V + measurement ® S+ V + as… as + measurement
Ex : The flagpole is four meters in high ® The flagpole is as high as four meters
17S + V + number ® S + V + as… as number
Ex : I weigh 70 kilogrammes ® I weigh as much as 70 kilogrammes
18 S + be + noun / adj ® S + be + as adj as + S
Ex : It’sbell clean ® It’s as clean as a bell
19 S1 +S2 + be + adj ® S1 + be + as + adj + as + S2
S1 + S2 + V + adv ® S1 + V + as + adv + as S2
20. S + be + but + S + be ® S + be + comparative adj than + S + to be
S + V + but + S + V V + comparative adv than + S + V

FOCUS ON VII DOUBLE COMPARATIVES

21. If + S + V2 + comparative adj/ adv + S1 + V1
® The + comparative adj/ adv + S2 + V2, The + comparative adj/ adv +S2 +V2
22. Sth + increases with sth ® The more ….. the more
23. Sth + be + hoped to … + soon ® Short adj +er … short adj +er

FOCUS ON VIII NOT … UTIL (TILL)

24. S + V + time or time clause ® S + V (negative ) + until + time or time clause
® Not until + S +V + inversion of + V + V
® It is not ( was not ) until ( till) time or time clause that + S + V + O

FOCUS ON IX TOO + ADJ +TO INF & SO .. THAT ; ENOUGH
25 So + adj/adv + that + clause
26 Too + adj/adv + (for smb) + to do smt.
27 Not+adj/adv (opposite meaning)+enough+(for smb)+to do smt.
28 So + adj + a + noun that clause
29 Such + a(n) + adj noun + that + clause.

FOCUS ON X ALTHOUGH & DESPITE
30 Although
31 Even though
32 Though + clause 1 + clause 2
33 Much as
34 In spite of the fact that
35 Despite the fact that

36 ® In spite of + V-ing
Noun + clause 2
The fact that

37 ®Despite + + V-ing
Noun + clause 2
The fact that

38 ®However + adj + S + may be
+ adv + S + may V
39 ® Adj + S + may be
+ as (though) + clause 2
Adv + S + may V
40® Clause 1 , but ( yet) + clause2
41®No matter how + adj + S + may be
+ adv + S + may V

FOCUS ON XI NO MATTER HOW / WHAT / WHERE

42 No matter how + adj / adv + S + V
43 No matter what + S +V
44 No matter where + S + V

FOCUS ON XII PROUD & PRIDE

45. S + be proud of ® S + pride + oneself + on + Ving
® S + take pride in

FOCUS ON XIII WRONG & CONTRARY TO
S + think + but + S + be + wrong ® Contrary to + Noun ( phrase )… + S + V

FOCUS ON XIV NOTHING BUT
461 S + insist + on + sth
® Nothing but sth + would satisfy sb
462 S + don’t like anything .. .

FOCUS ON XV SOON & NOT LONG BEFORE
47. S + V + soon ® It +be + not + long before

FOCUS ON XVI STRUCTURE WITH CONJUNCTION “ONCE”
48. S + will + V + and then + S + will V ® Once + S + have PII , S + will V

FOCUS ON XVII STRUCTURE WITH “HARDY” AS ADVERB
49. S + no + noun ® S + hardly + V + any + noun

FOCUS ON XVIII SURPRISE & FANCY
50. What a surprise to do sth ® Fancy + doing sth

FOCUS ON XIX NO SOONER …. THAN & HARDLY … WHEN

501. Immediately after
502. Just after Hardly + had + S + PII + when Ved
503. The moment ® Scarcely + had + S + PII + when Ved
504. As soon as ( when ) No sooner + had + S + PII + than Ved

FOCUS ON XX STRUCTURE WITH “ PREVENT”

51 S + be + so + adj + that + S + V ( negative )
52 S+ V + because of + noun or because + S + V + O
53 S + V + so that + S + V
541® S + prevent s.o / sth + from doing sth
542® S + stop s.o / sth + from doing sth
543® S + ban s.o / sth + from doing sth
544® S + bar s.o / sth + from doing sth
545® S + hinder s.o / sth + from doing sth
546® S + restrain s.o / sth + from doing sth
547® S + make it impossible for s.o to do sth
548® S + get in the way of sth

FOCUS ON XXI AS / BECAUSE / SINCE + CLAUSE
& BECAUSE OF / DUE TO + PHRASE
55. S + V + as / because / since + clause
561 ® S + V + due to + noun phrase
562 ® S + V + because of + noun phrase
563 ® On account of + noun phrase + S + V
564 ® Thanks to + noun phrase + S + V
565 ® Owing to + noun phrase+ S + V
566 ® As a consequence of + noun phrase + S + V
567 ® On account of + noun phrase+ S + V
568 ® In view of + noun phrase + S + V
569 ® As a result of + noun phrase+ S + V
5610® Ving + O , S+ V +O
Note : * ON NO ACCOUNT = UNDER THE CIRCUMSTANCE(S)
= IN ANY CIRCUMSTANCE(S)
= NOT ; NEVER
*TO TAKE STH INTO ACCOUNT = TO TAKE STH INTO CONSIDERATION
*TO ACCOUNT FOR = TO EXPLAIN

FOCUS ON XXII LEAD TO & RESULT IN

57. Lead to / result in ® To be brought about
To be caused by
To be due to
To be the result of

FOCUS ON XXIII WOULD RATHER & WOULD PREFER
58. Would rather verb than verb (Present)
59. Would rather be Ving than Ving (Present continuos)
60. Would rather have P II than have PII (Simple past )
61. Would rather s.o did sth (Present)
62 . Would rather s.o had PII (Simple past)
NOTE:
WOULD SOONER = WOULD RATHER
RATHER THAN= SO AS NOT TO VERb
SO AS TO = IN ORDER TO = TO VERb = WITH A VIEW TO VING (NOUN)
WOULD RATHER NOT VERB = HAVE NO DESIRE TO VERB STH
RATHER = VERY
63® S + prefer sth to sth
64® S + prefer + Ving + to + Ving ( condition: V1 ¹ V2 )
65® S + prefer + Ving + to + being PII(condition: V1 = V2)
66® S + prefer + to V rather than + V
67® S + prefer + to have PII (Simple past )
68® S + prefer sb + (not ) to V
69® S + think + S + be + preferable to + Ving
70® For preference , S + would + V
71® One’s preference would be for ( is for ) + noun
72 ® In preference to

NOTE:
S + like … better than …
S + like + Ving better than + Ving
S + really want to V sth
(please), do / don't do smt ® S + would rather + someone + did / didn't do smt
® S + would prefer + someone + to do / not to do smt
Feel like + Ving = to be in the mood for Ving (toV ) = to be in the habit of Ving

FOCUS ON XXIV TO BE SORRY & APOLOGIZE

73. To be sorry that = to be afraid that = to regret that
74. To be sorry that S + Ved +O = To be sory for Ving = To be sory to have + PII
75. To be sorry to V (diÔn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng ë hiÖn t¹i )
(Tr­íc khi lµm mét viÖc ghi ®ã )
76 . To be sorry for sb = to feel sorry for sb
77 . To be sorry for sth
78. To be sorry to hear ( know ) ( buån khi biÕt tin)
Note :
To be sory VLC To make an excuse = to excuse oneself = to make one’s apology = to apologize (to sb) to V
To be sorry ! GT S + said sadly

FOCUS ON XXV CONNECTED STATEMENTS
AND CORRELATIVE CONJUNTIONS

79. S1 + V1 + and + S 2 +V2 ® S1 +V1 + and + S2 + be , too
do
does
did
and + so + be / do / does / did + S2

80. S1 + V1 (neg ) + and + S2 + V2 (neg) ® S1 + V1 (neg ) + and + S2 + be + not , either
do ( does)
did
and + neither + be / do / does / did + S2
81. S1 + and + S2 + V (neg) ® Neither + S1 + nor + S2 +V
83. S1 + S 2 + and + S 2 + V2 ® S + V + either … or

FOCUS ON XXVI SPEND & TAKE
84. S + spend + time + doing smt
85. S + spend + money +on + noun / - Ving
86. Doing smt + takes + smb + time
87. It + takes + smb + time + to do smt

FOCUS ON XXVII PITY , SORRY & WISH

88. It is a pity + someone + do / don't do smt (did / didn't do smt)
89. S is sorry
90 ® Someone + wish + (that) S + didn't / did smt (hadn't / had done smt)

FOCUS ON XXVIII REGRET& WISH , IF ONLY

91. S + wish ( If only ) * Kh«ng thùc hiÖn t¹i S + V ed / were

*Kh«ng thùc qu¸ khø S + had + PII ® S + regret (*) + Ving

*T­¬ng lai S + would V


92 . Regret + Ving = S + wish (If only ) + S + had + PII

Having + P II = S + wish (If only ) + S + had + PII

To V = Much to one’s regret + S + have to V

93. Have no regrets on / over / about + Ving

FOCUS ON XXIV OWN & BELONG TO

94. Whose + be + noun ?
95.® Who + do / does + the + noun + belong to ?
96. ® Who + owns + the + noun?
97. ® Who + is + the owner + of + the + noun?
98. S + be + the owner + of + noun ® Noun + belong to + smb

FOCUS ON XXV SUY §O¸N LO GÝC

99. I'm sure +that + S + did / didn't do smt ® S + can / can't + have + done smt
100. It is impossible that S + Ved ® S + may/ may not have + PII sth
101. The chances are that S +Ved ® S + may/ may not have + PII sth
102. It was stupid of you to V ® S + should not have + PII sth
careless
103. There is no need for you to have PII ® S + needn’t have PII

FOCUS ON XXVI On arrival & When ; DURING & WHILE

104. On arrival + somewhere + clause ® When + S + arrive + somewhere + clause
105. S + V + during + noun phrare ® S + V + while + past continuous

FOCUS ON XXVII THERE & HAVE

106. S + have / has + smt + in / at------ ® There are / is + smt + in / at-----

FOCUS ON XXVIII IT IS EASY ( DIFFICULT ) , FIND STH ADJ
&HAVE DIFFICULTY , BE USED TO VING

107. S + find + smt / doing smt + easy / difficult ® S + be / not be + used to + smt / doing smt
108. S + find + smt / doing smt + easy / difficult ® S + have difficulty in Ving
® S + doesn’t find sth easy
® Ving sth + to be + adj

FOCUS ON XXIX in order to & so that

109. S + do / did smt + so that + S + can / could + do smt
® S + do / did smt + in order to + do smt
so as to
to
with a view to + Ving sth

FOCUS ON XXX HAD BETTER & IT IS TIME

110. You'd better + do / not do smt
111. You + should / shouldn't + do smt
112. You ought to do sth
113. I + advise + you + to do / not to do smt
114. It is advisable + that + you + do / don't do smt
115. It is time for sb to do sth
116. It is time + S + Ved sth
117. It is about time + S + Ved sth
118. It is high time + S + Ved sth
119. It is time + S + was / were Ving sth (continuous )
120. It is time + S(O) + was / were PII sth ( passive )
Note
Every time = When
At no time = Never = Under no circumstances = In any circumstances
This is the first time = S + have never PII + before
Have a goog time = enjoy oneself

Other uses of “time”

By the time S + V (s ; es) , S + will V
S + Ved , S had PII
At the same time
At a time
Once upon a time
On time , In time
From time to time = at times = sometimes
To be out of time
In time of need
To have time to V
Times without number
Onces in a life time
In no time at all
For the time being
Time after time
Behind the time

FOCUS ON XXXI LET & SUGGEST

121. Let's + do smt, shall we ? that S + V
122. Why + don't we + do smt? that S + should V
123. What about + doing smt ? ® I + suggest + doing smt
124. How about + doing sth ? that S + Ved
125. Shall we + do smt ? to sb that + S + V+ O

126. Let sb V ® To be + let + V or To be allowed to V (passive )
127. Allow sb to + V BUT Allow + Ving
128. V + O + adv of place ® Let + O + be + PII + adv of place
129. Let sb go (leave) = Release sb from swh
130. Let sb down = get sb down = depress sb

131* S + suggest Ving
decide to V + Object
recommend Ving

bi ®éng 1 S + suggest
decide that S(O) +should be PII
recommend


 bi ®éng 2 It + to be suggested
decided that S(O) +should be PII
recommended

FOCUS ON XXII INVERSION
Not once
Never (before)
Only when
Only after
At no time
Only later
Only with
Not + Noun …………. + Inversion
Only by
Never before
Under no circumstances
On no account
Only then
Only at
Only yesterday

*It is (was) only when …. + that + clause
until
……

Cho m·i tíi tËn
*S+ V (neg) until
*It is ( was) not until … that ….
*Not until ….. + Inversion

Võa míi …. th× ®·
*No sooner than
*Hardly had + S + PII when + S +VED + O
*Scarcely when

® First ….. then
® Just after + N /Ving
® Immediately after + N/ Ving
® As soon as ( when) + clause
Exercise1
1 It was a mistake for me to spend so much money on record ® I should _____________________
2 Fewer people die from flu than 50 years ago ® Not as ______________________
3 I didn’t enjoy holiday there and so I’m going back ® If I had enjoyed _______________
4 I’m leaving school before Christmas ® By Christmas_________________
5 Although he wasn’t experienced, he got the job ® Despite his __________________
6 She lived just outside the town (OUTSKIRTS) ® She _________________________
7 Are you and Jennifer related? (RELATIVE) ® Is ___________________________
8 We didn’t think she could pass the exam (DOUBTFUL) ® We __________________________
9 I lent my cousin $5 (BORROWED) ® My cousin_____________________
10 Everyone had heard about the tower of Pisa (FAMOUS) ® Pisa__________________________
11 My boss seems to enjoy humiliating people (PLEASURE)
12 I don’t usually speak to strange men (HABIT)
13 The interview panel thought that Marry had a very good manner (IMPRESSION)
14 We have run out of the items you want (STOCK)
15 It was very kind of you to help me (GRATEFUL)
Exercise2
1 This is the worstcoffee I’ve ever drunk
® Never ……………………………………………………………………………………………..
2 The train journey from Britain to London took only 80 minutes
® It was ………………………………………………………………………………………………
3 If I have plenty of warning I’ll willing baby - sit for you
® Provided ……………………………………………………………………………………………
4 I’ve forgotten that commentator’s name but he’s very well know
® That commentator …………………………………………………………………………………
5 Most students ignored what the teacher was saying
® Few …………………………………………………………………………………………………
6 The decorators have finished the whole of the first floor
® We have ………………………………………………………………………………………….…
7 Everyone was surprised that singer had very little money when he died
® The singer had………………………………………………………………………………………
8 His disabilities didn’t prevent him from sailing around the world
® Despite the fact ………………………………………………………………………………………
9 Please, don’t tell her
® I wish …………………………………………………………………………………………………
10 The house was so badly damaged in the fire that it couldn’t he repaired
® It was so ………………………………………………………………………………………………
11 Tom learned to drive when he was nineteen (drive)
® Tom has been …………………………………………………………………………………………
12 There’s a chance that my secretary took the order book away (May)
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
13 As a boy, he was a regular churchgoer (Used)
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
14 Dicken’s last novel was unfinished when he died (without)
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
15 “I wonder if you could possibly open the door for me?” (Mind)
EXERCISE 3
1 I’d prefer him not have said all these embarrassing things about me.
I’d sooner ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
2 Could you watch my bag while I’m away, please?
Could you keep …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
3 If you were in the situation I’m in, you’ll feel the same
If you put ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
4 Many companies were immediately affected by the new regulations
The new regulations had ………………………………………………………………………………………………………
5 I have never been to Ho Chi Minh before (VISITING)
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
6 People say that the bus driver was listening to his walkman at the time of the crash
The bus driver is said …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
7 He is always forgetting to turn off the lights and close the door (KEEP)
I wish ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
8 If you worry, you’ll find it difficult to get to sleep
The more ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
9 Jim was always on time until he started going out with Marry
Jim never used …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
10 When I said my ears were blocked the steward suggested that I should swallow hard
“Try……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
11 The town were nearer than we thought it would be
The town wasn’t ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
12 It wasn’t a good idea for you to put so much salt in the soup
You ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
13 Don’t be so frank – be tactful
It’s much better ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
14 George Bush was elected President in 1988
It …………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
15 Despite having a lot of money he wasn’t happy
Even ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
EXERCISE 4
1. This is his first visit to England
He’s never paid …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
2. I think it may rain
It looks…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
3. His briefcase was too full for the zip fastener to close properly
His briefcase was so………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. He hasn’t been back to his home town for over 20 years now
It’s ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
5. I’m having a lot of trouble now because I lost my passport last week
If I ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
6. “You should have waited for us” the team leader said to John
The team leader criticized…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
7. If we can solve the problem soon , it’ll be better for all concerned
The sooner …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
8. I’m absolutely sure that they weren’t playing in this weather
They can’t ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
9. There was no need for you to have gone to all that trouble
You needn’t …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. It appears that I’ve left my medical card at home
I don’t seem …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
11. I’m always inviting him for a weekend with us but he’s always too busy
No matter ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
12. My teacher always suggests learning the structures by heart
It ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
13. This is an important scheme and we want him to approve
We want his …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
14. We haven’t visited Uncle Peter for ages
It’s high ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
15. Nobody wants to buy shoes like these any more
There is no demand ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
EXERCISE 5
1 We’ve trying to solve the problem
We’ve try to find ………………………..………………………………………………………………………
2 Nobody has never done the exercise before , have they ?
The exercise ……………………………………………….…………………………………………………
3 It is a pity that you wrote that letter
I’d rather ………………………………………………………………..…………………………………………
4 She admitted that she had taken the necklace
She admitted to ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
5 Do you have a friendly relationship with your boss ?
Are ……………………………………………………………………………………………..………………..
6 The only thing they didn’t steal was the television
They stole …………………………………………………………………………………………………..……
7 Is there a possibility that you left the key in the door ?
Could you …………………………………………………………………………………………………………
8 Their dog was so fierce that nobody would visit them
They had so………………………………………………………………………………………..………………
9 Without his help , we would all have died
Had it …………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………
10 If you missed the programme you can’t really judge
Unless ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….……
11 My daughter’ll reach the age of 18 and then she will be able to drive
Once ………………..……………………………………………………………………………………….……
12 They learned almost no lesson
They hardly …………………………………………………………………………………………………….…
13 It’s unlikely that the equipment will be damaged
There is not much…………………………………………………………………………………………………
14 You should admit that you’re to blame , not to try to conceal it
I’d rather …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

PHÇN III TãM T¾T NG÷ PH¸P & BµI TËP øNG dông (nguyÔn h¶i)
I C©u §iÒu KiÖn Conditionals AND IF sentences
A. CÊu tróc chung cña c©u ®iÒu kiÖn gåm 2 phÇn (IF clause - Main clause)
I.C©u ®iÒu kiÖn d¹ng I (C©u ®iÒu kiÖn cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i hoÆc t­¬ng lai )

If + S + V ( s , es ) , S + will / shall / can / may / + V
Eg1: If I have enough money , I will buy a new car.
Eg2: If she doesn't study hard , she will fail the exam.
Eg3: The plane may be deverted if the fog gets thicker.
Eg4: If you want to lose weight , you must eat less bread.

If + S + V ( s , es ) , S + V ( s , es )
§Ó diÔn t¶ sù thËt hiÓn hiÖn hoÆc mét thãi quen:
Eg5: If you heat ice , it turns to water.
Eg6: If you are thirsty , you drink

Unless = If ...... not
Eg7: If you don't study hard , you will fail the exam.
= Unless you study hard , you will fail the exam.
II. C©u ®iÒu kiÖn d¹ng II (C©u ®iÒu kiÖn kh«ng cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i)
If + S + Ved / were , S + would / could / should / + V
Eg8: If I had a map , I would lend it to you.
In fact: I don't have a map now.
Eg9: I'd be in time for work if I lived near my office.
In fact: I don't live near my office.
III. C©u ®iÒu kiÖn d¹ng III (C©u ®iÒu kiÖn kh«ng cã thùc ë qu¸ khø).

Form: If + S + had + PII + S + shoud / would + have + PII.
Eg10: If I had had money , I would have bought it.
In fact: I didn’t have money , I didn’t buy it.
Eg11: If she hadn’t been ill , she wouldn’t have stayed at home.
IV. Sö dông thÓ tiÕp diÔn trong c©u ®iÒu kiÖn (using progressive verb form)
Eg12: True: It’s raining right now, so I will not go for a walk.
Conditional: If it were not raining right now, I would go for a walk.
Eg13: True: I am not living in Chile, I ‘m not working at a bank.
Conditional: If I were living in Chile, I would be working at a bank
Eg14: True: It was raining yesterday afternoon, so I did not go for a walk
Conditional: If it had not been raining, I would have gone for a walk.
Eg15: True: I was not living in Chile last year; I was not working at a bank
Conditional: If I had been living in Chile last year, I would have been working at a bank.
V. Sö dông c©u ®iÒu kiÖn tæng hîp:
Eg16: True: I didn't eat breakfast several hours ago, so I'm hungry now
Conditional: If I had eaten breakfast several hours ago, I wouldn't be hungry
Eg17: True: He’s not a good student. He didn't study for the test yesterday.
Conditional: If he were a good student , he would have studied for the test
VI. Sö dông c©u ®iÒu kiÖn thiÕu "If " dïng ®Ó nhÊn m¹nh:
Eg18: Were I you , I wouldn’t do that.
Conditional: If I were you, I wouldn’t do that.
Eg19: Had I known, I would have told you.
Conditional: If I had known, I would have told you.
Eg20: Should anyone call, please talk a message.
Conditional: If anyone should call, please talk a message.
VII. Sö dông c©u ®iÒu kiÖn "Implied" - ¸m chØ:
Eg21: I would never have succeed without your help.
Implied condition = If you hadn't helped me.
VIII. Sö dông c©u ®iÒu kiÖn phô thuéc " But for"
Eg21: I would never have succeed without your help.
Implied condition = If you hadn't helped me.
Dïng ®Ó nãi mét viÖc nµy phô thuéc vµo mét viÖc kia , hoÆc ng­êi kh¸c.
Eg22: My father pays my fees. But for that I wouldn’t be here.
= If it were not for my father's fees, I wouldn’t be here.
Eg23: But for Jim's support, I wouldn’t have got the job.
= If it hadn't been for Jim's support, I wouldn’t have got the job.
Ii C©u ­íc - WISH and other uses
I.C©u ­íc cho t­¬ng lai:

S + wish ( es ) + S + would / could / should + V
Eg24: Fact: It’s raining.
à I wish It would stop raining.
Eg25: Fact: My dream is to go to American one day.
à I wish I would go to American one day.
II.C©u ­íc kh«ng cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i

Form: S + wish ( es ) + S + Ved / were
Eg26: Fact: Now, I don't have much money.
à I wish I had much money
III. C©u ­íc kh«ng cã thùc ë qu¸ khø:

Form: S + wish ( es ) + S + had + PII
Eg27: Fact: I forget learning English.
à I wish I had learnt English.
Eg28: Fact: I didn't go to the class yesterday.
à I wish I had gone to the class.
Note: If only
* If only + simple tense
Eg29: If only he comes in time.
= We hope he will come in time.
Eg30: If only he will listen to her.
= We hope he will be willing to listen to her.

If only + past = S wish ( es ) + S + Ved
If only + past perfect = S wish ( es ) + S + had + PII
If only + would V = S wish ( es ) + S + would V
Eg31: If only Tom were here.
= I wish Tom were here.
Eg32: If only you hadn't said “ Liar “.
= I wish you hadn't said “ Liar “.
Eg33: If only they would stop following me.
= I wish they would stop following me.
In fact: they don't stop following me.
As if / As though
Th­êng néi dung ®i sau “As If / As though“ lµ tr¸i thùc tÕ. Trong tr­êng hîp ®ã, ®éng tõ sö dông gièng nh­ trong c©u ®iÒu kiÖn.
I. DiÔn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng kh«ng cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i.

S + present tense + as if / as though + S + Ved.
Or past tense ( víi ý thuËt l¹i )
Eg34: He acts as if / as though he were rich.
In fact: He isn't rich.
Note: ThuËt l¹i:
Eg35: She talked to him as if he were a child.
In fact: He isn't a child.
II. DiÔn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng kh«ng cã thùc trong qu¸ khø.

S + past tense + as If/as though S + had + PII
Eg36: Jim looked as if he had seen a ghost.
In fact: He didn't see a ghost.
Eg37: She acted as though she had never met him.
In fact: She has met him or she met him.
Eg38: She looked as if / as though she had run 10 miles.
Note: As if / As though cã 2 ý nghÜa:
- §­îc sö dông nh­ mét thÓ lo¹i ®iÒu kiÖn ( ®· ®Ò cËp ë trªn).
- §­îc sö dông ®Ó so s¸nh b×nh th­êng.
As if / As though = like = nh­ thÓ lµ.
Eg39: It looks like rain Þ It looks as if it's going to rain.iii Words that introduce adverb clauseof condition (“If clauses“)


If in case ( that ) only if
Whether or not in the event ( that ) providing ( that )
Even if unless provided ( that )
I. Whether or not:
Eg40: I’m going to go swimming tomorrow whether or not it's cold.
= I’m going to go swimming tomorrow if it's cold if it's not cold
-> Sö dông “ whether or not “ ®Ó diÔn t¶ ®iÒu kiÖn “cho dï kÕt qu¶ nh­ thÕ nµo ch¨ng n÷a“ th× kÕt qu¶ vÉn kh«ng thay ®æi.
II. Even if:
Eg41: I have decided to go swimming tomorrow. Even if the weather’s cold, I’m going to go swimming.
“ Even if “ nghÜa cña chóng gÇn gièng nh­ “whether or not“.
Note:
Compare:
Eg42: If Ann studies hard , she will pass the exam.
Even if Mary studies hard , she won't pass the exam.
III. In case ( that ) vµ in the event ( that ).
Eg 43: I’ll be at my uncle’s house in case you need to reach me.
Eg44: In the event that you need to reach me , I’ll be at my uncle’s house
Note:

In case ( that ) vµ in the event ( that ) + clause.
In case of vµ in case event of + Nphrase.
Eg45: In case of trouble, call the police
= In case ( that ) there's trouble, call the police.
Eg46: In the event of rain, the picnic will be cancelled.
= In the event ( that ) it rains, the picnic will be cancelled.
IV. Only if vµ Providing that / Provided that / As(So) long as
Eg47: The picnic will be cancelled only If it rain.
* Only If ®Ó bµy tá phÇn ®iÒu kiÖn duy nhÊt.
Note:
Eg48: Only if it rains will the picnic be cancelled.
NÕu “ Only if “ ®Çu c©u th× cã hiÖn t­îng ®¶o ng÷.
As long as
so long as §Òu cã nghÜa " If " hoÆc
provided that " On condition that "
providing that
Eg49 : You can use my car as long as ( so long as ) you drive carefully.
( You can use my car but you must drive carefully -this’s a condition)
Eg50: Travelling by car is convenient provided (that) / providing (that) you have somewhere to park
Eg51: Provided ( that) she studies hard , she’ll pass her exam.
Providing (that)
Note:
Providing that = Provided that = so long as
= as long as = if hoÆc only if
Khi chóng ta nãi vÒ t­¬ng lai, kh«ng ®­îc sö dông “ will “ sau: unless /as long as / provided / providing vµ only If.
V. Otherwise vµ or ( Else )
Eg52: I always eat breakfast. Otherwise, I get hungry during class.
( “otherwise“ ®Ó diÔn t¶ ý tr¸i víi sù thËt ) -> If I don't eat breakfast, I'll get hungry during class
Eg53: I always eat breakfast, or (else), I get hungry during class.
If I don’t eat breakfast, I'll get hungry during class.
(Or (else) vµ otherwise gièng nghÜa nhau )
Note: Otherwise lµ tõ chuyÓn ý.
Or ( else ) lµ liªn tõ.

iv 4 C©u bÞ ®éng - The passive 1
Trong tiÕng anh cã 2 lo¹i c©u: C©u chñ ®éng & C©u bÞ ®éng
Trong c©u chñ ®éng th× chñ ng÷ thùc hiÖn hµnh ®éng.
They write letters
S V O
Nh­ng ë d¹ng bÞ ®éng th× chñ ng÷ chÞu t¸c ®éng cña hµnh ®éng, cã nghÜa lµ t©n ng÷ cña c©u chñ ®éng ®­îc lµm chñ ng÷ trong c©u bÞ ®éng.
Letters are written by them
-> CÊu t¹o chung cña 1 c©u bÞ ®éng:

S (o) + tobe + PII + by O ( s )
Trong ®ã: To be: lµ ®éng tõ dao ®éng ®¶m b¶o 2 yÕu tè sè Ýt /sè nhiÒu cña chñ ng÷, th× thêi cña ®éng tõ
PII : lµ ®éng tõ cè ®Þnh
* C¸c d¹ng bÞ ®éng c¬ b¶n:
1. Th× hiÖn t¹i ®¬n:


( + ) S (o) + tobe (is, are, am) + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S (o) + tobe not + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Tobe + S(o) + PII + by O ( s ) ?

Eg3: Mai cleans this room -> This room is cleaned by Mai.
Eg4: I don’t do the exercise -> The exercise isn’t done by me.
Eg5: Do you study the lesson often ? ->Is the lesson studied often by you ?
2. Th× qu¸ khø ®¬n:

( + ) S (o) + tobe (was, were) + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S (o) + tobe not + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Tobe + S (o ) + PII + by O ( s ) ?
Eg6: Somebody cleaned the rooms yesterday ->The rooms were cleaned yesterday
Eg7: Tom didn’t sing that song -> That song wasn’t sung by Tom
Eg8: Didn’t Jim dop the cup -> Was not the cup dropped by Jim ?
3. Th× hiÖn t¹i tiÕp diÔn:

( + ) S (o) + tobe (is, are, am) + being + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S (o) + tobe not + being + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Tobe +S (o) + being + P2 + by O ( s ) ?
Eg9: Is somebody cleaning the room at the moment ?
-> Is the room being cleaned at the moment ?
4. Th× qu¸ khø tiÕp diÔn:

( + ) S(o) + tobe (was, were) + being + PII + by O ( s)
( - ) S(o) + tobe not + being + PII + O ( s )
( ? ) Tobe + S (o) + being +PII + by O ( s ) ?
Eg10: Mai was doing her homework when I arrived
-> Mai’s homework was being done by her when I arrived
5. Th× hiÖn t¹i hoµn thµnh:

( + ) S ( o ) + have (has )+ been + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S ( o ) + haven't(hasn't) + been + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Have(Has )+ S ( o ) + been + PII + by O ( s ) ?

Eg11: I have built the house -> The house has been built by me.
6. Qu¸ khø hoµn thµnh:

( + ) S ( o ) + had + been +PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S ( o ) + had not + been + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Had + S ( o ) + been + PII + by O ( s ) ?
7. T­¬ng lai ®¬n gi¶n:

( + ) S ( o ) + will / shall +be + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S ( o ) + won't / shan't + be + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Will / shall + S ( o ) +be + PII + by O ( s )
8. T­¬ng lai hoµn thµnh:

( + ) S ( o ) + will have been + PII + by O ( s )
( - ) S ( o ) + won't have been + PII + by O ( s )
( ? ) Will + S ( o ) + have been + PII + by O ( s ) ?
Eg12: Alice will have written the report. -> The report will have been written by Alice
9. T­¬ng lai gÇn:

Active: S + tobe (is / are / am )+ going to + V
-> Passive: ( + ) S ( o ) + tobe + going to be + PII
( - ) S ( o ) + tobe not going to be + PII + O ( s )
( ? ) Tobe + S (o) + going to be + PII + by O ( s ) ?

Eg13: I’m going to sell my house
-> My house is going to be sold by me
10. C¸c ®éng tõ ®Æc biÖt:

Can, Could, May, Might , Must , Have to, Would, Will, Should,
Shall, Ought To, Used to , Need , Had Better , + Be + PII

Eg14: You must do the exercise before it’s too late.
-> The exercise must be done before it’s too late.
Eg15: Do you have to wear uniform ?
-> Does the uniform have to be worn by you ?
Eg16: I need buy these books.
->These books need be bought.
Eg17: I need to buy these books.
-> These books need to be bought.
Note:
My shoes need cleaning = My shoes need to be cleaned
Eg18: I will have to do all my homework.
-> All my homework will have to be done by me.
Eg19: Are you going to have to wear uniform ?
-> Is uniform going to have to be worn ?
 v C©u bÞ ®éng - The passive 2
11. C©u bÞ ®éng nhê b¶o:
Khi chñ ng÷ kh«ng trùc tiÕp thùc hiÖn hµnh ®éng chóng ta sö dông cÊu tróc nhê b¶o “ have - passive “

Have / (Get) + Sth + done

Eg20: I always have my mother wash my clothes.
- > I always have / get my clothes washed by my mother.
12. CÊu tróc c©u bÞ ®éng ®Æc biÖt (It's said that....):
Eg21: People say that // he beats his wife. -> It is said that he beats his wife.
-> He’s said to beat his wife.
Eg22: People think that he’s 105 years old. -> It’s thought that he’s 105 years old.
-> He’s thought to be 105 years old.
CÊu tróc nµy th­êng ®i víi c¸c ®éng tõ:
Think , Know , Believe , Report , Understand , Except , Consider , Allege.
* Note:
ë mÉu c©u nµy mÖnh ®Ò 2 ë thÓ qu¸ khø , hiÖn t¹i hoµn thµnh , qu¸ khø hoµn thµnh
th× ta ph¶i sö dông: to have + PII
Eg23: People reported that two people were killed in the explosion.
-> It was report that two people were killed in the explosion.
-> Two people were reported to have been killed in the explosion.
* Note:
§íi víi mÖnh ®Ò 2 ë d¹ng tiÕp diÔn , t­¬ng lai , "can , could , must , have sb do st ". th×
is losing -> to be losing
will end -> to end
can do -> to be able to do:
Could do -> to have been able to do
must do -> to have to do
have sb do st -> to have st done
Eg24: It’s said that there is a secret tunnel between them.
-> There is said to be a secret tunnel between them.
Nãi thªm: ( Be ) supposed to......
§«i khi It's supposed to.. = It's said to.....
Eg25: Let’s go and see that film. It’s supposed to be very good.
( = It’s said to be very good )
Nh­ng ®«i khi "supposed to" , "something is supposed to happen"
= It's planned , arranged or expected.
Eg26: The train was supposed to arrive at 11.30 but it was an hour late
(The train was expected to arrive at 11.30 according to the timetable)
Ngoµi ra: "You are not supposed to do sth" = It's not allowed or advisable for you to do it.
Eg 27: Mr Bord is much better after his illness but he is still not supposed to do any heavy work
(= his doctor have advised him not to do any heavy work )
* Note:
Eg28: It's your duty to obey him = you are supposed to obey him.
Eg29: You are supposed to have finished = You should have finished..
13. CÊu tróc bÞ ®éng cña Verb patterns:

Verb + V.ing + Object.
like doing sth -> like being done.
Eg30: I don’t like people telling me what to do. -> I don’t like being told what to do

Verb + Object + V.ing.
Eg32: They saw him climming over the fence. -> He was seen climming over the fence.
Verb + Object + to V
Eg33: He wants someone to take photographs. -> He wants photographs to be taken
Eg34: He likes you to write the test. -> He likes the test to be written by you.
* Verbs of perception: See , watch , hear...

Active: S + see + O + V (Ving) -> passive: S + be seen + to V( Ving )
Eg35: They saw her coming in -> She was seen coming in.
Eg36: He heard the bell ring -> The bell was heard to ring.
* Imperative sentence ( c©u mÖnh lÖnh ):

V + O + A -> Let + O + be + PII + A.
Eg37: Write your name here. -> Let your name be written here.
* ( S ) + let + sb + do + st.
Eg38: He let me go out..
-> I was allowed to go out.
Eg39: Let me go -> I was allowed to go.

Eg40: Don’t let others see you. -> Don't let yourself be seen by others.

Eg41: Everyone believes him right.-> He's believed to be right.

* Sau c¸c ®éng tõ: advise / beg / order / recommend / urge + Indirect object + Infinive + Object, cã thÓ cã 2 d¹ng bÞ ®éng.
Eg42: He urged the council to reduce the rate. -> The council was / were urged to reduce the rate.
-> He urged that the rates should be reduced the rate.
* Sau c¸c ®éng tõ:
agree, be anxious, arrange, be determined, determine, decide, demand + to V + O, chØ cã mét d¹ng bÞ ®éng: that -....... should.
Eg43: He decided to sell the house -> He decided that /the house should be sold.
Gerund: Sau ®éng tõ: advise, insist, propose, recommend , suggest + gerund + O -> That -..........should.
Eg44: The students suggested buying flowers for teacher on the Teacher’s Day.
->The students suggested that flowers should be bought for teacher on the Teacher’s Day
Chó ý:
* Make sb do st -> to be made to V.
Eg45: They made me hand over my passport. -> I was made to hand over my passport.
Eg46: I remember that my father took me to the place. -> I remember being taken to the place by my father.
* NÕu chñ ng÷ ë d¹ng phñ ®Þnh -> Khi viÕt c©u bÞ ®éng, ®éng tõ ph¶i nhËn phñ ®Þnh.
Eg47: No one did the exercise -> The exercise wasn't done.
* NÕu c©u chñ ®éng cã 2 t©n ng÷ th× cã thÓ chuyÓn thµnh 2 chñ ng÷ trong 2 c©u bÞ ®éng kh¸c nhau.

Eg48: He gave me a book.
O1 O2 -> I was given a book by him.
-> A book was given me by him.
* Mét sè ®éng tõ th­êng cã 2 t©n ng÷: give , tell , show , lend , get , write , pay , sell , buy , bring
* Mét sè néi ®éng tõ còng cã bÞ ®éng nh­ng ph¶i gi÷ l¹i phÇn giíi tõ cña ®éng tõ ®ã.
Eg49: My wife spoke to the man. -> The man was spoken to by my wife.

EXERCISES ON THE PASSIVE VOICE
Exercise 1
1. About thirty million people are watching this programme.
2. We expect students not to talk during the examination.
3. You mustn’t touch this button while the experiment is in progress.
4. Someone will blow a whistle if there is an emergency.
5. Someone was carrying a bomb to a safe place when it exploded.
6. Don’t leave those boys alone or they’ll tear down the place.
7. They are building a new block of houses down the street.
8. No one has ever known him to be dishonest.
9. They have moved nothing in your room since they sent you to the hospital.
10. Are you interested in the job they have offered you?
Exercise 2
1. No matter what we spend the money on, we must account for every penny.
2. They announced over the radio that the weather was changing for the better.
3. They pointed out the woman to him, and he went over to her.
4. I doubt whether they can explain anything now.
5. They explained to her who we all were.
6. They pointed out his mistakes to him.
7. People used oil-lamps years ago.
8. When they talked about the incident, they didn’t mention any names.
9. When did they open that hospital?
10. The atmosphere protects the earth from harmful radiation from the sun.
Exercise 3
1. They haven’t sent us the book they published last year.
2. No one has made any comments on the event.
3. What do they call the new hotel?
4. They made us stay indoors while they were testing the new weapon.
5. They expect you to arrive at work 5 minutes earlier than the others.
6. Everybody thought that Jack was the laziest of all the pupils.
7. They have closed the motorway because they are rep airing it.
8. Someone Left the back door open and turned off the light in the yard.
9. We must wash this kind of cloth in warm water only.
10.We had to wait for 15 minutes before they put us through to him.
Exercise 4
1. People consume gas faster than they produce it.
2. No one has seen him anywhere this week.
3. They rumour that he has gone to Canada on some important busi­ness.
4. Evidently someone had informed him of the news before they an­nounced it.
5. They explained to him how they should operate the machine.
6. No matter what we spend the money on, we must keep a record of the expenses.
7. Did anyone see you come in?
8. They shouldhave told us how many books they wanted.
9. It was not until someone fired a shot that I realised that someone was chasing me.
10. He hates people staring at him while he is out in the street.
Exercise 5
1. Nobody told me that they had discharged John from the hospital.
2. I want you to leave me alone.
3. I remember that my father took me to town to see that film.
4. Someone told him he could not take the examination.
5. He objects to people laughing at his mistakes.
6. The hosts gave us a very warm welcome.
7. Has anyone ever taught you how to behave?
8. Someone will tell her which bus to catch.
9. Thieves broke into the house.
l0. Some adults say a lot of nonsense.
Exercise 6
1. According to our history teacher, the Normans invaded England in 1066.
2. They saw him walking with his friend before he got lost.
3. They have chosen me to play for the school football team.
4. Bad weather has delayed the plane for one hour.
5. Someone saw him pick up a stone and throw it at the riot police.
6. People often take him for his brother.
7. They didn’t take proper care of the children.
8. They have never satisfactorily explained the mysterious disappear­ance of the document.
9. In the physics lesson, we placed the test-tube in a centrifuge.
10. They have awarded the best pupil a scholarship.
Exercise7
1. They gave him a last chance before expelling him from the school.
2. The school is admitting’a large number of new pupils this year.
3. We should see children and not hear them.
4. They have told us that Galileo invented the telescope.
5. I don’t enjoy people beating me at sport in school.
6. They made him stay behind after class.
7. They will inform you of the result of your exam by letter.
8. The Chinese invented gunpowder several centuries ago.
9. They have never elected any woman President of the United States.
10. Ruth is disappointed; they have given the job she applied for to some­one with more experience.
Exercise 8
1. Before the Princess arrived at the shipyard, they had used police dogs to make sure no one had hidden any bombs there.
2. When will they open the shop — this year or next?
3. Local people own most of the business in our town now.
4. Aren’t you afraid they will sack you if you dpn’t start coming to work on time?
5. She felt that they were concealing something from her.
6. Everyone believe that terrorists kidnapped him.
7. They didn’t admit him into the reception hall because he was wear­ing jeans.
8. Someone heard him singing to himself well after midnight.
9. They speak well of his boy friend.
10. It will be so dark that no one will see me.
Exercise 9
1. They built that old red house in the year 1822.
2. A committee of experts haven’t examined the report yet.
3. They will serve cocktails to the guests about ten minutes from now.
4. His sharp remarks embarrassed everyone last night.
5. Mr Brown introduced Fred to the fellow yesterday.
6. They have already announced the results of the exam.
7 They have sold thousands of CD machines since 1983.
8 A famous composer is conducting the concert tonight.
9 Someone should have discovered that a long time ago.
10 They were demonstrating the new video system when I went there yesterday.
Exercise 10
1. I think they should spread a second coat of paint over that surface.
2. Someone might find a solution to the problem soon.
3. They broadcast the victory news over powerful loudspeakers so that the whole town could hear it.
4. Our hosts treated us very kindly last Saturday.
5. As soon as they sign the contract, that company will publish a new textbook next year.
6. They informed me that they had seen you in Oxford Street.
7. We ought to deal with the problem before people talk about it.
8. Eric sat silent in the car, wondering where they were taking him.
9. They looked on Bell as a sweet-tempered young man.
10. The trouble started when they told me to change the way we were running this department.
vi Danh ®éng tõ - Gerund 1
A. §Þnh nghÜa: Danh ®éng tõ lµ mét h×nh thøc t­¬ng ®­¬ng víi danh tõ. Nã cã cïng mét d¹ng thøc nh­ hiÖn t¹i ph©n tõ (Present Participle) nghÜa lµ ®éng tõ nguyªn mÉu thªm ®u«i "ing". V× nã mang tÝnh chÊt cña c¶ danh tõ vµ ®éng tõ nªn nã ®­îc gäi lµ "Danh ®éng tõ".
Eg1: Playing, walking, swimming.
Eg2: - Playing tennis is fun. (1)
Eg3: - We enjoy swimming. (2)
"playing" vµ "swimming" lµ danh ®éng tõ. C©u (1) “playing” ®­îc sö dông nh­ lµ chñ ng÷.
C©u (2) "swimming" ®­îc sö dông nh­ lµ t©n ng÷.
Note: So s¸nh viÖc sö dông "The - ing" form:
Eg­4: Walking is good exercise
=> walking = gerund = subject.
Eg5: Bob and Ann are playing tennis
=> playing = a present participle,®­îc sö dông trong th× tiÕp diÔn.
B. Chøc n¨ng - Functions
1. Lµm chñ ng÷ (Subject):
Eg6: Swimming is an interesting sport.
Eg7: Talking in class disturbs the teacher.
Eg8: Seeing is believing.
2. Lµm t©n ng÷ (Object):
Eg9: She likes swimming.
Eg10: I don't like troubling others.
Eg11: Have you finished writing your exercises?
3 Lµm bæ ng÷ cho "to be":
Eg12: My hope is passing the entrance examination to one university.
Eg13: My hobby is going for a walk after dinner.
Eg14: Our duty is finishing the work today.
Eg15: All we have to do now is studying well.
4 Lµm t©n ng÷ cho giíi tõ (Prepositional Object):
Eg12: We thought of going to the party.
Eg13: I object to your coming late.
Eg14: She apologised for not telling the truth.
Eg15: I'm interested in learning English.
Eg16: She's good at speaking English.
Mét sè V + preposition vµ Adj + preposition :

1. talk about 1. interested in
2. apologise for 2. good at >< bad at
3. succeed in 3. fed up with
4. insist on 4. the advantage(s) of
5. think of 5. the disadvantage(s) of
6. dream of 6. tired of
7. (dis) approve of 7. surprised at/by
8. decide against 8. fond of
9. feel like 9. in favour of
10. look forward to 10. disappointed with/in
11. congratulate on
12. accuse of
13. suspect of
14. prevent from
15. stop from
16. thank for
17. forgive for
18. warn against
19. take advantage of
20. take part in
21. blame for
22. object to
23. to be used to
24. complain bout/to/of
25. live for/as/at/on/in
26. participate in
27. decide on
11. happy about
12. instead of
13. in spite of
14. excited about
15. worried about
16. responsible for
17. guilty of
18. grateful to/for
19. proud of
20. patient with
21. polite to
22. in addition to
23. (In) capable of + Ving
24. crazy about
25. bored with
26. keen on
27. able to V
EXERCISE ON GERUND
I Supply the gerund form of the verb in the following sentences
01 We appreciate (hear) from you
02 The man denied (take) the money
03 We cannot risk (nvest) so much money
04 The driver could not avoid ( hit) the curb
05 We are considering (move) to Viet Nam
06 They have finished (eat)
07 We both enjoy (dance) very much
08Do you mind (come) back later?
09 He admitted (hide) the money
10 She says she doesn’t mind (wait) for us
11 Steve and Tom have stooped (speak) to each other
12 We enjoy (listen) to music
13 He is going to stop (study) English
14 We will enjoy (use) your cottage at the beach while you are away
15 They have finally finished (paint) our apartment
16 Would you mind (open) the window?
17 She denied (change) the address on the package
18 We are considering (buy) a new car
19 We would appreciate (receive) your immediately
20 He finally admitted (make) the mistake
21 I don’t mind (ride) the subway
II. Supply an appropriate preposition and verb form
01 Alice isn’t interested ___(look) for a new job
02 Henry is excited ___(leave) for India
03 You are capable ___(do) better work
04 I have no excuse ___(be) late
05 I’m accustomed ___(have) a bog breakfast
06 The rain prevented us ___(complete) the work
07 Fred is always complaining ___(have) a headache
08 Instead __(study), Margaret went to a ball game with some of her friends
9 Thank you ___(help) me carry the packages to the post office
10 Mrs Grant insisted ___(know) the whole truth
11 He showed us how to get to his house ___(draw) a map
12 You should take advantage ___(live) here
13 Laura had a good reason ___(go, not) to class yesterday
14 Everyone in the neighborhood participated ___(search) for the lost child
15 I apologized to Diane ___(make) her wait for me
16 The weather is terrible tonight. I don’t blame you ___(want, not) to go to the meeting
17 Who is responsible ___(wash) and (dry) the dishes after dinner?
18 In addition ___(go) to school full-time, Sam has a part-time job
19 The angry look on his face stopped me ___(speak) my mind
20 Where should we go for dinner tonight? Would you object __(go) to an Italian restaurant?
21 The mayor made another public statement for the purpose ___(clarify) the new tax proposal
22 The thief was accused __(steal) a woman’s purse
23 The jury found Mr. Adams guilty ___(take) money from the company he worked for an (keep) it for himself
24 Bill isn’t used ___(wear) a suit and tie every day
25 I’m going to visit my family during the school vacation. I’m looking forward __(eat) my mother’s cooking and (sleep) in my own bed
vii Danh ®éng tõ - Gerund 2
5. Nh÷ng ®éng tõ sau ®©y ®­îc ®i theo lµ mét "to.V" hoÆc mét "V-ing" mµ nghÜa cña chóng kh«ng thay ®æi:
A. begin, start, continue, cease:
Eg21: It begins raining.
Eg­22: It begins to rain.
B. can't bear, can't stand:
Eg23: I can't bear seeing you.
Eg24: I can't bear to see you.
C. like, love, hate, neglect, intent:
Eg25: I like going out.
Eg27: I like to go out.
Note: would like (love) + to.V
D. advise, allow, permit, recommend:
§èi víi c¸c ®éng tõ kÓ trªn mµ cã t©n ng÷ trùc tiÕp ®i kÌm th× sö dông "to V":
Eg27: He advises me to apply It at once.
Eg­28: She recommends housewives to buy the big tins.
Eg29: They don't allow us to park here.
Nh­ng kh«ng cã t©n ng÷ ®i kÌm th× sö dông "V-ing":
Eg30: She advised applying It at once.
Eg­31: She recommends buying the big tins.
Eg32: She doesn't allow parking.
E. prefer:
Prefer + to.V + than + to V
Prefer + V-ing + to + V-ing.
Eg33­: I prefer staying at home to going out tonight.
Eg34: I prefer to stay at home than to go out tonight.
F. Sau c¸c cÊu tróc It needs/ requires/ wants (bÞ ®éng):
Eg­35: This lock needs oiling.
Eg36: Their tyres require inflating.
Eg37­­: Garden plants want watering everymorning.
6. Cã mét sè ®éng tõ sau lµ mét "to.V" or "V-ing" nh­ng nghÜa l¹i thay ®æi hoµn toµn: Remember, regret, forget, try, stop, need, help, can't help, go on:
Remember + to do (nhí sÏ ph¶i lµm g×)
Remember + V-ing (nhí l¹i ®· lµm g×)
Eg38: I always remember to lock the door.
Eg39: I remember seeing the Alps for the first time.
Note:
Eg40: I remember doing the test
I remember being done the test.
forget + to.V (quªn ph¶i lµm g×)
forget + doing (quªn ®· lµm g×)
Eg41: Don't forget to learn the text by heart.
Eg­42: I forget locking the door.
Try + to V (cè g¾ng)
Try + Ving (thö)
Eg43: I try to learn English, but I'm not successful
Eg44: I try making friends with her
regret + to.V (tiÕc ph¶i nãi cho ai vÒ c¸i g× ®ã)
regret + V-ing (tiÕc ®· lµm g× trong qu¸ khø)
Eg45: I regret to tell you that you fail the test.
Eg46: I regret lending him some money. He never paid me back.
Note:
I wish I hadn't lent him some money. He never paid me back.
stop + to.V (dõng ®Ó lµm g×)
stop + V-ing (dõng/bá h¼n viÖc ®ã)
Eg47: We stopped to talk.
Eg48: He stopped smoking 2 months ago.
need + to.V (cÇn thiÕt cho ai ph¶i lµm g× ®ã)
need + V-ing = need + to be + PII (cÇn ®­îc lµm g×)
Eg49: He needs to work harder if he wants to pass the exam.Eg50: The batteries in the radio need changing
The batteries in the radio need to be changed.
help: gióp ®ì
can't help: kh«ng thÓ kh«ng, kh«ng thÓ nhÞn
can't resist: kh«ng thÓ kh«ng
resist: chèng cù, kh¸ng cù.
can't bear: kh«ng chÞu ®­îc
can't endure: kh«ng chÞu næi

Eg51: My father always helps me do my homework.
Eg52­: I can't help laughing at the sight of the well known comedians on stage.
Eg53: He could resist no longer.
Eg54: We can't resist thinking that she is your meal ticket.
(Chóng t«i kh«ng thÓ kh«ng nghÜ r»ng c« ta nu«i anh)
Eg55: They can't bear being short of money.
Eg56: She can't endure seeing beggars wander about the streets
go on doing ( = continue doing sth)
go on to do ( = do or say something new).
Eg57: The teacher went on talking for this topic for 2 hours.
Eg58­: After discussing the economy, the teacher then
went on to talk foreign policy.
I Complete the following sentences, once with the gerund and then with the infinitive
01 She loves (work) for herself
02 He intends (leave) tomorrow
03 She will try (study) in the library
04 They will start (work) there next week
05 She hates (do) secretarial work
06 She will continue (work) in that same office until June
07 He prefers (dance) with his wife
08 I neglected (mention) it to Bill
09 He likes (teach) English to foreign students
10 They will begin (build their new home soon
11 He prefers (watch) television
12 She intends (stay) right where she is
13 He loves (criticize) others
14 We tried (find) an apartment near the park
15 They have finally started (speak) to each other
16 Rose loves (do) that kind of work
17 They continue (send) us a bill for the work
II Fill in the blank - ing form or infinitive of the verbs in brackets
1 I shall always remember (meet) you for the first time in England
2 Remember (do) these English exercises before going out with your friends
3 She’s always forgetting (give) back the money she bowrrowed from me
4 I shall never forget (meet) the King
5 Every 45’ I stop work (drink) a cup of tea
6 My father really must stop (smoke). He is in poor health now
7 How long do you intend to go on (play) those bloody records?
8 The form-master welcomed the new pupils and then went on (explain) the new school regulations
9 I don’t regret (tell) her what I thought, even if it upset her
10 I reget (inform) you that I am unable to ofeer you employment
11 My brother likes (walk) in the rain
12 I like (get) up early so that I can get plenty of work done before I leave home for work
13 Sorry we don’t allow (smoke) in this lecture room
14 We don’t allow people (smoke) in here
15 I tried (send) her flowers but it didn’t have any effects
viii Danh ®éng tõ - Gerund 3
7. Sù kh¸c nhau gi÷a Afraid of V-ing/Afraid to V:
to be Afraid to do = m×nh kh«ng muèn lµm ®iÒu ®ã v× nã nguy hiÓm hoÆc kÕt qu¶ cã thÓ tåi tÖ.
to be Afraid of V-ing = cã thÓ mét ®iÒu g× ®ã tåi tÖ x¶y ra.
Eg59: I was afraid to go(1) near the dog because I was afraid of being(2) bitten.
I'm afraid that: t«i e r»ng + clause, I'm afraid so: t«i e lµ nh­ vËy.
Interested in doing = m×nh nghÜ vÒ viÖc ®ã, m×nh muèn lµm viÖc ®ã (së thÝch).
Interested to do: ®Æc biÖt ®i víi c¸c ®éng tõ ( hear, see, know, read, learn), cã nghÜa lµ mét ai ®ã , mét viÖc g× ®ã t¹o ra c¶m gi¸c thÝch thó cho ai ®ã.
Eg60: There's a football match on TV tonight. I'm interested in watching it.
Eg61: I was interested to hear that Diane has got a new job.
Note: Interest on
Interesting to sb
Interested in
Sorry to do = to apologise just before we do st
Sorry for doing = to apologise for st you did before.
Sorry that + clause
Sorry to have + PII
Eg62: I'm sorry to bother you, but I need to talk to you.
Note: §èi víi Sorry to (hear) ®Ó bµy tá sù th«ng c¶m ®èi víi ai ®ã.
Eg63: I'm sorry for shouting at you yesterday.
= I'm sorry I shouted at you yesterday.
8. C¸c thµnh ng÷ ®i theo "V-ing":
It's no use / good + V-ing: ®õng v« Ých.
Eg64: There's nothing you can do about this situation, so it's no use worrying about it.
Eg65: It's no good trying to persuade me. You won't succeed.
There's no point in + V-ing (kh«ng cã lý do g× ®Ó).
Eg66: There is no point in having a car if you never use it
Eg67: There was no point in waiting any longer, so we went.
It's (not) worth + V-ing (®¸ng vµ kh«ng ®¸ng)
Eg68: I live only in a short walk from here, so it's not worth taking a taxi.
(Have) difficulty (in) + V-ing (khã kh¨n trong c«ng viÖc)
Eg69: I had difficulty finding a place to live.
Eg70: Did you have difficulty in getting a visa?
Note: many difficulties but much difficulty
A waste of time/money + V-ing / to V (phÝ thêi gian, phÝ tiÒn)
Eg71: It was a waste of time reading that book. It was rubbish.
Eg72: It was a waste of money buying things you don't need.
Spend/waste (time) + V-ing (tèn/phÝ thêi gian lµm g×)
Eg73: He spent hours trying to repair the clock.
Eg74­: I waste a lot of time day dreaming.
(Be) busy + V-ing (bËn lµm g× ®ã).
Eg75: She said she couldn't see me. She was too busy doing other things.
9 Go + V-ing:

(a)Did you go shopping?
(b)We went fishing yesterday "Go" is followed by a gerund in certain idiomatic expressions to express, for the most part, recreational activities.
Go + Gerund
go birdwatching go hiking go sightseeing
go boating go hunting go skating
go bowling go jogging go skiing
go camping go moutain climbing go sledding
go canoeing go running go swimming
go dancing go sailing go tobogganing
go fishing go shopping go window shopping

ix Danh ®éng tõ - Gerund 4
10. Attribute (§Þnh ng÷)
Gerund (V-ing) ®øng tr­íc N:
Eg76: We often used sleeping-bag when travelling.
® a bag which is used for sleeping.
Eg77: They are going to the dancing hall every Saturday.
Gerund (V-ing) ®øng sau N: N + of V-ing:
Eg78: My teacher has got a good method of teaching.
Eg79: You should stop your habit of getting up late.
11. Adverbial Modifier (Tr¹ng ng÷):
By/Without + V-ing (Tr¹ng ng÷ chØ c¸ch thøc):

Eg80: He earns money by doing manual work.
doing brain work.
Smuggling.
Eg81­: I improve my English by speaking English to English as much as possible.
Eg82: I persuaded them by setting a bright example for them.
Eg­83: I can answer the teacher's question without looking at the book.
Eg84: He looked at me without saying anything.
Eg85: He came in without knocking.
For + V-ing (ChØ nguyªn nh©n, môc ®Ých):
Eg86: Money is used for buying things.
Eg87: People have got two eyes for seeing more.
After/at/in/on/before + V-ing (chØ thêi gian):
Eg­88: On returning home I found that the door was open.
Eg89: After repairing my bike I took a rest.
Eg90: He had dinner with him before leaving.
Sau c¸c liªn tõ When vµ While:
Eg­91­: When entering the bathroom, he caught a mouse nibbling the bar of soap.
Eg92: We ate while listening to the radio.
12. Danh ®éng tõ cã thÓ ®­îc bæ nghÜa bëi mét tÝnh tõ së h÷u hoÆc ®¹i tõ kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh.
Eg93: I can't imagine his marrying a girl of that sort.
Eg94: We came to class late. Mr Lee complained about the fact.
Mr Lee complained about our coming to class late.
Chóng ta cã thÓ nãi:
Mr Lee complained about us coming to class late.
§èi víi nh÷ng danh tõ riªng chóng ta cã thÓ lµm nh­ sau:
Mary came to class late. Mr Lee complained about the fact.
Mr Lee complained about Mary's coming to class late.
hoÆc: Mr Lee complained about Mary coming to class late.
13. C¸c h×nh th¸i kh¸c nhau vÒ th× vµ d¹ng:

Kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh Hoµn thµnh
(Active) Asking Having asked
(Passive) being asked Having been asked
Danh ®éng tõ kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh diÔn ®¹t mét hµnh ®éng còng x¶y ra víi hµnh ®éng cña ®éng tõ chÝnh.
Eg95: He likes asking questions.
He likes being asked questions.
Danh ®éng tõ hoµn thµnh diÔn ®¹t hµnh ®éng x¶y ra tr­íc hµnh ®éng cña ®éng tõ chÝnh.
Eg96­: I'm sorry for having done it (Active)
I'm sorry for having been done it (Passive).
Eg97­: Arthur said he was sorry he had hurt her feeling.
Arthur apologised for having hurt her feeling.

x Using verbs of perception(®éng tõ tri gi¸c)
See, notice, watch, look at, observe, hear, listen to, feel, smell + V-ing. + V.
Eg1: I saw my friend run down the street. (1) I saw my friend running down the street. (2)
§i sau ®éng tõ tri gi¸c cã thÓ lµ "V-ing" hoÆc lµ "V". Nh­ng theo sau lµ V hoÆc V-ing th× cã sù kh¸c biÖt.
Eg2: I heard a famous opera star sing at the concert last night.= I heard the singing from beginning to end.Nh­ng:
Eg3: When I walked into the room, I heard my classmate singing in the shower.= The singing was in progress when I heard it
Note: Chóng ta kh«ng dïng: I saw my friend to run down the street. (Incorrect)
* Verbs of perception: See , watch , hear...

Active: S + see + O + V (Ving) -> passive: S + be seen + to V( Ving )
Eg35: They saw her coming in -> She was seen coming in.
Eg36: He heard the bell ring -> The bell was heard to ring.
UNIT12 Mét sè ®éng tõ ®i sau lµ Simple Form.
* Let: - My father let me drive his car.
- I let my friend borrow my bicycle.
Note: ë thÓ bÞ ®éng:
- I was let to go out.
- I was allowed to go out.
* Help: - My brother helped me wash my car.
- My brother helped me to wash my car.
Note: Ngoµi hai cÊu tróc trªn: Help sb with doing st.
Eg: I used to help my mother with doing housework when I was a child.
* Make: - I made my brother carry my suitcase. (1)
- Mrs Lee made her son clean his room ® Make sb Do st
(1) ® My brother was made to carry my suitcase: ® to be made to V.
Note: Chóng ta cã thÓ dïng: Make sb do st
adj
- I always made her angry.
* Have: - I had my brother carry my suitcase (1) (Have sb do st)
- I always have a baber cut my hair.
Note: ë d¹ng bÞ ®éng lµ: Have st done.
(1) ® I had my suitcase carried by my brother.
Nãi thªm: Have st done = Get st done.
Get: The students got Mr H¶i to correct the mistakes. ® The students got the mistakes corrected by Mr H¶i.
“V “cßn ®­îc sö dông sau c¸c ®éng tõ khuyÕt thiÕu: Can, Could, May, might, shall, should, would, ought to, have to, used to... + V.
xi used to & be/ get used to
1. Used to do:
* Jack used to live in Chicago.
Means at a time in the past, Jack lived in Chicago, but he doesn't live in Chicago now. "Used to" express a habit, an activity, or a situation that existed in the past but which no longer exists.
- I used to cry all day when I was a child.
- I used to go fishing with my father.
Chó ý: Used to cã 2 d¹ng: i §éng tõ th­êng, i §éng tõ khuyÕt thiÕu bëi vËy cÊu tróc
Used to sÏ cã hai d¹ng ®i trong c©u phñ ®Þnh vµ nghi vÊn
I didn't use to smoke. Yes, I did.
Did you use to smoke? No, I didn't
I used to smoke .
I usedn't to smoke.
Used you to smoke? Yes, I used
No, I usedn't.
2. Be/get used to V-ing = be/get accustomed to V-ing: quen víi viÖc g×.
- Mary is used to living in a cold climate.
- She is accustomed to living there.
Chó ý: - to be used to V-ing: quen víi viÖc g× ®ã (l©u dµi)
- to get used to V-ing: míi quen víi viÖc g× ®ã.
* Some more examples:
a. I'm used to sleeping with the window open.
b. I'm accustomed to sleeping with the window open.
Note: c. I looking forward to going home next month.
d. They object to changing their plans at this late date.
Trong c©u (c) vµ (d) "to" lµ giíi tõ bëi vËy ®i sau lµ "Ving".
xii §¶o ng÷ - Inversion
Eg1: She did not say a word = Not a word did she say.
§èi víi mét sè tr¹ng tõ phñ ®Þnh hoÆc b¸n phñ ®Þnh:
Eg2: hardly (ever), never, seldom, not a, no, only in that case, for no reason at all, neither, nor, no sooner... than, not once, not only... as well, not until, nowhere, only, only by... , rarely... , scarcely... when, so, on no account, under no circumstance... cã hiÖn t­îng ®¶o ng÷.
Eg3: He seldom came there ® Seldom did he come there.
Eg4: The murderer killed Mr L for no reason at all. ® For no reason at all did the murderer kill Mr L.
Eg5: I will never forget you in my life. ® Never will I forget you in my life.
Eg6: She hardly ever has met him. ® Hardly ever has she met him.
Eg7: He did not realize that he had lost it till he got home. ® Not till he got home did he realize that he had lost it.
Eg8: This switch must not be touched on any account. ® On no account must this switch be touched.
Eg9: He was able to make himself heard only by shouting. ® Only by shouting was he able to make himself heard.

No sooner + had + S + PII + than + Simple past
Hardly + had + S + PII + when + Simple past
Scarcely + had + S + PII + when + Simple past (Võa míi... th×... )
Eg10: Hardly had I got onto the motorway when I saw 2 police cars following me.
Eg11: - This was the first time the race had been won by a European athlete.
® Never before had the race been won by a European athelete.
Sau Only + a time expression:
Eg12: Only after, only later, only once, only then, only when...
Eg13: I didn't realize who he was until later. ® Only later did I realize who he was
Eg14: We only despatch goods after receiving the money.
® Only after the money is received can/do we despatch goods.
Eg15: The workers only decided to go on strike when all attempts at negotiation had failed.
® Only when all attempts at negotiation had failed did the workers decide to go on strike.
Eg16: I went to the opera only once in the whole time I was in Italy.
® Only once did I go to the opera in the whole time I was in Italy.
* Sau Only + c¸c côm giíi tõ kh¸c
only by... , only in... , only with... , only at...
Eg17: - Science can serve the interest of the people only in our country.
® Only in our country can science serve the interest of the people.
* Sau giíi tõ + No:
At no time, in no way, on no account, under/in no circumstances:
Eg18: The result of the match was never in doubt. ® At no time was the result of the match in doubt.
* Sau c¸c thµnh ng÷ víi Not:
Not only, not until, no + object:
Eg19: The government did not order an inquiry into the accident until August.
® Not until August did the government order an inquiry into the accident.
* §¶o ng÷ ®i sau: so + adj + that, such... that, neither... /nor...
Eg20: Her business was so successful that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50
® So successful was her business that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50.
Eg21: Jack couldn't hear, and neither could he see.
* §èi víi tr¹ng ng÷ ®Æt ®Çu c©u ®Ó nhÊn m¹nh còng cã ®¶o ng÷.
Note: ®èi víi tr¹ng ng÷ chØ ®Þa ®iÓm kh«ng cÇn ®¶o do/does/did.
Eg22: A dog sat by his side ® By his side sat a dog.
01 Her success went beyond her expectation Never had she expected that she ___________
02 A country can’t be prosperous if it’s quite independent Only when _______
03 You can drive a car after you obtain a driving licence Only after ______
04 They had to wait for twelve hours before their flight left Only after a twelve hour wait ______
05 He never suspected that money had been stolen At no time ______
06 he recognized that he had been deceived only later Only later _______
07 You can do this successfully only with your friend’s help Only with ______
08 I’ve never seen such a house! Never ________
09 Our neighbour hasn’t once invited us into his house Not once _____
10 The workers only called off the strike agter a new pay offer Only after _____
11 The only way to eliminate world terrorism is by united opposition Only by _____
12 There was no precedent for the King’s resignation Never before ____
13 The truth only came out on the publication of the general’s personal diaries Only when
14 I didn’t realise who he was until later Only later ____
15 I have never seen such a mess in my life Never in ________
16 He did not give me a penny Not a penny
17 We only dispatch goods after receiving the money Only after the money ______
18 There are more people out of work in this country than ever before Never
19 You should ohone the police whatever may happen Under no circumctances ____
20 The result of the match was never in doubt At no time _____
xiii Make vµ do & C¸c ®éng tõ dÔ lÉn KH¸C
Make
make a phone call , make a mess,make a cup of tea,make a mistake,make a noise,make one's bed,make sb laugh,make a cake,make an arrangement,make a comment,make a decision,make a good impression,make (sb) an offer,make a promise,make a statement,make an excuse,make a date,make a speech,make a suggestion, make a profit,make an effort,make trouble,make fun of sb,make sb better,make oneself at home,make advance in,make an attempt,make a comparision,make a contribution,make a distinction,make a forecast,make a law,make a point,make an investment,make a plan,make a prediction,make a sound
Do
do the ironing,do sb a favour,do the shopping,do your best,do an exercise,do a good job,do badly in the test,do very well,do nothing at all,do work,do cleaning,do gardening,do military service, do + subjects domaths/history,do (st) interesting,do a boring job,do sb good,do an assignment,do the dishes,do the laundry,do a paper,do research,do business with,do one's work,do one's duty
C¸c ®éng tõ dÔ lÉn
Transitive (Ngo¹i ®éng tõ)
Ngo¹i ®éng tõ lµ ®éng tõ ph¶i cã t©n ng÷ ®i kÌm ®Ó bæ nghÜa.
1. Raise ® raised ® raised: gi¬ lªn, n©ng lªn, nu«i dËy
Eg1: Tom raised his hand
2. Intransitive (Néi ®éng tõ)
Néi ®éng tõ lµ ®éng tõ kh«ng cÇn cã t©n ng÷ ®i kÌm ®Ó bæ nghÜa
Rise ® rose ® risen: t¨ng, mäc lªn
Eg2: - The sun rises in the East
- The river has risen several meters
3. Lay ® laid ® laid (Transitive)
Eg3: Where are eggs laid by hens?
4. Lie ® lay ® lain (Intransitive): n»m
Eg4: He's lying on his bed
5. Lie ® lied ® lied (v) nãi dèi
Eg5: - Don't you dare lie to me!
- Lie in one's teeth: nãi dèi mét c¸ch th« bØ
6. Hang ® hung ® hung (Transitive): treo
Eg6: I hung my clothes on the closet.
7. Hang ® hanged ® hanged (Transitive) treo cæ.
Eg7:They hanged the criminal by the neck until he was dead.
8. find ® found ® found: t×m
9. found ®founded ® founded: thµnh lËp
I Choose the best answer
01 The student (raised, rose) his hand in class
02 Hot air (raises, rises)
03 Ann (set, sat) in a chair because she was tired
04 I (set, sat) your dictionary on the table a few minutes ago
05 Hens (lay, lie) eggs
06 Al is (laying, lying) on the grass in the prk right now
07 Jan (laid, lay) the comb on top of the dresser a few minutes ago
08 If you are tired, you should (lay, lie) down and take a nap
09 San Francisco (lay, lies) to the north of Los Angeles
10 We (hanged, hung) the picture on the wall
II Complete each sentence with the correct form of “make” or “do”. Make sure you use the correct tense !
01 What do you _____ for a living? – I’m a dentist
02 He ____ a big mistake when he changed his job
03 You look very tired. Would you like me ____ you a cup of coffee/
04 What have I _____ with handbag? I can’t find it anywhere!
05 I haven’t got a $20 note. Will two $10 notes _____?
06 Why does it take them so long ____ decisions?
07 They ____ fun of him whenever he wore his new hat
08 That will _____, children! You’ve giving me a terrible headache!
09 Why does she ____ such a fuss of him?
10 What have you _____ to this table cloth? It’s got some kind of red liquid all over it!
11 Don’t forget to ____ your hair before you go out
12 Could you ____ me a favour? Please drive me to town
13 This car is very economical. It ____ 40 miles to the gallon
14 He had difficulty ____ his way through the crowd
15 It’s very important to ____ a good impression at this meeting
16 Please ____ sure you’ve switched off all the lights before you leave
17 This room could ____ with a good clean
18 Please sit down and ____ yourself at home
19 Don’t have anything to ____ with him. He can’t be trusted
20 When he was younger, he _____ a fortune selling clothes
21 I think the answer is 2,376. What do you _____ it?
22 how would you like your steak ______? – Medium, please
23 He _____ so much noise that he woke her up
24 She wasn’t very happy about ______ without sugar in her coffee
25 The new manager ____ some changes as soon as he arrived
26 it doesn’t matter I your don’t come first as long as you _____ your best
27 I want to _______a phone call. Have you got any change?
28 How did you _____ in your exame? – Quite well, I think
29 have a nice cup of tea. It will _____ you good
30 Take this medicine. It will _____ you better
31 What time do you ____ it? – Nearly six o’clock
32 Be quite! Don’t a sound!

xiv ThÓ gi¶ ®Þnh cña danh tõ
Eg1: - The teacher demands that we be on time. (1)
- I insisted that he pay me the money.(2)
- I recommend that he not go to the concert. (3)
- It's important that they be told the truth. (4)
Trong (1), "be": ®éng tõ gi¶ ®Þnh. HiÖn t¹i gi¶ ®Þnh cña ®éng tõ lu«n ë d¹ng "Simple verb".
Eg: HiÖn t¹i gi¶ thiÕt cña "to be" lµ: I be , She be , He be , They be
§èi víi ®éng tõ th­êng (2) ® I pay, he pay
Kh«ng chia ng«i thø 3 sè Ýt cña danh tõ
ThÓ gi¶ ®Þnh ë thÓ phñ ®Þnh lµ: not go (3)
ThÓ gi¶ ®Þnh ë thÓ bÞ ®éng lµ: be + PII (4)
C¸c ®éng tõ vµ thµnh ng÷ th«ng th­êng ®i víi thÓ gi¶ ®Þnh cña danh tõ:

demand (that) suggest (that) It's important (that)
insist (that) recommend (that) It's necessary (that)
request (that) advise (that) It's essential (that)
ask (that) propose (that) It's vital (that)
require (that) urge (that) It's imperative (that)
Note: * suggest + (that) + S + (should) do
* suggested + (that) + S + did
* suggest + V-ing
Chøc n¨ng:
1. Chñ yÕu dïng ®Ó nhÊn m¹nh
2. Dïng ®Ó chóc mõng hoÆc cÇu nguyÖn.
- Long live the Communist Party of Vietnam.
- Success attend you!
3. Sau ®éng tõ diÔn ®¹t lßng mong muèn hoÆc chóc mõng cho t­¬ng lai sau c¸c ®éng tõ:
propose, suggest, insist, demand, order, require, recommend...
- It's our wish that he do what he pleases.
- We suggest that the task be fullfilled by 12 o'clock.
- It's important that he (should) have a notebook.
Qu¸ khø gi¶ thiÕt
* Dïng trong c©u ­íc kh«ng cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i: I wish = If only.
Eg2: Now she is bad at English.
® She wishes she were good at English.
= If only she were good at English.
® thÓ gi¶ ®Þnh qu¸ khø
* Trong c©u ®iÒu kiÖn kh«ng cã thùc ë hiÖn t¹i
Eg3: - If I knew his address now, I should write to him.
- If he were not ill, he would be sure to come.
* Trong c©u As if/ As though
Eg4: - It looks as if it would rain.
* Trong mÉu c©u: 'd rather sb did sth ( sb didn't do sth.)
Eg5: - I'd rather you came with us.
- I'd rather you didn't tell anyone what I said.
* Sau mÉu c©u: It's time sb Did sth = It's time for sb to do sth.
Eg6: It's time I were going. = It's time for me to go.
Qu¸ khø hoµn thµnh gi¶ thiÕt
* Dïng trong c©u "wish" kh«ng cã thùc ë qu¸ khø:
Eg7: I wish I had been at the seaside then.
* Dïng trong c©u ®iÒu kiÖn kh«ng cã thùc ë qu¸ khø:
Eg8: If I had had time last summer, I should have taken a long vacation.
* Trong c©u As if/ As though:
Eg9: He looked as if he had seen ghosts.
01 Mr. Adams insists that we ____ careful in our writing
02 They requested that we not ____ after midnight
03 She demanded that I ______ her the truth
04 I recommended that Jane ____ to the head of the departument
05 I suggest that everyone _____ a letter to the governor
06 It is essential that I _____ you tomorrow
07 It is important that he _____ the director of the English program
08 It is necessary that everyone _____ here on time
Give the correct form of the verb in parentheses. Some of the verbs are passive
01 Her advisor recommened that she (take) five courses
02 He insisted that the new baby (name) after his grandfather
03 The doctor recommended that she (stay) in bed for a few days
04 The students requested that the test (postpone) , but the instructor decided against a postponement
05 I requested that I (permit) to change my class
06 It is essential that pollution (control) and eventually (eliminate)
07 It was such a beautiful day that one of the students suggested we (have) class outside
08 The movie director insisted that everything about his prodections (be) authentic
09 It is vital that no one else (know) about the secret government operation
10 She asked that we (be) sure to lock the door behind us
11 It is essential that no one (admit) to the room without proper indentification
12 It is important that you (be, not) late
13 It is imperative that he (return) home immediately
14 The governor proposed that a new highway (build)
15 She specifically asked that I (tell, not) anyone else about it. She said it was important that no one else (tell) about it

xv §éng tõ nguyªn mÉu To infinitive 1
I.CÊu t¹o (Formations).
1. Nguyªn mÉu hiÖn t¹i ® To do , to work .
2. Nguyªn mÉu hiÖn t¹i tiÕp diÔn ® To be doing , to be working.
3. Nguyªn mÉu hoµn thµnh ® To have done, to have worked.
4. Nguyªn mÉu hoµn thµnh tiÕp diÔn ® To have been doing,
5. Nguyªn mÉu thô ®éng hiÖn t¹i ® To be done.
6. Nguyªn mÉu thô ®éng hoµn thµnh ® to have been done.
* Nguyªn mÉu ®Çy ®ñ = To + V.
Eg1: To deal with drug addicts is dangerous.
= It's dangerous to deal with drug addicts.
§«i khi kh«ng cã "to" ®øng tr­íc ®éng tõ, ®©y chÝnh lµ tr­êng hîp nguyªn mÉu kh«ng cã "to".
Eg2: We shouldn't deal with drug addicts.
Eg3: He will come back.
* Phñ ®Þnh cña nguyªn mÉu = Not + to + V.
Eg4: They decide not to attend the next symposium.
(héi nghÞ chuyªn ®Ò).
* Nguyªn mÉu chÎ (Split infinitive) lµ tr­êng hîp chÌn c¸c phã tõ Really, completely, entirely, duly, unduly... vµo gi÷a To vµ ®éng tõ.
Eg5: To duly punish serious crimes, National Assembly has made several amendments to the penal code.
(§Ó trõng ph¹t thÝch ®¸ng c¸c träng téi, Quèc héi ®· cã nhiÒu söa ®æi trong bé luËt h×nh sù).
II. Chøc n¨ng (Functions).
1. Lµm chñ ng÷ (Subject):
Eg6: To go by plane is quiker and safer. (1)
To obey the law is everyone's duty. (2)
To imitate them seemed unwise. (3)
Tuy nhiªn ®èi víi cÊu tróc trªn cã thÓ viÕt lµ:
(2) It's everyone's duty to obey the law.
(1) It's quicker and safer to go by plane.
2. Lµm bæ ng÷ (Complement).
Eg7: - Our purpose in life is to serve people.
- Their mission was to destroy the ememy naval bases.
- They are to be married soon.
- These books are not to be taken out of the library.
* Nguyªn thÓ cã thÓ lµm bæ ng÷ cho mét tÝnh tõ bæ ng÷:
to be afraid/ ready with/ easy/ able/ possible/ glad/ happy:
Eg8: - I'm happy to see you.
- He was proud to be a noble man.
- Don't be afraid to ask for help.
- You are free to go or stay.
- He's glad to be with me.
3. Lµm ®Þnh ng÷:
Eg9: - I have a lot of work to do.
- This is a hat to match your suit.
- This is a letter to be read at once.
- The question to be answered are on page 26.
- That is not the way to speak to your teacher.
4. Lµm t©n ng÷:
Eg10: - I like to read magazines.
- She decided not to swim.
5. Tr¹ng ng÷ chØ môc ®Ých (Adverb of purpose):
Eg11: - We stop (in order) to have a rest.
®to infinitive of purpose.
- I come to hear the concert.
- I'm waiting to hear your opinion.
Note:

a. He came here in order to study English
b. He came here to study English In order to: chØ môc ®Ých. Nã tr¶ lêi c©u hái "Why?", "In order to" th­êng ®­îc bá nh­ (b).
c.Incorrect:He came here for studying English
d.Incorrect: He came here for to study English
e.Incorrect: He came here for study English ChØ môc ®Ých ta dïng (in order) to, kh«ng dïng "for" víi mét ®éng tõ (*)
f.I went to the store for some bread
g.I went to the store to buy some bread "For"®«i khi ®­îc dïng ®Ó chØ môc ®Ých nh­ng nã lµ 1 giíi tõ vµ ®­îc tiÕp sau b»ng mét danh tõ chØ vËt,(f)
(*) Ngo¹i trõ tr­êng hîp: côm "be used for" chØ môc ®Ých riªng hay chung cña mét vËt. Trong tr­êng hîp ®ã, giíi tõ "for" ®­îc tiÕp sau b»ng "gerund" (A saw is used for cutting wood). Còng cã thÓ (A saw is used to cut wood). Tuy nhiªn, nãi vÒ mét vËt hay mét t×nh huèng riªng biÖt, ta dïng be used + an infinitive (A chain saw was used to cut down the old oak tree).(Incorrect: A chain saw used for cutting down the old oak tree).
* Khi nguyªn thÓ lµm tr¹ng ng÷ chØ kÕt qu¶ (Adverb of Result) th× th­êng ®øng sau c¸c phã tõ "too", "enough".
Eg12: - We are never too old to learn.
- The text is easy enough to understand.
Note: Enough cã hai vÞ trÝ: adj + enough
enough + noun.
Eg13: I have enough money to buy 3 houses.
6. NÕu ®éng tõ cã t©n ng÷ th× nguyªn thÓ lµm t©n ng÷ ®Ó sau:

S + V O to infinitive lµm Adv
He brings
He took
He put
He opens his son
the medicine
his coat
his lips in order to see me.
to get well
so as not to be cold.
as if/as though to say something
Note: In order to + V nh­ng In order that + clause
So as to + V So that + clause.
7. Côm nguyªn thÓ cã thÓ víi c¸c liªn tõ, trõ (why) thµnh mét côm nguyªn thÓ thay thÕ cho mét mÖnh ®Ò.
* Lµm chñ ng÷:
Eg14: What to do next was our problem.
S
How to prove it is easy to say.
S
* Lµm ®Þnh ng÷:
Eg15: - He hires a room where to live comfortably
- I have a key with which to open this door
* Lµm bæ ng÷:
Eg16: The question is where to go and what to see.

The problem is how to find a suitable man.
* Lµm t©n ng÷:
Eg17: - He is learning how to swim.
O
- I don't know whether to accept or refuse.

- I can't decide where to go, when to start.
* Lµm tr¹ng ng÷:
Eg18: - She stands up so as to see better.

- He talk as if to know all about it.
8. CÊu tróc nguyªn thÓ ®i víi "For":
* Chñ ng÷ phøc:
- For him to understand the problem is not difficult.
- For us to study President Ho Chi Minh is necessary.
* §Þnh ng÷ phøc:
- There was nothing for him to do.
- This is the best way for the machine to be repaired.
* Bæ ng÷ phøc:
- There is for you to decide.
- Their hope was for Nam to marry Lan.
* T©n ng÷ phøc:
She waited for the bus to start.
* Tr¹ng ng÷ phøc (chØ môc ®Ých hoÆc kÕt qu¶):
- I open the door for the children to pass.
- Call me up for me not to be late.
* MÉu c©u kh¸c:
1. §éng tõ tri gi¸c: to see, to hear, to feel, to watch...:
Eg19: Chñ ®éng: They heard him repeat the text.
BÞ ®éng: He was heard to repeat the text.
Eg20: Chñ ®éng: They heard him repeating the text.
BÞ ®éng: He was heard repeating the text.
2. Sau c¸c ®éng tõ chØ tinh thÇn: to think, believe, consider, deny, declare, except, suppose...
Eg21­: BÞ ®éng - He's known to be a qualified teacher.
Chñ ®éng: They know him to be a qualified teacher.
- The book is believed to have been written in the 17th century.
3. Sau ®éng tõ chØ mÖnh lÖnh, yªu cÇu, cho phÐp: to allow, compel, command, force, make, order, permit:
Eg22: He was made to do so = They made him do so.
4. §éng tõ to say, to report:
Eg23: He's said to be a good dentist.
= People say that he's a good dentist.
xvi Participle - Ng÷ ph©n tõ
Cã 2 lo¹i ng÷ ph©n tõ: - Ng÷ ph©n tõ hiÖn t¹i (PI).
- Ng÷ ph©n tõ qu¸ khø (PII).
Ng÷ ph©n tõ ë hiÖn t¹i cã nghÜa chñ ®éng, cßn ng÷ ph©n tõ ë qu¸ khø mang nghÜa bÞ ®éng.
Eg1: Chñ ®éng: I heard him playing the "Moonlight sonate".
BÞ ®éng: I heard the "Moonlight sonate" played by him.
VÞ trÝ cña ng÷ ph©n tõ:
§éng tÝnh tõ dïng nh­ tÝnh tõ khi nã ®øng tr­íc danh tõ
Eg2: - I have his written promise.
- Listen to the singing birds.
§éng tÝnh tõ ®øng sau danh tõ th× nã cã tÝnh chÊt lµ ®éng tõ nhiÒu h¬n:
Eg3: Here's a letter written by my mother.
® which was written.
The birds singing in the trees filled the air with music.
® which was singing.
A. Ng÷ ph©n tõ hiÖn t¹i (Present Participle)
I. Chøc n¨ng (Functions).
1 Ng÷ ph©n tõ hiÖn t¹i cã thÓ ®­îc sö dông ®Ó thµnh lËp c¸c th× tiÕp diÔn:
Eg4:
We are learning English now
This time yesterday we were watching a football match on TV This time next year, I shall be studying at one university.
I have been learning English for 2 years but my E is still poor.
I had been walking in the park for 2 hours before it rained. By the end of this week, I'll have been living here for 6 months.
2. Ng÷ ph©n tõ cßn ®­îc sö dông nh­ mét ®Þnh ng÷:
(§øng tr­íc danh tõ).
Eg5: - The sleeping baby is my son.
®the baby who is sleeping (PI)
- We used sleeping-bag when travelling.
® a bag is used for sleeping (G).
* Some more examples:
PI: - running water = The water is running.
- leaking pipes = The pipes are leaking
G: - Drinking = The water is used for drinking
- Cooling water = The water is used for being cool.
§øng sau danh tõ:
Trong tr­êng hîp nµy PI dïng t­¬ng ®­¬ng víi c©u phô ®Þnh ng÷ ë chñ ®éng
Eg6: The man talking to my father is a doctor.
The man who is talking to my father is a doctor.
The ships lying in the port belong to my company.
The student sitting at the window listens to
the teacher's explanation most attentively.
3. Bæ ng÷:
Eg7: - The story is interesting.
- He is very good-looking.
- The crops are promising.
4. §Þnh ng÷:
Eg8: - It's an interesting story.
- It's a promising beginning.
- He's a promising writer.
- She's an inviting girl.
5. Tr¹ng ng÷:
Tr¹ng ng÷ chØ thêi gian:
Eg9: - When I am talking to him, I see that he's an experienced man.
= talking to him, I see that he's an experienced man.
- Standing here, I can see the church.
- Looking into her eyes, I know she loves me.
- Entering the room, I saw them talking to each other.
Note: Ta cã thÓ chuyÓn tõ hai c©u ®¬n liÒn ý cã chñ ng÷ ®ång nhÊt thµnh mét c©u ®¬n cã ng÷ ph©n tõ hiÖn t¹i dïng lµm tr¹ng ng÷.
Eg10: ·Ba is sitting in a chair, he watches TV.
® Sitting in a chair, Ba watches TV.
· She doesn't have a car, so she finds it difficult to get around. ® Not having a car, she finds it difficult to get around.
· The man wasn't able to understand English. So he didn't know what I said.
® Not being able to understand English, he didn't know what I said.
· Feeling tired, I went to bed early.
· He opened the drawer and took out the gun.
® Opening the drawer he took out the gun.
Khi hµnh ®éng nµy x¶y ra tr­íc hµnh ®éng kh¸c, chóng ta cã thÓ dïng "having done" cho hµnh ®éng x¶y ra tr­íc.
Eg11:
· We bought our tickets. Then we went into the theatre.
® Having bought tickets, we went into the theatre.
· He has travelled a lot. So he knows a lot about other countries.
® Having travelled a lot, he knows a lot about other countries.
NÕu mÖnh ®Ò më ®Çu (giíi thiÖu) ë d¹ng bÞ ®éng ta dïng: (Being) + PII - Being th­êng ®­îc l­îc bá.
Eg12:
The letter was written in very poor handwriting and was difficult to read.
® (Being) written in very poor handwriting, the letter was difficult to read.
Khi hµnh ®éng thø hai b¾t nguån tõ c©u tr­íc th× chóng ta biÕn ®æi mÖnh ®Ò thø hai thµnh "V-ing".
Eg13: She went out, slamming the door.
6. T©n ng÷ phøc:
* "HiÖn t¹i ph©n tõ" cã thÓ ®øng sau "®éng tõ tri gi¸c"
Eg14: - I see him passing my house everyday
- Didn't you hear the clock striking?
- I felt the car skidding.
* Catch, find, leave + Object + Present Participle
Eg15: - I caught them stealing my apples.
- I found a tree lying across the road.
- I left him talking to Bob
= He was talking to Bob when I left.
* Go, home, spend, waste, be busy + ving:
Eg16: - Come dancing
- I'm going shopping this afternoon.
- He spends two hours a day travelling.
- We wasted a whole afternoon trying to repair the car.
- She's busy singing.
* Have fun, have a good time + V-ing:
Eg17: - We had fun playing volleyball
- We had a good time
- I had trouble
- I had difficulty finding his house.
- I had a hard time
- I had a difficult time
* sit/stand/lie + expression of place + V-ing:
Eg18: - She sat at her desk writing a letter.
- I stood there wondering what to do next.
- He is lying in bed reading a novel.
* find/catch + (pro)noun + Ving ("find" , "catch" mean discover").
Eg19:
- When I walked into my office, I found George using my phone.
- When I walked into my office, I caught a thief looking through my desk drawer.
* Ng÷ ph©n tõ cßn cã thÓ thay thÕ cho (as, since, because + clause).
Eg20: - As
- Because I was tired, I couldn't go to school.
- Since
® Being tired, I couldn't go to school.
Being asked difficult questions, he failed at the exams.
Ph©n tõ qu¸ khø (Past Participle)
Chøc n¨ng cña ®éng tõ qu¸ khø (cßn gäi lµ §éng tÝnh tõ PII).
1. Bæ ng÷:
- The glass is broken
- The boy is tired.
2. §Þnh ng÷:
* §Æt tr­íc danh tõ:
- The broken glass was on the floor.
- A clean-shaven man knocks at the door.
* §Æt sau danh tõ:
- The question asked by her is difficult to answer.
= The question which is asked by her is difficult to answer
- The article written by Jim is very important.
3. Tr¹ng ng÷:
Th­êng ®i víi liªn tõ: If, when, while, unless, as if
- If asked, I shall help you
- When asked, he explains everything very carefully.
Note: NÕu mÖnh ®Ò më ®Çu b»ng d¹ng bÞ ®éng ë thÓ (QKPT) ta dïng: Having been + PII
- The post-man had been bitten twice, he refused to deliver our letters.
® Having been bitten twice, the post-man refused to deliver our letters.
Note: I'm boring <> I'm bored.
xvii Direct and indirect speech (reported) trùc tiÕp - gi¸n tiÕp
* Lêi nãi trùc tiÕp lµ l¾p l¹i nguyªn vÑn lêi cña ng­êi nãi:
My brother said: "I'm ready" ® He said, "I'm writing a letter".
* Lêi nãi gi¸n tiÕp lµ thuËt l¹i ®óng ý cña ng­êi nãi d­íi mét d¹ng kh¸c.
My brother said: "I'm ready". ® My brother said he was ready.
* Mét sè ®iÓm kh¸c nhau gi÷a 2 c¸ch diÔn ®¹t nµy:
1. Bá dÊu 2 chÊm, dÊu phÈy, bá dÊu ngoÆc ®¬n hay ngoÆc kÐp.
2. §æi ng«i cña ®éng tõ vµ tÝnh tõ së h÷u.
3. §æi th× cña ®éng tõ.
4. §æi mét sè ®¹i tõ, tÝnh tõ chØ ®Þnh vµ phã tõ.
I. §æi ®¹i tõ vµ tÝnh tõ së h÷u.

Trùc tiÕp Gi¸n tiÕp
Ng«i thø nhÊt sè Ýt
sè nhiÒu Ng«i thø ba sè Ýt
sè nhiÒu
Ng«i thø hai Ng«i 1, 2, 3 (Tïy theo ®èi t­îng thuËt l¹i ®èi víi ng­êi nghe)
Eg1: I do my exercise.
® He said (that) he did his exercise.
NÕu nh¾c l¹i chÝnh lêi m×nh nãi th× tÊt nhiªn ®¹i tõ kh«ng ®æi.
Eg2: I said "I take mine"
® I said I took mine.
Tïy theo ®èi t­îng nãi vµ nghe:
Eg3: Teacher: Nam, you must do your exercise by yourself.
(Ba cña Nam nãi víi ng­êi kh¸c:)
® The teacher told Nam that he must do his exercise by himself.
(Nam nh¾c l¹i lêi thÇy:)
®The teacher said that I must do my exercise by myself.II. §æi th× ®éng tõ:

Trùc tiÕp Gi¸n tiÕp
* Simple Present Simple Past
"I never eat meat", he explained He explained that he never ate meat
* Present Continuous Past Continuous
"I'm waiting for Ann", he said He said that he was waiting for Ann
* Present Perfect Past Perfect
"I have found a flat" he said He said that he had found a flat
* Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous
He said "I've been waiting for ages" He said he had been waiting for ages
* Simple Past Past perfect
"I took it home with me" she said She said she had taken it home with her
* Past continuous Past perfect
* will/shall would/should
* have to (must) had to (must/had to)
* can/may could/might
* ought to/had better ought to/had better.

III. §æi tõ chØ thêi gian vµ ®Þa ®iÓm:
Trùc tiÕp Gi¸n tiÕp
1. Today 01. That day
2. Yesterday 02. The day before
3. the day before yesterday 03. Two days before
4. Tomorrow 04. The next day/the following day
5. the day after tomorrow 05 Two days later
6. this morning 06 that morning
7. this afternoon 07 that afternoon
8. tonight 08 that night
9. yesterday morning 09 the morning before/the previous morning.
10. yesterday afternoon 10 the afternoon before/the previous afternoon.
11. last night 11 the night before/the previous night.
12. last saturday 12 the saturday before/the previous saturday.
13. Next saturday 13 the next saturday
14. last week 14 the previous week
15. last year 15 the previous year
16. a year ago 16 a year before
17. Next week 17 the following week
18. Next year 18 the following year
19. nowadays 19 in those days
20. now 20 then/at that time
21. ago 21 before/earlier
22. here 22 there
23. this 23 that
24. these 24 those
*Note: Khi chØ mét ch©n lý râ rµng hoÆc mét hµnh ®éng x¶y ra th­êng xuyªn ta vÉn dïng th× hiÖn t¹i.
Eg4: He said:"The sun is 92 million miles away".
=>He said that the sun is 92 million miles away.
Eg5: He said:"I get up early and do morning exercise everyday".
=>He said that he gets up and does morning exercise everyday
* NÕu ng­êi kh¸c nh¾c l¹i c©u nãi vÉn ë cïng 1 ®Þa ®iÓm vµ cïng 1 thêi gian th× kh«ng cÇn ®æi §¹i tõ, tÝnh tõ chØ ®Þnh vµ phã tõ.
* Cã khi kh«ng cã liªn tõ trùc tiÕp, nh­ng ph¶i thªm vµo lêi nãi gi¸n tiÕp ®Ó chØ nguyªn nh©n.
Eg6: She said"I'm so tired!I've been writing for 4 hours".
=>She said she was so tired because/as/since she's been writing for 4 hours.
- Còng cã nh÷ng côm tõ hoÆc tõ ph¶i l­îc bá ®Ó khái trïng hîp.
Eg7. She said to him"it's very kind of you to help me,very kind indeed".
® She said it was very kind of him to help her very kind indeed.
So, such trong c©u than ®æi thµnh Very
Eg8. He said "Lan plays the Moonlight sonate so well"
=>He said Lan played the Moonlight sonate verywell.
* NÕu c©u hái cã tõ ®Ó hái, ta gi÷ nguyªn nh÷ng tõ ®Ó hái ®ã khi ®æi sang gi¸n tiÕp, nh­ng chó ý c©u hái ph¶i viÕt xu«i nh­ mét c©u trÇn thuËt, lui l¹i mét th×.
Eg9. He said to me"Why are you so late?"
=>He said to me why I was so late?
* NÕu c©u hái lµ d¹ng Yes/No questions ta ph¶i thªm vµo liªn tõ If or Whether.
Eg10. He said to me"Do you like Saigon?"
=>He said to me if/whether you liked Saigon.
IV. ChuyÓn c©u mÖnh lÖnh (cÇu khiÕn) trùc tiÕp sang c©u gi¸n tiÕp th× ph¶i chó ý:
Kh«ng dïng ®éng tõ say(to) mµ dïng tell, ask, order, command, request, beg...:
Eg11. she said to him"Open the window" => she told him to open the window.
Eg12. "Go out" => she ordered him to go out.
Eg13: Officer (to soldiers) "Fire!" => The officer commanded the soldiers to fire.(ra lÖnh).
Eg14: He said to a passer-by"Will you show me the way to the station?"
=> He asked a passer-by to show him the way to the station.
Eg15: The child said to his mother"do take me to the circus!" => The child begged his mother to take him to the circus.
Eg16:The ticket collector requested the passenger"Produce your tickets"
=> The ticket collector requested the passenger to produce his tickets.
Note: C©u mÖnh lÖnh phñ ®Þnh th× dïng:
Not + §éng tõ nguyªn thÓ.
Eg17: Don't open the door -> he told me not to open the door.
V. C¸ch chuyÓn c©u than.
Eg18. She said"how pleasant!Lan comes to dinner with us"
=> She cried joyfully (with joy) that Lan came to dinner with them.
Eg19. She said"I'm sorry!I have no money!"
=> She said sadly(with deep sadness/sorrow fully)that she had no money.
Eg20. She said "I'm sure we'll never meet again". => She said regretfully she was sure they'd never meet again.
Eg21. She said to him"Excuse me for disturbing you". => She apologized to him for disturbing him.
Eg22. She said to the teacher"I beg your pardon,I've forgotten my copy book".
=>She begged the teacher's pardon for having forgotten her copy book.
Eg23. She said to them"Thank you for your help". => She thanked them for their help.
Eg24. He said"good luck" => He wished me luck.
Eg25. He said"Liar" => He called me Liar.
Eg26. He said"congratulations!". => He congratulated me.
Eg27. He said"what a dreadful idea"or"how dreadful". => He exclained that it was a dreadful idea / was dreadful.
Eg28. He said"can you swim?" and I said "no". => He asked me if I could swim and I said I couldn't.
Eg29. He said "Will you have time to do it?" and I said"yes".
=>He asked me if I would have time to do it and I said I would.
VI. C¸c mÉu ®Æc biÖt ®i víi"Let".
A."Let's"usually expresses a suggestion and is reported by"suggest"in Indirect speech.
Eg30. He said"Let's leave the case at the station." => He suggested leaving the case at the station.
=> He suggested that they/we should leave the case at the station
Eg31. He said"Let's not say anything about it till we hear the facts".
=>He suggested that they shouldn't say anything about it till we heard the facts.
=>He suggested not saying anything about It till we heard the facts.
B. "Let's"sometimes expresses a call to action.It's then usually reported by urge/advise + object+infinitive.
Eg32. The strike leader said"Let's show the bosses that we are united".
=>The strike leader urged the worker to show the bosses that they were united.
C. Let him/them.
In the theory "let him/them"expresses a command(ra lÖnh).But very often the speaker has no authority(ñy quyÒn)over the person who is to obey the command.
Eg33."It's not my business", said the postman."let the government do something about it".
* §èi víi lo¹i nµy chóng ta ph¶i thuËt l¹i b¾t ®Çu b»ng: ought to/should.
=>He said that wasn't his business and that government ought to/should do something about it.
VII. Hçn hîp th× vµ c¸c kiÓu c©u.
* He said to me "My bicycle is broken. I can't ride it".
® He told me that his bicycle was broken and that he couldn't ride it.
* Hai c©u hái:
My father said "Why are you late? Did you miss the train?"
® My father asked why I was late and if I had missed the train.
* Hai c©u truyÒn khiÕn:
He said "Go outside! Wait in the passenger!"
® He told me to go outside and to wait in the passenger.
* Mét c©u hái vµ mét c©u ph¸t biÓu:
He said "When will you come? I shall be ready at anytime".
® He asked when I would come and said that he should be ready at anytime.
* Mét c©u mÖnh lÖnh vµ mét c©u trÇn thuËt:
He said "Don't walk on the ice. It isn't safe".
® He told me not to walk on the ice and said that it wasn't safe.
Reported Speech
Exercise 1
1 “Don’t repeat this mistake again!” the instructor warned the sports­man.
2 “Leave your address with the secretary,” the assistant said to me.
3 “Phone to me for an answer tomorrow,” the manager said to the client.
4 “Don’t be so silly,” the father said to the kid.
5 “Give a smile,” the photographer said to me.
6 “Please, help me to make a decision,” Ann asked her friend.
7 “Don’t leave these books on the table, put them back on the shelf”, librarian said to the student.
8 “Be a good girl and sit quietly for five minutes”, the nurse said to the child.
9 “Leave your things here,” my cornpanion advised me.
10 “Don’t discuss this question now”, said the chairman to the participants.
Exercise 2
1 “Will it be safe to stay in the mountains for the night if the weather doesn’t change for the better?” we asked the guide.
2 The porter said to me, “I’ll wake you up, when the train arrives in Leeds.”
3 My wife said to me: “While you are away, I’ll do the packing.”
4 “Don’t leave until I phone you,” he asked me.
5 “After he leaves hospital, they’ll take him to the South,” the doctor said.
6 “They’ll wait for the fisherman to return until it gets dark,” the local man explained to me.
7 “As soon as I hear from him, I’ll let you know,” my neighbour said to me.
8 “I’ll live in town till my husband returns from the expedition and when he returns, we’ll go to the seaside together,” she said.
9 The mother said to her son, “Sit still, please.”
10 John said to his friend, “Come and spend a week with us.”
Exercise 3
1 “Have you travelled abroad much?” he asked me.
2 “Who has written this note?” the boss asked the secretary.
3 “I’ve just received a postcard from my sister,” my friend said to me.
4 “The students also took part in arranging the conference,” the chair­man said.
5 “Have you been here long?” the stranger asked me.
6 “Did you really see this happen with your own eyes?” the policeman asked the boy.
7 “I hope they will have taken a decision by the end of the meeting,” she remarked.
8 “Did you watch the detective film on TV yesterday?” he asked her.
9 “This story happened long ago,” he said, “and few people remember anything about it”
10 “I haven’t read so interesting a book since I don’t remember when,” she said
Exercise 4
1 Tom said to the girl: “When did you have this picture taken?”
2 “Shall we go somewhere for a cup of coffee after class?” Tom said.
3 John said to Mary, “Why don’t you wear your hair a little longer.”
4 “Would you like another cup of tea?” the landlady said to the guest.
5 My sister said to me, “What about going to áee Aunt Mary on Sun­day?”
6 She asked me, “Have you ever seen a flying saucer?”
7 James said: “Do you want me to type this letter for you?
8 Alfred said to John, “I didn’t use your cassette player! Someone else did, not me.”
9 Father said, “I was the superintendent while this school was being built.”
10 The woman said, “If I had a gas stove, it would save me a lot of time.”
Exercise 5
1 Jane said to Bill, “When do you expect to finish your assignment?”
2 The man said to the boy: “Can you show me the way to the bank?”
3 Fred asked the postman: “Are there any letters for me today?”
4 Henry said to the librarian, “How many books can I borrow at a timer?”
5 John asked his friend. “How did you manage to know my phone number?”
6 “These old buildiags might have already disappeared by the time I am back next year?” he said
7 The boys said to the old woman: “What can we do to help you?”
8 The guests said to the doorman: ‘Where should we leave our coats?”
9 Tom asked his brother: “Why did you advise them to go sight-seeing on foot?”
10 I asked the children: “Who took away the magazines from my desk?”
Exercise 6
1 Rose said, “I was just leaving the office when I came face to face with a stranger.”
2 Ann asked her brother, “Do you expect to be admitted to the univer­sity?”
3 Richard asked Jane, “What are you planning to do tomorrow?”
4 She asked her boyfriend, “Is it true that your father fought in the last war?”
5 Jane said to me, “Where have you been all this time?”
6 Mary said to her husband, “Did you see my handbag anywhere?”
7 The inspector said to the woman, “What were you doing at 7 o’clock yesterday evening?”
8 The passenger said to the taxi-driver: “Hurry up!” and he added “I must be at the station on time.”
9 Tom said to himself: “Why I haven’t thought of this before?”
10 Father said: “The taxi is coming now. Is everyone ready?”
Exercise 7
1 Helen said, “I think I’ll have to find a better job. I can’t make both ends meet.”
2 He said to her, “Why are you so late? I’ve been waiting for half an hour already.”
3 She said to him: “Don’t let them glown. I’ll be very embarrassed if you go back on your words.”
4 She said to her husband: “You’d better not drink too much. You may lose control of the car and have a bad accident.”
5 The boy said to his mother: “When shall we have lunch? I’m very hungry.”
6 He said, “I don’t understand why she has refused to join us on the trip.”
7 She said to him, “I’m glad you’ve come. Sit down, pleases”
8 Mr Brown said to his wife, “I don’t feel like going out this evening. Let’s ask the Browns to come over for a chat.”
9 “It’s raining too hard to go out. We’d better stay home tonight and watch TV instead.” John said.
10 “Could you ring up the station and find out when the train comes in?” said Tom to me.
Exercise 8
1 “Be careful. Don’t go too near the edge of the cliff,” she said to the boys.
2 “Please, please come to help me with the assignment,” my friend said to me.
3 “I wouldn’t buy that sort of raincoat if I were you,” my friend said to me.
4 “Would you mind moving your bicycle?” said the janitor. “It’s in the way.
5 “Could I take out another book, please,” I said to the librarian.
6 “Remember to leave the window open when you’re using the gas stove,” my mother said to me.
7 “Wear your school badge or they won’t let you into the classroom” my teacher said to me.
8 “Would you like to come over to my house for a slide show?” my friend said to me.
9 “Show me your driver’s licence, will you?” the policeman said to the dnmken driver.
10 “Do come again next weekend,” the host said to the visitor.
xviii Relative pronouns
*ThÕ nµo lµ mét mÖnh ®Ò: A clause is a group of words containing a subject and a verb
* ThÕ nµo lµ mét mÖnh ®Ò ®éc lËp: An independent clause is a complete sentence. It contains the main subject and verb of a sentence (It's called a main clause)
*ThÕ nµo lµ mét mÖnh ®Ò phô thuéc: A dependent clause is not a complete sentence. It must be connected to an independent clause.
* ThÕ nµo lµ mét mÖnh ®Ò tÝnh ng÷: An adjective clause is a dependent clause that modifies (bæ ng÷) a noun. It describes, identifies (ph©n biÖt) hoÆc gives further information about a noun (An adjective clause is also called a relative clause).

Chñ ng÷ /A/ T©n ng÷ /B/ Së h÷u c¸ch/C/
*ChØ ng­êi who/that whom (viÕt)
who (nãi)/that whose
*ChØ vËt which/that which/that whose/of which
A. 1. I thanked the woman. She helped me

Þ I thanked the woman who/that helped me.
2.The book is mine. It 's on the table.

Þ The book which/that is on the table is mine.

B. 3.The man was Mr John. I saw him
Þ The man who(m)/that I saw was Mr John.
4. The movie wasn't very good. I saw it last night
Þ The movie which/that I saw last night wasn't very good.
C. 5.I know the man. His bicycle was stolen

Þ I know the man whose bicycle was stolen.
6 I have a painting. It's value is inestimable

- I have a painting whose value is inestimable
- I have a painting the value of which is inestimable.
* Use "where" for replacing for place
Eg1: - The building is very old. He lives there.
Þ The building where he lives is very old.
- NÕu cã giíi tõ th× chó ý "in which" = "where".
Eg2:- The building is very old. He lives in that building.
Þ The building in which he lives is very old.
The building where he lives is very old.
The building which he lives in is very old.
* Use when for replacing for time.
Eg3: - I'll never forget the day. I met you then.
Þ I'll never forget the day when I met you.
- NÕu cã giíi tõ th× chó ý: "on which" = when.
Eg4: - I'll never forget the day. I met you on the day.
Þ I'll never forget the day on which/that I met you.
I'll never forget the day when I met you.


* Mét sè chó ý vÒ giíi tõ:
1.She is the woman. I told you about her.
Þ She's the woman about whom I told you.
She's the woman whom I told you about.
2. The music was good. I listened to it last night.
Þ The music to which we listened last night was good.
The music which we listened to last night was good.
3.In my class there are 20 students. Most of them are from the far east.
Þ In my class there are 20 students, most of whom are from the far east.
4.He gave several reasons. Only a few of them were valid. (cã hiÖu lùc)
Þ He gave several reasons, only a few of which was valid.
5. The teacher discussed Tim. One of his problems was poor study habits.
Þ The teacher discussed Tim, one of whose problems was poor study habits.
* Note: An adjective clause may contain an expression of quantity with "of": some of, many of, most of, none of, two of, half of, both of, neither of, each of, all of, several of, a few of, little of, a number of... The expression of quantity precedes the pronoun ONLY. Whom, which and whose are used in this pattern. An adjective clause that begins with an
expression of quantity is more common in writing than speaking, commas are used.
* Using which to modify a whole sentence.
Eg5: Tom was late. That surprised me. (1)
® Tom was late, which surprised me.
Eg6: The elevator is out of order. This is too bad. (2)
® The elevator is out of order, which is too bad.
* Nh÷ng tr­êng hîp dïng THAT (kh«ng dïngWho/Which).
* Sau tÝnh tõ ë so s¸nh tuyÖt ®èi, kÓ c¶ "first" vµ "last"
Eg7: - He's the best student that I have ever known.
- This is the last letter that he wrote.
- He was the first person that broke the silence.
* Sau nh÷ng ®¹i tõ kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh:
Eg8: - He never says anything that is worth listening to.
* Sau c¸c tõ "all, only, very, same, any".
Eg9: - All that glitters is not gold.
- Answer all the question that I asked you.
- I bought the only dictionary that they had.
- This is the same watch that I lost yesterday.
- Any boy that wants to succeed must work hard.
* Sau c¸c c«ng thøc më ®Çu: "It was/is... ".
Eg10: - It was in summer that we went to Tam Dao.
- It was I that broke the window.
* "That" th­êng dïng trong c¸c mÖnh ®Ò phô ®Þnh ng÷ cÇn thiÕt ®Ó lµm râ nghÜa cho tõ ®øng tr­íc.
Eg11: Bring me the cup that is on the table, and no other. (chø kh«ng ph¶i c¸i nµo kh¸c).
* Kh«ng ®­îc dïng THAT khi cã dÊu ",".
Relative clauses(Clauses with or without who, that, which)
1.The woman is a doctor. She lives next door.
® The woman who lives next door is a doctor.
(who = the woman = subject).
2.The woman was away on holiday. I wanted to see her.
® The woman whom I wanted to see was away on holiday.
whom = the woman = object.
* Note: Khi who, that, whom, which lµ object ta cã thÓ bá.
* C¸ch nhËn biÕt:
- NÕu sau who, that, which lµ ®éng tõ khi ®ã who, that, which lµ chñ ng÷ ® kh«ng bá ®i ®­îc.
Sau who, that, which lµ danh tõ khi ®ã who, that, which lµ t©n ng÷ hay bæ ng÷ ® cã thÓ bá ®i ®­îc
Defining and non-defining.(MÖnh ®Ò giíi h¹n vµ mÖnh ®Ò kh«ng h¹n ®Þnh).
I. Defining relative clauses:
These describe the preceding (®i tr­íc) noun in such a way as to distinguish (v¹ch ra sù kh¸c biÖt) it from other nouns of the same class. A clause of this kind is essential to clear understanding of the noun.
1. The woman is a doctor. She lives next door.
® The woman who lives next door is a doctor.
2. We know a lot of people. They live in London.
® We know a lot of people who live in London.
* "who lives next door, who live in London" is relative. If we omit it, it's not clear or the subject.
II. No-defining relative clauses:
No-defining relative clauses are placed after nouns which are defined already - They don't therefore define the noun, but merely (®¬n thuÇn) add something to it by giving some more information about it. Unlike defining relative clauses, they aren't essential in the sentence and can be omitted without causing confusion (lén xén). Also unlike defining relatives, they are separated from their noun by commas. Their pronouns can never be omitted in a non-defining relative clause. The construction is fairly formal and more common in written than in spoken English.
Eg12:My neighbour says there'll be no apples this year.
He's very pessimistic.
® My neighbour, (who)'s very pessimistic, says there'll be no apples this year.
"who" in this sentence can be omitted.
Reducation of adjective clauses to adjective phrases : introducation
Terms:
clause: A clause is a group of related words that contains a subject and a verb
phrase: A phrase is a group of related words that does not contains a subject and a verb
(a) ADJECTIVE CLAUSE:
The girl who is sitting next to me is Mary
(b) ADJECTIVE PHRASE:
The girl sitting next to me is Mary
An adjective phrase is a reduction of an adjective clause. It modiffies a noun. It does not contain a subject and a verb. The adjective clause in (a) can be reduced to the adjective phrase in (b), (a) and (b) have the same meaning.
(c) CLAUSE: The boy is playing the piano is Ben
(d) PHRASE: The boy playing the piano is Ben
(e) CLAUSE: The boy (whom) I saw was Tom
(f) PHRASE: (none)
Only adjective clauses that have a subject pronoun - who, which, or that - are reduced to modifying adjective phrases. The adjective clause in (e) cannot be reduted to an adjective phrase.
Changing n adjective clause to an adjective phrase
There are two ways in which an adjective clause is changed to an adjective phrase:
(1) The subject pronoun is omitted AND the be form of the verb is omitted
(a) CLAUSE: The man who is talking to John is from Korea
PHRASE: The man X X talking to John is from Korea
(b) CLAUSE: The ideas which are presented it that book are interesting
PHRASE: The ideas X X presented it that book are interesting
(c) CLAUSE: Ann is the woman who is responsible for preparing the budget
PHRASE: Ann is the woman X X responsible for preparing the budget
(d) CLAUSE: The books that are on that sheft are mine
PHRASE: The books X X on that sheft are mine
(2) If there is no be form of a verb in the adjective clause, it is sometimes possible to omit the subject pronoun and change the verb to its-ing form.
(e) CLAUSE: English has an alphabet that consists of 26 letters.
PHRASE: English has an alphabet X consisting of 26 letters.
(f) CLAUSE: Anyone who wants to come with us is welcome.
PHRASE: Anyone X wanting to come with us is welcome.
(g) George Washington, who was the first president of the United States, was a wealthy colonist and a general in the army.
(h) George Washington, the first president of the United States, was a wealthy colonist and a general in the army.
If the adjective clause requires commas, as in (g), the adjective phrase also requires commas, as in (h)
I Put one suitable word in each space
01 Midway through the second half City scored their fourth goal, at _____ point United gave up completely
02 There is one person to ____ I owe more than I can say
03 It was the kind of accident for _____ nobody was really to blame
04 _____ leaves last should turn off the lights
05 Mary was late yesterday, ____ was unusal for her
06 At 6.00, ____ was an hour before the plane was due, thick fog descended
07 I don’t know ____ told you that, but they were wrong
08 The first time I saw you was _____ you answered the door
09 Mrs brown was the first owner ___ dog won three prizes in the same show
10 I’ve just spoken to Sally, _____ sends you her love
II Rewrite each sentence, starting as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. Omit any unnecessary relative pronouns
01 The manager noticed I had dropped my purse and called after me Noticing _________
02 We were in a position which gave us no room for manoeuvre The position _____
03 I was really proud of that moment It was ____
04 I waited for him until 6.30 and then gave up I waited for him until 6.30, at _____
05 We suggested a lot of things, which were all rejected Everything _____
06 Jim used to be married to that girl That’s the girl ____
07 If someone understands this book, they are cleverer than I am Anyone
08 A bumpy road led to the hotel The road which
09 Most people are in bed at that time It’s a time
10 I won’t tell you this again This
III Rewrite each sentences so that it contains the word in capitals and so that the meaning stays the same
01 I like Brenda, she’s my kind of person (THAT)
02 The whole summer was suuny any warm, for a change (WHICH)
03 jean was the first person I asked for advice (WHOSE)
04 Not a sungle house in the street had escaped undamaged (WHICH)
05 Then I realised that I had left my wallet at home (WHEN)
06 I don’t really approve of his proposal (WHAT)
07 It is an event I would rather forget (WHICH)
08 The police never caught the culprit (WHO)
09 I have read all of her books but one (WHICH)
10 the finder of treasure is entitled to part of its value (WHOEVER)
IV Deicide whether it is possible to leave out the word or words underlined in each sentence
01 It was the first car that I ever drove
02 He was the first man who landed on the moon
03 She was the first woman who was elected to parliament
04 harry isn’t the kind of person who gets on with everyone
05 In the whole book there was only one chapter which interested me
06 There is only one Greek island which I haven’t visited
07 It’s the long winters here that really depress most people
08 Do you like the person who sits next to you in class?
09 The letter that arrived this morning contained bad news I’m afraid
10 There is no one whom I would prefer to you as a co-driver
V Make one sentence from the sentences given, beginning as shown. Makeany other necessary changes. Omit any unnecessary relative pronouns
01 We eventually caught a train. It was one that stops at every station
The train
02 Carol slammed the door behind her . Her father had given her a car as a present. She drove off in it
Slamming ____
03 At the end of the street was a building. The street was crowded with shoppers. Tome had not noticed the building before
At the end of the street, _______
04 Some people have just moved in next door. They have the same surname as some other people. Those other pople have just moved out
The pople who have just moved in next door ____
05 I noticed that the door was open. I dicided to go in. This turned out to be a mistake
Noticing ____
06 Everyone expects the Popular party candidate to win the election. The candidate has been influenced by her advisers. She has announced that she will cut income tax by 10%
Influenced by her advisers, ____
07 I listened to George patiently until he started insulting me. At that point, I told him a few home truths. He didn’t like it
I listened to George patiently until he started insulting me, ____
08 pauline asked me a question, I had no reply to it
Pauline asked me ______
09 He rushed out of the room. He was shouting at the top of his voice. This was typical
Shouting _____
10 Some people wanted travel scholarships. The end of the week was the deadline. By then everyone had applied
By the end of the week, ____
xix So s¸nh cña tÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ
* TÝnh tõ bæ nghÜa cho ®éng tõ "to be" vµ c¸c liªn ®éng tõ: (Look, become, get, smell, taste, sound… )
* Tr¹ng tõ bæ nghÜa cho ®éng tõ th­êng (Ngo¹i trõ liªn ®éng tõ)
* TÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ chia lµm ba lo¹i - Short adjs/ advs
- Long adjs/ advs
- Irregular adjs/ advs.
A. ThÕ nµo lµ tÝnh tõ mét vÇn (ng¾n)?
Khi ®äc mét tÝnh tõ mµ cã mét ©m tiÕt ph¸t ra th× ®­îc gäi lµ tÝnh tõ ng¾n.
VD: cold, told, small, hot, long...
* Chó ý: c¸c tÝnh tõ ®äc lªn lµ hai vÇn nh­ng tËn cïng lµ (y, le, er, ow) ®Òu ®­îc coi lµ tÝnh tõ mét vÇn:
VD: pretty, gentle, clever, narrow
C«ng thøc tæng qu¸t cña tÝnh tõ ng¾n:
tÝnh tõ + er + than (So s¸nh h¬n)
tÝnh tõ + est (So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt)
Chó ý:
- §èi víi nh÷ng tÝnh tõ ng¾n tËn cïng lµ mét phô ©m tr­íc nã lµ mét nguyªn ©m ta gÊp ®«i phô ©m cuèi tr­íc khi thªm "er" or "est"
big => bigger => biggest
thin => thinner => thinnest
sad => sadder => saddest
- §èi víi nh÷ng tÝnh tõ ng¾n tËn cïng lµ "e" ta chØ thªm "r" hoÆc "st"
large => larger => largest
wide => wider => widest
- §èi víi nh÷ng tÝnh tõ tËn cïng lµ y tr­íc y lµ mét phô ©m ta ®æi y thµnh i tr­íc khi thªm "er" or "est"
dry => drier => driest
nh­ng gay => gayer => gayest
B. ThÕ nµo lµ tÝnh tõ dµi?
Ph¸t ©m lªn cã hai ©m tiÕt trë lªn, ngo¹i trõ nh÷ng tõ ®· ®­îc liÖt kª ë tÝnh tõ ng¾n.
C«ng thøc tæng qu¸t cña tÝnh tõ dµi:
more + long adj + than
most + long adj
VD: honest => more honest => most honest
Chó ý: cã nh÷ng tÝnh tõ hai vÇn ¸p dông c¶ hai c¸ch:
VD: common => commoner => commonest
more common most common
C. TÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ bÊt quy t¾c:
*good/well better best
*bad/badly worse worst
*far farther farthest
further furthest
*little less least
*few fewer fewest
less least
*many/much more most
*old older oldest
elder eldest
*late later latest
latter last
D. C¸c d¹ng so s¸nh c¬ b¶n:
*So s¸nh ngang b»ng (Comparative of equality)
1. So s¸nh ngang b»ng trong mÖnh ®Ò kh¼ng ®Þnh vµ nghi vÊn
* S + to be as long/short adj as S to be
* S + V(s,es) as long/short adv as S do/does
Eg: - Girls are as intelligent as boys are.
- My mother is as tall as my father is.
- Dogs run as fast as cats do.
- Lan sings as beautiful as H­¬ng does.
- Is French as difficult as English?
- Do you speak English as perfectly as your teacher?
Note: cã mét sè tÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ gièng nhau:
hard, fast, far, late, early....
It's a hard work.
It works very hard.
* hard (adv) >< hardly (adv)
late (adv) >< lately (adv)
· It hardly works hard
· He has come late lately.
2. So s¸nh ngang b»ng trong mÖnh ®Ò phñ ®Þnh vµ nghi vÊn
S to be not as/so long/short adj as S to be
don't/doesn't/didn't long/short adv do/does/did
VD: - Girls are not as/so intelligent as boys are
tall

- Are girls not as intelligent as boys are?
- She doesn't speak English as quickly as I do.
- Doesn't she speak English as well as I do?
3. So s¸nh h¬n víi tÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ ng¾n:
S to be adj + er than S tobe
V(s,es,ed) adv + er do/does/did

VD: My ruler is shorter than yours is.
You write faster than I do.
4. So s¸nh víi tr¹ng tõ vµ tÝnh tõ dµi
S to be more adj than S to be
V less adv do/does/did

VD: Da Lat is more beautiful than Nha Trang is.
He dances more attractively than others do.
5. So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt cña tÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõ ng¾n
S to be adj + est
V(s,es,ed)­ adv + est.
VD: She's the tallest girl in the city.
He runs the fastest
6. So s¸nh h¬n nhÊt adj vµ adv
S to be the most adj
V the least adv
VD: This is the most/least difficult lesson
He did his work the most/least carefully in the class.
* Chó ý:
- Chóng ta cã thÓ sö dông thªm mét sè tõ ®øng tr­íc ®Ó nhÊn m¹nh
+ Much ( far , a lot , a little , a bit ) more …than
+ not slightly ( nearly, quite, almost) as…as
- Ngoµi c¸ch sö dông trªn chóng ta cã thÓ cã c¸c c¸ch sö dông kh¸c
1. more + N(s) + than
most + N(s)
Eg: A plane can carry the most people
He has more books than I have
money
time

Note: more than cßn cã thÓ dïng so s¸nh trong c¸c cÊu tróc.
- You should sleep more than you do
V V
- Nam's more a teacher than a student
N N
- He's more brave than wise
adj adj
Ngoµi ra tõ so s¸nh cã thÓ bÞ t¸ch ra bëi mét mÖnh ®Ò hoÆc mét côm tõ:
- We have collected more material from the new magazines than from the book
You get more tired when you work hard than when you have a rest
Most cã thÓ dïng tr­íc danh tõ chØ phÇn líp vµ cã kh¸i niÖm chung
- Most water - melons are delicious
- Most sand is yellow
" Most of the" ®­îc dïng khi chØ tuyÖt ®¹i bé phËn
Most of the houses in the street are now being built
"Less" ë so s¸nh tuyÖt ®èi thµnh the least + uncountable nouns
adj
Eg: I look less happy than the King.
She's the least selfish person I know.
Eg: I have lees free time than ever before in my life
Who does the least work in this office ?
* fewer / fewest + Ns
There are fewer people here than last week
The person who makes fewest mistakes isn't always the best.
* later / latest (chØ gÇn ®©y, cho tíi nay/ cuèi cïng, míi nhÊt)
This evening paper always gives the latest news.
Have you read Nguyen Hong's latest novel.
This is the later editor (Ên b¶n gÇn ®©y)
I saw him no later than yesterday.
* latter:chØ c¸i thø nh× trong hai c¸i vµ ng­îc nghÜa víi former (c¸i tr­íc, c¸i kÒ trªn, ng­êi tr­íc)
He studied French and German, the former language he speaks very well, but the latter only in perfectly.
- the latter = German
- the former = French.
* Mét sè cÊu tróc kh¸c:
- Dïng the same as + danh tõ:
My shoes are the same as his
- Dïng the same + noun + as:
My pencil is the same length as yours
This street is the same width as that one.
Your desk is the same price as the other one.
This is the same book as I used yesterday.
- as expression of quantity as
many books
few red roses
much water
little ink
CÊu tróc so s¸nh víi similar, like, alike vµ different.
* H×nh thøc 1:
A and B alike ( similar , different)
* H×nh thøc 2:
A is like (similar to , different from) B
Mét sè chó ý khi sö dông so s¸nh víi so s¸nh h¬n nhÊt
The + adj est+ in The adv + est + in
of of
among among
The most adj + in The most adv + in
of of
among among
- He's the tallest of us
in his family
of all
of the three.
- The football match last night was the most exciting in this football season.
- She's the most attractive girl in my class
at my school.

- He learns English the hardest of us.
- He runs the fastest of the running competitors.
in my country.
- Who sings the most beautifully of the Vietnamese singers in your country?
Note:
Susan is the ..... of the two girls
A. prettier B. prettiest C. pretty.
7. So s¸nh gÊp:
- Real leather is 3 times as expensive as imitation leather
the price of
- Bac Giang is about twice as big as Ha Noi.
the size of
- Ha noi is about half as big as Bac Giang
the size of
8. So s¸nh kÐp:
Cµng ngµy cµng: more and more long adj/adv
less and less
Eg: My lessons get more and more difficult
less and less
The storm became more and more violent.
The story gets more and more interesting.
Life is becoming less and less expensive.
+ short adj/adv + er and short adj/adv + er
The days get shorter and shorter.
+ His voice gets weaker and weaker.
+ He ran faster and faster.
- TÝnh tõ vµ tr¹ng tõng ngo¹i lÖ:
+ Everyday you are getting better and better.
+ The noise become less and less.
Chó ý: Chóng ta nh¾c l¹i nh÷ng adj vµ adv so s¸nh kÐp cã liªn tõ "and" nèi nh­ trªn ®Ó diÔn t¶ c¸i g× ®ã cã tÝnh chÊt thay ®æi liªn tôc.
* Chóng ta sö dông mÉu c©u cµng... cµng: víi c«ng thøc the + short adj/adv + er + ..... + the short adj/adv + er
®Ó nãi mét viÖc nµy phô thuéc vµo viÖc kia
Eg: It's dark, it gets cold
=> the darker it is, the colder it gets.
The warmer the weather is, the better I feel.
(If the weather's warmer, I feel better)
The sooner we leave, the sooner we'll arrive
The younger you are, the easier it's to learn
The higher up, the greater the fall.
The + more + long adj/adv ..... + the more + long adj/adv
Football matches are interesting. They become popular
=> The more interesting football matches are, the more popular they become
The more I know him, the more I like him.
The better I know her, the more I admire her abilities.
1 TÝnh tõ ng¾n + 1 tÝnh tõ dµi
1 tÝnh tõ dµi + 1 tÝnh tõ ng¾n

The + tÝnh tõ ng¾n + er + ... + the more + long adj
the more + long adj + .... + the short adj + er
They are intelligent. They are rich.
=> The more intelligent they are, the richer they are.
The more he drank, the thirstier he was
The more the merrier. (cµng ®«ng cµng vui)
The more electricity you use, the higher your bill will be.
§èi víi tÝnh tõ bÊt quy t¾c:
He writes a lot. His writing becomes good.
=> The more he writes, the better his writing becomes

The .... the better.
The sooner the better = as soon as possible
10. So s¸nh kh¸c nhau vÒ th×:
I know far more people than I did a year ago.
I don't play as well as they used to.
The car used up more petrol than it should have done.
The problem was more difficult than I had expected.
I didn't get quite as much money as I'd thought I would.
11. C¸c cÊu tróc ®Æc biÖt
I would rather t«i thÝch h¬n, thµ r»ng
I had better h¬n hÕt lµ t«i ph¶i, tèt
I (would) prefer h¬n hÕt...
* Would rather = would sooner + (not) V
Eg1: (+) I would rather go by car
= I would sooner go by car
Eg2: (-) I'd rather not go by car
= I'd sooner not go by car.
Eg3: (?) Would you rather read it?
Would you sooner stay at home?

* Would rather do sth than do sth
= prefer doing sth to doing sth
N N
* Prefer to do sth (rather) than to do sth.
= like doing better than doing
* Would rather sb did sth = would sooner sb did sth
I'd rather / sooner you paid cash

* Would rather you had + PII
hadn't + PII
* Would rather sb didn't V
sooner
* Would rather/sooner have + PII
Would prefer to have + PII
Eg 1: I'd rather you didn't tell him
sooner
Eg2: We went by sea but I'd rather have gone by air
= I'd prefer to have gone by air
means: I wanted to go by air but I didn't get my wish
Nãi thªm:
OTHER THAN: (kh¸c víi)
RATHER THAN: (h¬n lµ)
Here is a book - other than yours
I have no other lesson than this one to learn
The result was quite other than we had expected
This was quite another result than we expected
I drink tea rather than coffee
I will go to meet him rather than wait for him
She insisted on studying rather than going
It's rather good than bad.
Note: No ... other than: kh«ng cã c¸i g× kh¸c, trõ
No fuels other than petroleum will fit for this work
I have no other friend than you.
We can think of no other example than this.
None other than: kh«ng ph¶i c¸i g× kh¸c mµ chÝnh lµ.
It was none other than Nam
It is none other than steel.
The tall man than I saw was none other/no than B.
Note: AS: lµ giíi tõ
1. Víi t­ c¸ch
I have come here as a journalist
He was respected both as a teacher and as an old man.
Looking at NguyÔn Tr·i as a statesman not as a poet.
(Nªn xÐt NguyÔn Tr·i nh­ lµ mét nhµ chÝnh trÞ chø kh«ng ph¶i lµ nhµ th¬)
2. ThÝ dô, nh­:
Some birds, as the parrot, can imitate human voice.
3. As if / as though: nh­ thÓ lµ
She speaks English as if she were an English teacher.
Don't treat me as though I were a child.
He looks as if he has been ill for a week.
He looked as if he had seen a ghost.
4. As for: cßn nh­ (tr¹ng ng÷)
As for physics, it's not difficult at all.
He drinks beer, as for me, I drink tea.
As for me, I have nothing to complain of.
5. As long as, so long as: Víi ®iÒu kiÖn, chØ cÇn, miÔn lµ:
You may use the book as long as you keep it clean
- Trong khi, chõng nµo mµ:
You shall never enter this house as long as I live in it.
Stay as long as you like.
6. As far as, so far as: Tíi ®Þa ®iÓm..., cho tíi tËn...
He walks as far as the post office.
I'll go with you as far as the bridge
- cïng cù ly, cïng kho¶ng c¸ch
We didn't go as far as the others
- Trong ph¹m vi, quyÒn h¹n, tíi møc, thËm chÝ:
So far as I know he will be away for 3 months
As far as I know, they haven't decided yet.
7. As soon as, so soon as: Cµng sím cµng tèt:
Come as soon as you can
- Ngay khi:
I'll tell him the news as soon as I see him.
- Võa míi.... ®·:
He started as soon as he received the news
8. As well as =(as along with, accompanied by, together with)còng nh­ lµ, cïng víi (§éng tõ hîp theo chñ ng÷ ®Çu)
Air as well as water is needed to make plants grow
I as well as her brothers am going here.
He as well as the other students has learned how to install this electric equipment.
9. As good as: nh­ lµ, tùa hå, cßn nh­...
He's as good as dead ( Anh Êy tùa hå nh­ ®· chÕt )
Will he be as good as his word (LiÖu anh Êy cã gi÷ lêi ®­îc kh«ng)
The noise of this machine is so low, it is as good as silient.
10. As follows: nh­ sau ®©y ( as lµ ®¹i tõ quan hÖ)
The text reads as follows
The reaction process is as follows (qu¸ tr×nh ph¶n øng nh­ sau)
* As it is (as lµ liªn tõ) ®Æt ë ®Çu c©u hoÆc ë gi÷a c©u- Trªn thùc tÕ
As it was, I declined the offer. (trªn thùc tÕ, t«i ®· b¸c bá lêi ®Ò nghÞ
§Æt ë cuèi c©u, nghÜa: nh­ cò
Leave the book as it is
11. As it were: ®Æt chÌn ë gi÷a c©u hoÆc ®Æt cuèi c©u, nghÜa: ph¶ng phÊt, tùa hå, cã thÓ cho lµ nh­ vËy.
He's, as it were, a grown up boy.
He's not equal to the task, as it were.
VI Rewrite each sentence starting with the words on the right, so that its meaning remains the same
01 Cairo is much hotter than London in July
London isn’t ____
02 There are fewer rainy days in Buenos Aires than in new York
There aren’t ____
03 There is less rain in Tokyo than in Athens in January
More rain _______
04 In July New York is warmer than Buenos Aires, but wetter
Buenos Aires _______
05 The amount of rainfall is similar in London and New York
About the same ____
06 Summmer nights in Cairo are much warmer than in London
In London _____
07 A broken leg is more serious than a sprained wrist
A sprained wrist _____
08 No one can imagine a more frightening illness than AIDS
AIDS is ____
09 Flu is a more serious illness than a cold
A cold is less ______
10 Fewer people die from flu than 50 years ago
Not as _____ These example show the principal uses of comparatives and superlatives. Notice how similar ideas can be expressed in different ways
People in Italy live longer than anywhere else in the world
= There are more retired people in Italy than anywhere else in the world
= Italy has the oldest population in the world
Far more people live to retirement age in Britain than in the Philippines
=Not as many people live to retirement age in Britain than in The Philippines
There are about the same number of old people in Australia as in the USA
= The number of old people in Australia is similar to the number in the USA
There are not as many old people in mexico as in Japan
=There are fewer old people in Mexico than in Japan
The population of France is less young than the population of Brazil
=The population of brazil is not as old as the population of France
There are about twice as many retired people in the USA as in Brazil
= There are about half as many retired people in Brazil as in the USA
xx noun - Danh tõ
1. TiÕng Anh cã 4 lo¹i danh tõ:
Danh tõ chung (Common nouns): Bird , Policeman
Danh tõ riªng (Proper nouns): Vietnam , London.
Danh tõ trõu t­îng (Abstract nouns): Talent , Mercy
Danh tõ tËp hîp (Collective nouns): Crowd , Flock
2. Chøc n¨ng cña danh tõ:
Chñ tõ cña mét ®éng tõ: Peter arrived (Tom ®· ®Õn)
Bæ tóc tõ (complement) cña ®éng tõ Be , Become , Seem
Peter becomes a soldier (Peter trë thµnh ng­êi lÝnh)
Tóc tõ (object) cña mét ®éng tõ :
Last week, I saw Peter in this street
Tóc tõ cña mét giíi tõ (preposition) :
I spoke to his parents
L­u ý: Danh tõ còng cã thÓ ë trong së h÷u c¸ch: Peter's wallet (C¸i vÝ cña Peter)
3. C¸c gièng:
Gièng ®ùc chØ ®µn «ng, vµ nh÷ng con thó ®ùc (®¹i tõ nh©n x­ng t­¬ng øng lµ He/They)
Gièng c¸i chØ phô n÷, vµ nh÷ng con thó c¸i (®¹i tõ nh©n x­ng t­¬ng øng lµ She/They)
Trung tÝnh chØ nh÷ng vËt v« sinh, nh÷ng ®éng vËt mµ ta kh«ng biÕt gièng, kÓ c¶ nh÷ng ®øa trÎ mµ ta ch­a râ trai hay g¸i (®¹i tõ It/They)
4. Sau ®©y lµ nh÷ng danh tõ cã h×nh thøc gièng ®ùc vµ gièng c¸i nh­ nhau:
Artist (nghÖ sÜ), cook (®Çu bÕp), driver (tµi xÕ), guide (h­íng dÉn viªn), catholic (tÝn ®å Thiªn chóa), scientist (nhµ khoa häc), tourist (du kh¸ch), passenger (hµnh kh¸ch)...
5. Sau ®©y lµ nh÷ng danh tõ cã h×nh thøc gièng ®ùc vµ gièng c¸i kh¸c nhau:
5.1
Boy (con trai), girl (con g¸i)
Bachelor (ng­êi ch­a vî), spinster (ng­êi ch­a chång)
Bridegroom (chó rÓ), bride (c« d©u)
Father (cha), mother (mÑ)
Gentleman (quý «ng), lady (quý bµ)
Husband (chång), wife (vî)
Uncle (chó, b¸c, cËu), aunt (d×, c«, mî)
Nephew (ch¸u trai), niece (ch¸u g¸i)
Widower (ng­êi go¸ vî), widow (ng­êi go¸ chång)
Son (con trai), daughter (con g¸i)
Man (®µn «ng), woman (®µn bµ)
Salesman,saleswoman (nam, n÷ b¸n hµng)...

5.2
Duke (c«ng t­íc), duchess (n÷ c«ng t­íc)
Prince (hoµng tö), princess (c«ng chóa)
Actor, actress (nam, n÷ diÔn viªn)
Host, hostess (nam, n÷ chñ nh©n)
Conductor, conductress (nam, n÷ so¸t vÐ)
Hero, heroine (anh hïng/anh th­)
Steward, stewardess (nam, n÷ tiÕp viªn)
Waiter, waitress (nam, n÷ phôc vô)
Heir, heiress (nam, n÷ thõa kÕ)
Manager, manageress (nam, n÷ gi¸m ®èc)
King (vua), queen (hoµng hËu)
Earl (b¸ t­íc), countess (n÷ b¸ t­íc)
Lord (l·nh chóa), lady (n÷ l·nh chóa)..
6. Tr­êng hîp ®Æc biÖt
Bull,cow (bß ®ùc, bß c¸i)
Duck, drake (vÞt trèng, vÞt m¸i)
Cock, hen (gµ trèng, gµ m¸i)
Gander, goose (ngçng ®ùc, ngçng c¸i)
Stag, doe (h­¬u ®ùc, h­¬u c¸i)
Tiger, tigress (cäp ®ùc, cäp c¸i)
Lion, lioness (s­ tö ®ùc, s­ tö c¸i)
Dog, bitch (chã ®ùc, chã c¸i)
A. Sè nhiÒu cña danh tõ
1. ChØ riªng danh tõ ®Õm ®­îc míi cã sè nhiÒu.
2. Th­êng th× sè nhiÒu cña danh tõ h×nh thµnh b»ng c¸ch thªm S vµo sè Ýt.
E91
Hilltop ® hilltops (®Ønh ®åi)
Book ® books (s¸ch)
Seat ® seats (ghÕ)
Roof ® roofs (m¸i nhµ)
Rose ® roses (hoa hång)
Image ® images (h×nh ¶nh)
Armed forces (lùc l­îng vò trang)
Window ® windows (cöa sæ)....
- S ®äc lµ /s/ sau ©m p, k, f, t. Sau nh÷ng ©m kh¸c th× s ®äc lµ /z/.
- S theo sau ce, ge, se hoÆc ze th× ®äc thªm mét vÇn phô lµ /iz/
3. Sè nhiÒu cña danh tõ tËn cïng b»ng s, ss, sh, ch hoÆc x vµ mét vµi danh tõ tËn cïng b»ng o h×nh thµnh b»ng c¸ch thªm es (es theo sau s, ch, sh, ss hoÆc x sÏ ®äc lµ /iz/ )
E92:
Tomato ® tomatoes (cµ chua)
Bus ® buses (xe bóyt)
Brush ® brushes (bµn ch¶i)
Kiss ® kisses (nô h«n)
Box ® boxes (hép)
Church ® churches (nhµ thê).
- Tuy nhiªn, danh tõ gèc n­íc ngoµi hoÆc danh tõ tãm l­îc tËn cïng b»ng o th× chØ thªm s:
E93:
Dynamo ® dynamos (m¸y ph¸t ®iÖn)
Piano ® pianos (®µn pian«)
Kilo ® kilos (kÝ l«)
Photo ® photos (tÊm ¶nh)
Radio ® radios (ra®i«)..
4. Danh tõ tËn cïng b»ng phô ©m + y th× bá y vµ thªm ies

E94:
Baby, babies (®øa bÐ)
Country, countries (quèc gia)
Fly, flies (con ruåi)
Lady, ladies (quý bµ)
Entry, entries (môc tõ trong tù ®iÓn)
5. Danh tõ tËn cïng b»ngnguyªn ©m + y th× thªm S nh­ b×nh th­êng.
E95:
Boy, boys (con trai)
Day, days (ngµy)
Donkey, donkeys (con lõa)
Monkey, monkeys (con khØ)
Valley, valleys (thung lòng)
6. M­êi hai danh tõ tËn cïng b»ng f hoÆc fe th× bá f hoÆc fe råi thªm ves
Calf (con bª), half (nöa, r­ìi), knife (con dao), leaf (l¸), life (cuéc ®êi), loaf (æ b¸nh m×), self (c¸i t«i), sheaf (bã, thÕp), shelf (c¸i kÖ), thief (kÎ c¾p), wife (vî), wolf (con c¸o).
L­u ý:
- Sè nhiÒu cña hoof (mãng guèc), scarf (kh¨n quµng) vµ wharf (bÕn tµu) h×nh thµnh b»ng c¶ hai c¸ch (thªm s hoÆc ves).
- Ngoµi ra, c¸c danh tõ kh¸c tËn cïng lµ f hay fe chØ thªm s nh­ b×nh th­êng. Ch¼ng h¹n, Cliff - cliffs (v¸ch ®¸), Handkerchief - handkerchiefs (kh¨n tay), Safe, safes (kÐt s¾t), Still life (Bøc tranh tÜnh vËt) - still lifes...
7. Mét sè danh tõ cã sè nhiÒu b»ng c¸ch thay ®æi nguyªn ©m
E96:
Foot ® feet (bµn ch©n)
Tooth ® teeth (r¨ng)
Goose ® geese (con ngçng)
Man ® men (®µn «ng)
Woman ® women (phô n÷)
Louse ® lice (con rËn)
Mouse ® mice (con chuét)
Person ® people(persons)
Child ® Children
Ox ® Oxen.
Note: Peoples chØ 1 quèc gia
E97: All the peoples of the would desire prase.
8. C¸c danh tõ sau ®©y lu«n lµ sè nhiÒu vµ dïng víi ®éng tõ ë sè nhiÒu:- Clothes (quÇn ¸o), police (c¶nh s¸t), outskirts (vïng ngo¹i «), cattle (gia sóc), spectacles (m¾t kÝnh), glasses (m¾t kÝnh), binoculars (èng nhßm), scissors (c¸i kÐo), pliers (c¸i kÒm), shears (kÐo c¾t c©y), arms (vò khÝ), goods/wares (cña c¶i), damages (tiÒn båi th­êng), greens (rau qu¶), earnings (tiÒn kiÕm ®­îc), grounds (®Êt ®ai, v­ên t­îc), particulars (b¶n chi tiÕt), premises/quarters (nhµ cöa,v­ên t­îc), riches (sù giµu cã), savings (tiÒn tiÕt kiÖm); spirits (r­îu m¹nh), stairs (cÇu thang); surroundings (vïng phô cËn), valuables (®å quý gi¸).
- Mét vµi danh tõ tËn cïng b»ng ics nh­ Acoustics (©m häc), athletics (®iÒn kinh), ethics (®¹o ®øc), hysterics (c¬n kÝch ®éng), mathematics (to¸n häc), physics (vËt lý), linguistics (ng«n ng÷ häc), phonetics (ng÷ ©m häc), logistics (ngµnh hËu cÇn), technics (thuËt ng÷ kü thuËt), politics (chÝnh trÞ).... lu«n cã h×nh thøc sè nhiÒu vµ dïng víi ®éng tõ sè nhiÒu. Tuy nhiªn, ®«i khi tªn gäi cña c¸c m«n khoa häc ®­îc xem nh­ sè Ýt. Ch¼ng h¹n, Mathematics is the science of pure quantity (To¸n häc lµ khoa häc vÒ l­îng thuÇn tóy).
9. C¸c danh tõ sau ®©y cã h×nh thøc sè nhiÒu, nh­ng l¹i mang nghÜa sè Ýt: News (tin tøc), mumps (bÖnh quai bÞ), measles (bÖnh sëi), rickets (bÖnh cßi x­¬ng), shingles (bÖnh zona), billiards (bi-da), darts (m«n nÐm phi tiªu), draughts (m«n cê vua), bowls (m«n nÐm bãng gç),dominoes (®«min«), the United States (HiÖp chñng quèc Hoa Kú). Ch¼ng h¹n, The news is bad (Tin tøc ch¼ng lµnh) hoÆc The United States is a very big country (HiÖp chñng quèc Hoa Kú lµ mét n­íc rÊt lín).
10. C¸c danh tõ sau ®©y kh«ng thay ®æi khi ë sè nhiÒu:Fish (c¸), sheep (cõu), deer (nai), salmon (c¸ håi), cod (c¸ thu), carp (c¸ chÐp), plaice (c¸ b¬n sao), squid (c¸ mùc), turbot (c¸ b¬n), aircraft (m¸y bay), series (chuçi, d·y), species (loµi), offspring (con c¸i).
11. C¸c danh tõ tËp hîp nh­ Group (nhãm), team (®éi), gang (b¨ng ®¶ng), band (to¸n, tèp), pack (bÇy), staff (tËp thÓ nh©n viªn), community (céng ®ång), committee (ñy ban), crowd (®¸m ®«ng), crew (thñy thñ ®oµn), family (gia ®×nh) .... cã thÓ dïng ®éng tõ ë sè Ýt hay sè nhiÒu. Ch¼ng h¹n, The government has made up its mind / have made up their minds (ChÝnh phñ ®· quyÕt ®Þnh døt kho¸t), hoÆc Do / does your family still live there? (Gia ®×nh b¹n vÉn sèng ë ®ã chø?)
12. Mét vµi danh tõ gèc Hy L¹p hoÆc La Tinh vÉn cã sè nhiÒu theo quy luËt cña tiÕng Hy L¹p hay La Tinh, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ Crisis, crises (sù khñng ho¶ng); analysis, analyses (sù ph©n tÝch); thesis, theses (luËn c­¬ng); oasis, oases (èc ®¶o); basis, bases (nÒn t¶ng); axis, axes (trôc); appendix, appendices (phÇn phô lôc); genesis, geneses (céi nguån); erratum, errata (lçi in); memorandum, memoranda (b¶n ghi nhí); phenomenon, phenomena (hiÖn t­îng); radius, radii (b¸n kÝnh); terminus, termini (ga cuèi). Nh­ng còng cã tr­êng hîp theo quy luËt tiÕng Anh, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ Dogma, dogmas (gi¸o ®iÒu); gymnasium, gymnasiums (phßng tËp thÓ dôc); formula, formulas (thÓ thøc) (còng cã thÓ dïng formulae ). §Æc biÖt, sè nhiÒu cña Maximum cã thÓ lµ Maximums hoÆc Maxima, cña Minimum cã thÓ lµ Minimums hoÆc Minima, cña Medium cã thÓ lµ Mediums hoÆc Media.
L­u ý: Khi danh tõ chØ thêi kho¶ng, sè tiÒn vµ kho¶ng c¸ch theo sau mét sè ®Õm, ®éng tõ sÏ ë ng«i thø ba sè Ýt. Ch¼ng h¹n, Three weeks is a long time for a holiday (Ba tuÇn lµ mét thêi gian dµi ®èi víi mét kú nghØ), Five miles is too far to walk (N¨m dÆm th× qu¸ xa nÕu ®i bé) hoÆc Three quarters of the theatre was full (Ba phÇn t­ r¹p ®· ®Çy kh¸ch).
B. Sè nhiÒu cña danh tõ kÐp
1. CÊu t¹o cña danh tõ kÐp
Danh tõ + danh tõ
Balance sheet (B¶ng quyÕt to¸n)
Business card (Danh thiÕp)
Street market (Chî trêi)
Winter clothes (quÇn ¸o mïa ®«ng)
Police station (§ån c«ng an)
Notice board (B¶ng th«ng b¸o)
Football ground (s©n ®¸ bãng)
· Danh tõ + danh ®éng tõ (gerund)
Weight-lifting (Cö t¹)
Baby-sitting (C«ng viÖc gi÷
Coal-mining (Sù khai má than)
Surf-riding (M«n l­ít v¸n)
Horse-trading (Sù nh¹y bÐn s¾c s¶o)
Danh ®éng tõ + danh tõ
Living-room (Phßng kh¸ch)
Waiting-woman (Ng­êi hÇu g¸i)
Diving-rod (Que dß m¹ch n­íc)
Landing craft (Xuång ®æ bé)
Driving-test (cuéc thi lÊy b»ng l¸i xe)
Swimming-match (cuéc b¬i thi)
Ph©n biÖt
A coffee cup (T¸ch dïng ®Ó ®ùng cµ phª) vµ a cup of coffee (t¸ch cµ phª, t¸ch ®ang ®ùng cµ phª)
2. Th­êng th× sè nhiÒu cña danh tõ kÐp h×nh thµnh b»ng c¸ch thªm s vµo tõ sau cïng:
Boy-friends (b¹n trai); grown-ups (ng­êi ®· tr­ëng thµnh); Easter eggs (trøng Phôc sinh); express trains (tµu ho¶ tèc hµnh). §Æc biÖt,Men drivers (tµi xÕ nam); women drivers (tµi xÕ n÷); women doctors (n÷ b¸c sÜ); menservants (®Çy tí trai).
3. NÕu cÊu t¹o cña danh tõ kÐp lµ danh tõ + phã tõ, danh tõ + giíi tõ + danh tõ, chóng ta sÏ thªm s vµo tõ ®øng ®Çu, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ hangers-on (kÎ bî ®Ýt), lookers-on (kh¸n gi¶), runners-up (ng­êi ®o¹t h¹ng nh×), passers-by (kh¸ch qua ®­êng), ladies-in-waiting (t× n÷), fathers-in-law (bè vî, bè chång), sisters-in-law (chÞ em d©u, chÞ em vî, chÞ em chång), commanders-in-chief (tæng t­ lÖnh), ambassadors-at-large (®¹i sø l­u ®éng).
Sè nhiÒu cña ch÷ viÕt t¾t:
OAPs (Old Age Pensioners) (ng­êi giµ h­u trÝ)
MPs (Members of Parliament) (nghÞ sÜ)
VIPs (Very Important Persons) (yÕu nh©n)
UFOs (Unidentified Flying Objects) (®Üa bay)
Tæng quan:
1. §Æc ®iÓm cña danh tõ ®Õm ®­îc:
ChØ nh÷ng g× ®Õm ®­îc, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ a sandwich (mét c¸i b¸nh x¨ng- uych), two sandwiches (hai c¸i b¸nh x¨ng-uych), a dog (mét con chã), three dogs (ba con chã), a friend (mét ng­êi b¹n), ten friends (m­êi ng­êi b¹n), a cup of tea (mét t¸ch trµ), four cups of tea (bèn t¸ch trµ).
Cã thÓ ë sè nhiÒu, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ a day, many days.
Cã thÓ theo sau mét sè ®Õm, a/an hoÆc some (mét vµi).
2.ThÕ nµo lµ danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc
* Whole group made up of smilar Items
Baggage , clothing , food , fruit , furniture , luggage , mail ,
Fluids: water , coffee , tea , milk , oil.soup , gasoline ,
Solids: ice , bread , butter , cheese , meat , gold , silver ,
Gases: steam , air , oxygen , nitrogen , smoke ,
Particules: rice , chalk , corn , dirt , flour , grass,
Abtractions:-beauty , education , fun ,happiness , * Languages: Chineses , English , VietNamese....
* Fields of study: Chemistry , engineering , history ,
* General activities and recreation: driving.. , soccer ,
* Natural phenomena - weather , fog , heat , humidity ,
3. §Æc ®iÓm cña danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc:
ChØ nh÷ng g× kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc hoÆc nh÷ng g× cã tÝnh c¸ch trõu t­îng, ch¼ng h¹n nh­ Money (tiÒn b¹c), weather (thêi tiÕt), nature (thiªn nhiªn)......
Kh«ng thÓ ë sè nhiÒu.
Cã thÓ theo sau some (nµo ®ã), chø kh«ng thÓ theo sau a/an hoÆc mét sè ®Õm.
Nãi thªm vÒ danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc:
1. Danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc th­êng gÆp:
Bread (b¸nh m×), cream (kem), gold (vµng), paper (giÊy), tea (trµ), beer (bia), dust (bôi), ice (n­íc ®¸), sand (c¸t), water (n­íc), cloth (v¶i), gin (r­îu gin), jam (møt), soap (xµ b«ng), wine (r­îu nho), coffee (cµ phª), glass (thñy tinh), oil (dÇu löa), stone (®¸), wood (gç), baggage (hµnh lý), damage (sù thiÖt h¹i), luggage (hµnh lý), camping (sù c¾m tr¹i), furniture (®å ®¹c), parking (sù ®Ëu xe), shopping (viÖc mua s¾m), weather (thêi tiÕt)...
2. Danh tõ trõu t­îng
VÝ dô: Advice (lêi khuyªn), experience (kinh nghiÖm), horror (khñng khiÕp), beauty (®Ñp), fear (sî h·i), information (th«ng tin), courage (lßng can ®¶m), help (sù gióp ®ì), knowledge (kiÕn thøc), death (c¸i chÕt), hope (niÒm hy väng), mercy (lßng nh©n tõ), pity (sù téi nghiÖp), relief (sù gå lªn), suspicion (sù hå nghi), work (c«ng viÖc)...
3. Danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc lu«n ë sè Ýt vµ kh«ng theo sau a/an
VÝ dô: Those students don't want (any) help. They only want (some) knowledge.
I have no experience in this field.
4. Danh tõ kh«ng ®Õm ®­îc th­êng theo sau some, any, no, a little...., hoÆc theo sau bit, piece, slice, gallon...
VÝ dô: A bit of news (mét mÈu tin), a grain of sand (mét h¹t c¸t), a pot of jam (mét hñ møt), a slice of bread (mét l¸t b¸nh m×), a bowl of soup (mét b¸t sóp), a cake of soap (mét b¸nh xµ b«ng), a gallon of petrol (mét galon x¨ng), a pane of glass (mét « kÝnh), a sheet of paper (mét tê giÊy), a glass of beer (mét ly bia), a drop of oil (mét giät dÇu), a group of people (mét nhãm ng­êi), a piece of advice (mét lêi khuyªn)...
5. Mét vµi danh tõ trõu t­îng còng theo sau a/an, nh­ng víi ý nghÜa ®Æc biÖt vµ ë sè Ýt mµ th«i.
- To have a wide knowledge of literature, we need read much (§Ó cã mét kiÕn thøc réng r·i vÒ v¨n häc, chóng ta ph¶i ®äc s¸ch nhiÒu).
- This micro-computer is a great help to our study (
- Do you think these prisoners have a love of music/a hatred of dishonesty? (B¹n cã nghÜ r»ng c¸c tï nh©n nµy yªu ©m nh¹c/c¨m ghÐt sù bÊt l­¬ng hay kh«ng?)
- It's a pity you forgot to do it (TiÕc lµ b¹n quªn lµm ®iÒu ®ã)
- It's a shame he offended against my teacher (ThËt lµ hæ
- thÑn khi anh ta xóc ph¹m ®Õn thÇy t«i)


C¸ch dïng vµ chia c¸c th×

Tenses
(Th×) Uses
(c¸ch dïng) Examples
(vÝ dô)
1. Simple present
- Affirmative
· I, we, you, they drink coffee.
· He, she, it drinks coffee.
- Negative
· I, we, you, don't drink coffee.
· He, she, it, doesn't drink coffee
- Interrogative
· Do I, we, you, they drink coffe?
· Does he, she, it drink coffee?
® mét thãi quen, mét tËp qu¸n (th­êng dïng víi c¸c tr¹ng tõ nh­ usually, always, often)

® mét sù kiÖn khoa häc, mét ch©n lÝ

® mét sù viÖc ®­îc Ên ®Þnh trong thêi kho¸ biÓu hoÆc sÏ xÈy ra trong t­¬ng lai.

® mét phong tôc
® My father usually gets up at 4 o'clock every morning


® The Earth moves around the Sun

® The football match starts at 3 p.m


® The English eat turkeys on Christmas Days.
C¸ch nhËn biÕt: usually, always, ofter sometines, now and than, fromtime to time, hardly seldom, rarely, as usual, never , everyday, every 6 hours.
2. Simpe past
F §éng tõ quy t¾c : thªm ED
work ® worked
F §éng tõ bÊt quy t¾c: cét thø 2.
To eat, ate (273 §T bÊt quy t¾c)
- Affirmative
I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they worked / ate.
- Negative
I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they didn't work / eat.

- Interrogative
Did I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they work / eat?

® Mét hµnh ®éng ®· x¶y ra vµ chÊm døt ë qu¸ khø víi thêi gian ®­îc x¸c ®Þnh râ rÖt, th­êng dïng víi c¸c tr¹ng tõ chØ thêi gian nh­ (yesteday, the day before yesterday, ago, last week / month / year ...)

® Mét chuçi c¸c sù kiÖn x¶y ra trong qu¸ khø.



® Mét thãi quen trong qu¸ khø. ® I went to the circus last night.






® Yesterday morning Mary got up very late. She hurrisdly washed her face, brushed her teeth, rinsed her mouth, got dressed quickly then rode to school without eating breakfast.

® Tom wrote to his parents twice a week when he was in the army.
C¸ch nhËn biÕt: yesterday, ago, last month (week ...) in 1970.........
3. Simple future
- Affirmative
· I, we, shall go.
· He, she, it,you, they will go.
- Negative
· I, we shalln't go.
· He, she, it, you, they won't go.
- Interrogative
· Shall I we go?
· Will he, she, it you, they go? ® mét hµnh ®éng sÏ x¶y ra trong t­¬ng lai hay dù ®o¸n vÒ t­¬ng lai.


® nh÷ng suy nghÜ, tiªn ®o¸n cña ng­êi nãi víi think; hope, expect, be afraid, be sure ...

® mét lêi høa.

® mét lêi ®Ò nghÞ lÔ ®é


® mét hµnh ®éng trong t­¬ng lai mµ ngay khi nãi míi cã dù ®Þnh vÒ hµnh ®éng ®ã. ® She will be here in a few minutes.
® I shall be rich one day.
® Ton orrow will be sunny.

® I think she will come.
® I hope he will get the job he's applied for.


® I won't tell them what you said.

® Will you shut the door, please?
® Have you come to see him?

® Oh! Is the ill? I shall come to see him this afternoon.
C¸ch nhËn biÕt: tomorrow, next month (week) ...........
To express a Prediction - either Will or Be going to is used:
(a) According to the weather report, it will be cloudy tomorrow.
(b) According to the waether reoprt; it is going to be cloudy tomorrow.
(c) Be careful! You'll hurt yourself?
(d) Watch out ! You're going to hurt yourself? When the speaker is making prediction (a statement about something she thinks will be true or will occur in the turure), either will or be going to possible.
There is no differenee in meaning between (a) and (b)
There is no difference in meaning between (c) and (d)
To Express a Prior Plan - only be going to is used:
(e) A: Why did you buy this paint?
B: I'm going to paint my bedroom tomorrow.




(f) I talked to Bob yesterday. He is tired of taking the bus to work. He's going to buy a car. That's what told me.
When the speaker is expressing a prior plan (something the speaker intends to do in the future because in the past she has made a plan or decision to do it), only be going to is used * In (e). Speaker B has made a prior plan. She decided to paint her bedroom last week. She intends to paint her bedroom tomorrow.
In (f). the speaker knows Bob's intention to buy a car. Bob made the decision in the past and he intends to act on this decision in the future. Will is not appropraiate in (e) and (f).
To express Willingness - only Will is used:
(g) A: The phone's ringing
B: I'll get it.



(h) A: I don't understand this problem.
B: Ask your teacher about it. She'll help you. In (g). Speaker B is saying: "I am willing, I am happy to get the phone". He is not making a prediction. He has made no prior plan to anaswer the phone. He is instead, volunteering to answer the phone and uses will to show his willingness.
In (h); Speaker B feels sure about the teacher's willingness to help.
Be going to is not appropriate in (g) and (h)
* COMPARE:
Situation 1: A: Are you busy this evening?
B: Yes. I'm going to meet Jack at the library at seven. We're going to study together.
In situation 1, only be going to is possible. The speaker has a prior plan, so he uses be going to.
Situation 2: A: Are you busy this evening?
B: Well, I really haven't made any plans. I'll eat I'm going to eat dinner, of course. And then I'll probably watch I'm probably going to watch TV for a little while.
In situation 2, either will or be going to is possible. Speaker B has not planned his planned his evening. He's "predicing" his evening (rather than stating any prior plans), so he may use either will or be going to.
4. Present perfect
- Affirmative
· I, we, you, they have worked/eaten.
· He, she, it has worked / eaten.
- Negative
· I, we, you, they haven't worked / eaten
·He, she, it hasn't worked / eaten
- Interrogative
· have I, we, you they worked / eaten?
· Has he, she, it worked / eaten?
C«ng thøc
Has / have+past participle ® mét hµnh ®éng x¶y ra trong qu¸ khø kh«ng nªu râ thêi gian


® mét hµnh ®éng míi x¶y ra gÇn ®©y mµ kÕt qu¶ vÉn cßn ë hiÖn t¹i.
® mét hµnh ®éng b¾t ®Çu ë qu¸ khø nh­ng cßn tiÕp diÔn ®Õn hiÖn t¹i (th­êng dïng víi Since vµ For)
Since: thêi ®iÓm For: thêi l­îng
® I have read the instructions but I don't understand them.
® she has painted her room.


® Tom has had a bad car crash

® We have lived in this house since 1972.
® They have stayed in that hotel for 2 weeks.

C¸ch nhËn biÕt: just, since, for, so far, up to now, up till now, recently, lately, already, stil, not....... yet, yet, ever, never, before, many times ....... This is the fist time + HTHT
S + SS H¬n nhÊt + HTHT .........
- §éng tõ qui t¾c; thªm ED
· He has worked.
- §éng tõ bÊt quy t¾c: cét thø 3.
· I have eaten. ® mét hµnh ®éng x¶y ra trong mét kho¶ng thêi gian ch­a chÊm døt (th­êng dïng víi today, this morning, this month, all night, all week ...)
- ®­îc dïng trong c¸c cÊu tróc
· This/That/It is the first/second/third · This/That/it is the only ...
· This/That/It is + Superlative.

® th­êng ®­îc dïng trong c¸c thµnh ng÷ already, not ... yet, yet, ever, never, just, so fat, recently, lately. ® Tom has rung up three times this morning already (at 10 a.m).



· This is the first time I have been to London.
· This is the only party I've ever enjoyed in my life.
· That is the most exciting novel I've ever read.

® Have you seen Ann lately?
® My parents have just bought a new house.
5. Past perfect
- Affirmative
I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they had worked/eaten.
- Negative
I, you, he, she, it, we, ou, they hadn't worked/eaten.
- Interrogative
had I, you, he, ® mét hµnh ®éng ®· x¶y ra vµ hoµn tÊt tr­íc mét ®iÓm thêi gian trong qu¸ khø.
® mét hµnh ®éng ®· x¶y ra vµ hoµn tÊt tr­íc mét hµnh ®éng kh¸c trong qu¸ khø.
® mét sù mong muèn, tr«ng ®îi trong qu¸ khø kh«ng ®­îc thùc hiÖn (th­êng dïng víi hope (hi väng), expect (mong ®îi).
® th­êng ®­îc dïng víi c¸c tõ ng÷: when, as soon as (ngay khi), after, before vµ ®i kÌm víi th× qu¸ khø. ® He had finished his homework before 8 p.m last night.

® Lucie had learnt English before she came to England.

® I had hoped to take a holidaythis year but I wasn't able to get away.


® When I got to the station the train had already left.
® As soon as I had finished my homework, I went out for a walk.
6. Present
Continuous
C«ng thøc
Am, is, are + Verb-ing
· Verb-ing
HiÖn t¹i ph©n tõ, (Present Participle).
- §éng tõ tËn cïng b»ng e, bá e+ing, come ® coming.
- §éng tõ 1 ©m tiÕt víi nguyªn ©m+phô ©m; gÊp ®«i phô ©m+ing.
Run ® running
- §éng tõ tËn cïng b»ng ie ®æi ra y+ing.
Tie + tying ® mét hµnh ®éng ®ang diÔn tiÕn trong khi nãi (th­êng ®i kÌm now, at the moment).

® mét hµnh ®éng ®ang diÔn tiÕn, ch­a chÊm døt (th­êng víi still)
® mét hµnh ®éng nhÊt thêi sím muén råi còng chÊm døt (th­êng dïng víi today, this, morning, this week ...)
® diÔn t¶ ý bùc m×nh cña ng­êi nãi (víi always)


® mét hµnh ®éng dù ®Þnh lµm trong t­¬ng lai cã sù s¾p xÕp ® The farmers are working in the fields now.



® They are playing football at the moment.

® He's still talking to his girlfriend on the phone.


® Mary ususly gets up at 5 o'clock everyday but today she is getting at 6 o'clock.
® Tom, why are you always quarrelling with your brother?
® He is arriving tomorrow on the 5.30 train.

7 Past continuous
C«ng thøc
Was /were+verb-ing
® mét hµnh ®éng ®ang diÔn biÕn ë mét thêi ®iÓm trong qu¸ khø.
® mét hµnh ®éng ®ang diÔn tiÕn suèt c¶ mét kho¶ng thêi gian trong qu¸ khø.
® mét hµnh ®éng ®ang diÔn trong qu¸ khø (b¾t ®Çu b»ng as, just as, while, when) vµ mét hµnh ®éng kh¸c x¶y ra; hµnh ®éng x¶y ra sau dïng Simple Past.
® hai hoÆc nhiÒu hµnh ®éng cïng x¶y ra song song.

® mét ®Ò nghÞ lÔ ®é ® He was learning English at 7 o'clock lasst night.

® They were playing tennis all yesterday morning.

® While Mr baker was leaving the office, the postman arrived.




® Last night while my brothers were watching TV, I was doing my homework.
® I was wondering if you could give me a lift.
8. Present perfect Continuous
C«ng thøc:
Has /have been + verb-ing ® mét hµnh ®éng kÐo dµi liªn tôc tõ qu¸ khø ®Õn hiÖn t¹i vµ cßn tiÕp diÔn trong t­¬ng lai (th­êng dïng víi since vµ for)

® mét hµnh ®éng kÐo dµi liªn tôc trong qu¸ khø võa míi chÊm døt vµ kÕt qu¶ cßn thÊy râ

® mét hµnh ®éng ®­îc lÆp ®i lÆp l¹i trong mét thêi gian dµi (víi how long, for vµ since) ® I've been waiting for an hour and he still hasn't turned up.
® It has been raining since early morning.

® Her eyes are wet. She has been crying.
® Jim has been phoning Jenny for the whole week.

® How long have you been smoking?

9. PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
C«ng thøc: had been+Ving a. The police had been looking for the criminal for 2 hours before they caught him.
b. The patient had been waiting in the emergency room for almost an hour before a doctor finally treated her

Th× qu¸ khø hoµn thµnh tiÕp diÔn dïng ®Ó diÔn ®¹t kho¶ng thêi gian hµnh ®éng x¶y ra tõ tr­íc tiÕp diÔn ®Õn mét thêi ®iÓm trong qu¸ khø
c. Judy got home, her was still wet because she had been swimming.
d. Her eyes were red because she had been crying.
10
FUTURE PROGRESSIVE
will/shall + be + Ving a. I will begin to study at 7. You'll come at eight. I will be studying when you come.
b. Right now I am sitting in class. At this time tomorrow, I will be sitting in class Th× t­¬ng lai tiÕp diÔn ®Ó diÔn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng sÏ cã tÝnh chÊt tiÕp diÔn vµo mét thêi gian trong t­¬ng lai, hoÆc mét dù ®Þnh trong t­¬ng lai.
c. Don't call me at nine because I won't be at home. I am going to be studying at the library D¹ng tiÕp diÔn cña be going to:
be going to + be + Ving
d. Don't get impatient. She will be coming soon.
e. Don't get impatient. She will come soon §«i khi cã mét chót Ýt hoÆc kh«ng cã sù kh¸c biÖt nµo gi÷a t­¬ng lai tiÕp diÔn vµ th× t­¬ng lai ®¬n gi¶n, ®Æc biÖt lµ khi c¸c sù kiÖn t­¬ng lai x¶y ra vµo mét thêi gian kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh trong t­¬ng lai, nh­ trong c©u d vµ e.
12.FUTURE PER FECT
S + will/shall have + PII a. I will graduate in June. I'll see you in June. By the next time I see you, I'll have graduated
b. I'll have finished my homework by the time you finish dressing.
c. On December 18th we shall have been married for 10 years. Th× t­¬ng lai hoµn thµnh ®Ó diÔn t¶ mét hµnh ®éng sÏ hoµn tÊt tr­íc mét thêi ®iÓm hoÆc hµnh ®éng kh¸c trong t­¬ng lai.
Note: Trong vÝ dô b: By the time giíi thiÖu mét mÖnh ®Ò thêi gian, th× hiÖn t¹i ®¬n ®­îc sö dông trong mÖnh ®Ò nµy
d.It's five o'clock, they will have arrived home by now ChØ kh¶ n¨ng hoÆc gi¶ ®Þnh
13.FUTURE PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
S + will/shall have been + Ving I will go to bed at 10 P.M. He will get home at midnight. At midnight I will have been sleeping for 2 hours by the time he gets home Th× t­¬ng lai hoµn thµnh tiÕp diÔn chØ mét hµnh ®éng ®· x¶y ra vµ tiÕp diÔn c¶ trong t­¬ng lai

NON PROGRESSIVE VERBS

NONPROGRESSIVE
(a) Ali knows this grammar Some verbs are nonprogressive: they are not used in any of the progressive tenses. These verbs describe states (i.e., conditions that exist); they do not describe activities that are in progress. In (a): "Ali knows" describes a mental state that exists.
PROGRESSIVE
(b) Kim is reading about this grammar COMPARE: In (b): "Kim is reading" is an activity in progress. Progressive tenses can be used with the verb read but not with the verb know.
COMMON NONPROGRESSIVE VERBS
(1) MENTAL STATE
§éng tõ diÔn t¶ ho¹t ®éng cña trÝ tuÖ know
realize
understand
recognize believe
feel
suppose
think* imagine
doubt
remember
forget want
need
prefer
mean
(1) EMOTIONAL STATE
§éng tõ chØ c¶m xóc love
like
appreciate hate
dislike fear
envy mind
care
(3) POSSESSION Së h÷u possess have* own belong
(4) SENSE PERCEPTIONS (tri gi¸c) taste*
smell* hear
feel* see*
(5) OTHER EXISTING STATES seem
look*
appear* cost
owe
weigh* be*
exist consist of
contain
include

* Verbs with an asterisk are also commonly used as progressive verbs, with a different in meaning, as in the following examples:
NONPROGRESSIVE (existing state) PROGRESSIVE (activity in progress)
Think I think he is a kind man I am thinking about this grammar
Have He has a car I am having trouble. She is having a good time
taste This food tastes good The chef is tasting the sauce
smell These flowers smell good Don is smelling the roses.
see I see a butterfly. Do you see it? The doctor is seeing a patient.
feel The cat's fur feels soft Sue is feeling the cat's fur
look She looks cold. I'll lend her my coat I am looking out the window.
appear He appears to be asleep. The actor is appearing on the stage.
weigh A piano is heavy. It weighs a lot. The grocer is weighing the bananas.
be I am hungry. Tom is being foolish.**
** COMPARE:
(a) Bob is foolish. = Foolishness is one of Bob's usual characteristics.
(b) Tom is being foolish. = Right now, at the moment of speaking, Tom is doing something that the speaker considers foolish.
The verb be (+ an adjective) is used in the progressive to describe a temporary characteristic. Very few adjectives are used with be in the progressive; some of the most common are: foolish, nice, kind, lazy, careful, patient, silly, rude, polite, impolite.
Spelling of - ing and - ed forms

(a) hope Hoping Hoped - ING FORM; If the word ends
Date Dating Dated in-e, drop the-e and add-ing.*
injure Infuring Injured - ED FORM: If the word ends in-e, just add-d
ONE-SYLLABLE VRBS
(b) stop Stopping Stopped
rob Robbing Robbed I vowel ® 2 consonants
Beg begging Begged
(c) rain Raining Rained
Fool Fooling Fooled 2 vowels ® 1 consonanl
dream dreaming dreamed
TWO - SYLLABLE VERBS
(d) listen listening listened
offer offering offered 1st syllable stressed ® 1 consonant
open opening opened
(e) begin beginning (began)
prefer preferring preferred ®
control controiling controlled
(f) start starting started
fold folding folded
demand demanding Demanded
(g) enjoy enjoying enjoyed
Pray praying prayed
Buy buying (bought)
(h) study studying Studied


Try trying Tried
reply replying Replied
(i) die dying ied

lie lying lied
tie tying tied

* Exception: If a verb ends in -ee, the final -e is not dropped: seeing, agreeing, freeing.
** Exception: -w and -x are not doubled: plow ® plowed; fix ® fixed.
REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.

REGULAR VERBS: The simple past and past participle end in -ed English verbs have four principal parts:
(1) simple form (2) simple past
(3) past participle (4) present participle
SIMPLE SIMPLE PAST PRESENT
FROM PAST PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE
hope Hoped hoped hoping
stop Stopped stopped stopping
listen Listened listened listening
study Studied studied studying
start Started started starting
IRREGULAR VERBS: The simple past and past participle do not end in -ed
SIMPLE SIMPLE PAST PRESENT
FROM PAST PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE
break Broke broken breaking
come Came came coming
find Found found finding
hit Hit hit hitting
swim Swam swam swimming
Modal Auxiliaries and Similar Expressions
2-1 Introduction

The modal auxiliaries in English are: can, could, had better, may, might, must, ought to, shall, should, will, would.
Modal auxiliaries generally express a speaker's attitudes, or "moods". For example, modals can express that a speaker feels something is necessary, advisable, permissible, possible, or probable; and, in addition, they can convey the strength of these attitudes.
Each modal has more than one meaning or use.
(a) Modal Auxiliaries
can do it
could do it Modals do not take a final -s, even when the subject is he, she, or it.
CORRECT: He can do it
INCORRECT: He cans do it.
I had better do it
We may do it
You might do it
They + must do it
He ought to do it
She shall do it
It should do it
will do it
would do it Modals are followed immediately by the single form of a verb.
CORRECT: He can do it.
INCORRECT: He can to do it/He can does it/He can did it.
The only exception is ought, which is followed by an infinitive (to + the simple form of a verb)
CORRECT: She ought to go to the meeting
(b) Similar Expressions
be able to do it
be going to do it
be supposed to do it
be to do it
have to do it
have got to do it
used to do it In (b) is a list of some common expressions hose meanings are similar to those of the modal auxiliaries. For example, be able to is similar to can; be going to is similar to will.
An infinitive (to + the simple form of a verb) is used in these similar expressions.

2 - 2 polite requests with "I" as the subject

May I

Could i a. May I (please) borrow your pen?

b. Could I borrow your pen (please)? May I and could I are used to request permission. They are equally police. * Note in (b):In a police request, could has a present or future meaning, not a past meaning.
Can I c. Can I borrow your pen? Can I is used informally to request permission, especially if the speaker is talking to someone s/he knows fairly well.
Can I is usually not considered as polite as may I or could I.
Typical responses
Certainly. Yes, certainly
Of course. Yes, of course
Sure. (informal) Often the response to a polite request consits of an action, a nod or shake of the head, or a simple "uh - huh".
* Might is also possible: Might I borrow your pen. Might I is quite formal and polite, it is used much less frequently than may I or could I.
2-3 Polite requests with "you" as the subject


would you
will you (a) Would you pass the salt (please)?
(b) Will you (please) pass the salt? The meaning of would you and will you in a polite request is the same. Would you is more common and is often considered more polite. The degree of politeness, however, is often determined by the speaker's tone of voice
could you (c) Could you pass the salt? Basically, could you and would you have the same meaning. The difference is slight:
would you = Do you want to do this please?
could you = Do you want to do this please, and is it possible for you to do this?
Could you and would you are equally polite
can you (d) Can you pass the salt? Can you is often used informally. It usually sounds less polite than could you or would you.
Typical responses:
Yes, I'd (I would) be happy to
Yes, I'd be glad to.
Certainly.
Sure. (informal) A person usually responds in the affirmative to a polite request. If a negative response is necessary, a person might begin by saying, "I'd like to, but... " (e.g., "I'd like to pass the salt, but I can't reach it. I'll ask Tom to pass it to you.").


2-4 Polite request with would you mind


Asking permission
(a) Would you mind if I closed the window?
(b) Would you mind if I used the phone? Notice in (a): would you mind if I is followed by the simple past.*
The meaning in (a): May I close the window? Is it all right if I close the window? Will it cause you any trouble or discomfort if I close the window?
Typical responses
No. Not at all.
No, of course not.
No, that would be fine. Another typical responses might be "unh-unh", meaning no.
Asking someone else to do Something
(c) Would you mind closing the window?
(d) Excuse me? Would you mind repeating that? Notice in (c): would you mind is followed by -ing (a gerund).
The meaning in (c): I don't want to cause you any trouble, but would you please close the window? Would that cause you any inconvenience?
Typical responses
No. I'd be happy to.
Not at all. I'd be glad to.
* Sometimes in informal spoken English, the simple present is used: Would you mind if I close the window? (Note: The simple past does not refer to past time after would you mind; it refers to present or future time. See Chart 10-3 for more information.)

2-5 Using imperative sentences to make polite requests

(a) Shut the door.
(b) Be on time.
(c) Don't shut the door.
(d) Don't be late. An imperative sentence has an understood subject (you), and the verb (e.g., shut) is in the simple form. Shut the door. = (You) shut the door. Be on time = (You) be on time.
In the negative, don't precedes the simple form of the verb.
(e) Turn right at the corner.
(f) Shut the door.
(g) Please shut the door.
Shut the door, please An imperative sentence can be used to give directions, as in (e).
An imperative sentence can be used to give an order, as in (f).
It can also be used to make a polite request, as in (g), when the word please is added.*

* Sometimes would you/could you is added as a tag question (almost as an afterthought) to turn an imperative into a polite request; e.g., Shut the door, would/could you? Sometimes, usually in a formal situation, won't you is added to an imperative as a tag question to make a polite request; e.g., Have a seat, won't you?

2-6 Expressing necessity: must, have to, have got to


(a) All applicants must take an entrance exam.
(b) All applicants have to take an entrance exam. Must and have to both express necessity.
In (a) and (b): It is necessary for every applicant to take an entrance exam. There is no other choice. The exam is required.
(c) I'm looking for Sue. I have to talk to her
about our lunch date tomorrow. I can't meet her for lunch because I have to go to a
business meeting at 1:00.
(d) Where's Sue? I must talk to her right
away. I have an urgent message for her. In everyday statements of necessity, have to is used more commonly than must. Must is usually stronger than have to and can indicate urgency or stress importance. In (c): The speaker is simply saying, "I need to do this and I need to do that." In (d): The speaker is strongly saying, "This is very important!"
(e) I have to ("hafta") be home by eight.
(f) He has to ("hasta") go to a meeting tonight. Note: have to is usually pronounced "hafta"; has to is usually pronounced "hasta".
(g) I have got to go now. I have a class in ten minutes.
(h) I have to go now. I have a class in ten
minutes. Have got to also expresses the idea of necessity: (g) and (h) have the same meaning. Have got to is informal and is used primarily in spoken English. Have to is used in both formal and informal English.
(i) I have got to go ("I've gotta go/I gotta
go") now. Usual pronunciation of got to is "gotta" Sometimes have is dropped in speech: "I gotta do it".
(j) PRESENT or FUTURE
I have to/have got to/must study tonight.
(k) PAST: I had to study last night. The idea of past necessity is expressed by had to. There is no other past form for must (when it means necessity) or have got to.

2-7 Lack of necessity and prohibition:
Have to and must in the negative

Lack of necessity
(a) Tomorrow is a holiday. We don't have to When used in the negative, must and have to have different meanings.
go to class.
(b) I can hear you. You don't have to shout.* do not have to = lack of necessity.
In (a): It is not necessary for us to go to class tomorrow because there is a holiday.
Prohibition
(c) You must not look in the closet. Your birthday present is hidden there. must not = prohibition (DO NOT DO THIS!)
In (c): Do not look in the closet. I forbid it. Looking in the closet is prohibited.
(d) You must not tell anyone my secret. Do you promise? Negative contraction: mustn't. (The first "t" is not pronounced: "muss-an't".)

* Lack of necessary may also be expressed byneed not + the simple form of a verb: You needn't shout. The use of needn't as an auxiliary is chiefly British other than when it is used in certain common expressions such as "You needn't worry".

2-8 Advisability: Should, ought to, had better


(a) You should study harder.
You ought to study harder.
(b) Drivers should obey the speed limit.
Drivers ought to obey the speed limit. Should and ought to have the same meaning: they express advisability. The meaning ranges in strength from a suggestion ("This is a good idea.") to a statement about responsibility or duty ("This is a very important thing to do."). In (a): "This is a good idea. This is my advice." In (b): "This is an important responsibility."
(c) You shouldn't leave your keys in the car Negative contraction: shouldn't.*
(d) I ought to ("otta") study tonight, but I
think I'll watch TV instead. Ought to is sometimes pronounced "otta" in informal speaking.
(e) The gas tank is almost empty. We had better stop at the next service station.
(f) You had better care of that cut on your hand soon, or it will get infected. In meaning, had better is close to should/ought to, but had better is usually stronger. Often had betterb implies a warning or a threat of possible bad consequences. In (e): If we don't stop at a service station, there will be a bad result. We will run out of gas.
Notes: Had better has a present or future meaning. It is followed by the simple form of a verb. It is more common in speaking than writing.
(g) You'd better take care of it.
(h) You better take care of it.
(i) You 'd better not be late. Contraction: 'd better, as in (g).
Sometimes in speaking, had is dropped, as in (h).
Negative form: had better + not.

* Ought to is not commonly used in the negative. If it is used in the negative, the to is often dropped: You oughtn't (to) leave your keys in the car.

2-9 The past form of should

(a) I had a test this morning. I didn't do well on Past form: should have + past participle.*
the test because I didn't study for it last
night. I should have studied last night.
(b) You were supposed to be here at 10 P.M,
but you didn't come until midnight. We In (a): "I should have studied" means that studying was a good idea, but I didn't do it. I made a mistake
were worried about you. You should have
called us. (You did not call.) Usual pronunciation of should have:
"should-of" or "shoulda."
(c) I hurt my back. I should not have carried
that heavy box up two flights of stairs.
(I carried the box and now I am sorry.)
(d) We went to the movie, but it was a bad
movie. We wasted our time and money.
We should not have gone to the movie. In (c): "I should not have carried" means that I carried something, but it turned out to be a bad idea. I made a mistake.
Usual pronunciation of should not have:
"shouldn't-of" or "shouldn't'a."

* The past form of ought to is ought to have + past participle. (I ought to have studied) It has the same meaning as the past form of should. In the past, should is used more commonly than ought to. Had better is only rarely used in a past form (e.g., He had better have taken care of it.) and usually only in speaking, not writing.
2-10 Expectations: be supposed to and be to


(a) The game is supposed to begin at 10:00.
(b) The game is to begin at 10:00.
(c) The committee is supposed to meet tomorrow.
(d) The committee is to meet tomorrow. Be supposed to and be to (a form of be followed immediately by an infinitive, e.g., is to begin) express the idea that someone (I, we, they, the teacher, lots of people, my father, etc.) expects something to happen. Be supposed to and be to often express expectations about scheduled events or correct procedures. In (a) and (b): The speaker expects the game to begin at 10:00 because that is the schedule. Be to is stronger, more definite, than be supposed to.
COMPARE:
(e) I should go to the meeting. I can get some
information if I go. Going to the meeting is
a good idea. Be supposed to and be to also express expectations about behavior; often they give the idea tha someone expects a particular person to do something.
(f) I am supposed to go to the meeting. My
boss told me that he wants me to attend. Be supposed to is close in meaning to should, but be supposed to, as in (f), gives the idea that someone else expects (requests or requires) this behavior.
COMPARE:
(g) I must be at the meeting. The meeting can't occur without me because I'm the only one who has certain information.
(h) I am to be at the meeting. My boss ordered me to be there. He will accept no excuses. Be to is close in meaning to must, but be to, as in (h), includes the idea that someone else strongly expects (demands or orders) this behavior.
Be to is used to state strong expectations:e.g., rules, laws, instructions, demands, orders.

2-11 Making suggestions: Let's, why don't, shall I/we


(a) Let's go to a movie.
(b) Let's not go to a movie. Let's stay
home instead. Let's = let us. Let's is followed by the simple form of a verb.
Negative form: let's + not + simple verb.
The meaning of let's: "I have a suggestion for us".
(c) Why don't we go to a movie?
(d) Why don't you come around seven?
(e) Why don't I give Mary a call? Why don't is used primarily in spoken English to make a friendly suggestion.
In (c): why don't we go = let's go.
In (d): I suggest that you come around seven.
In (e): Should I give Mary a call? Do you agree with my suggestion?
(f) Shall I open the window? Is that
okay with you?
(g) Shall we leave at two? Is that okay?
(h) Let's go, shall we?
(i) Let's go, okay? When shall is used with "I" or "we" in a question, the speaker is usually making a suggestion and asking another person if she/he agrees with this suggestion.
Sometimes "shall we?" is used as a tag question after let's. More informally, "okay?" is used as a tag question, as in (i).

2-12 Making suggestions: could

- What should we do tomorrow?
(a) Why don't we go on a picnic?
(b) We could go on a picnic. Could can be used to make suggestions. (b) is similar to (a) in meaning; i.e., the speaker is suggesting a picnic.
- I'm having trouble in math class.
(c) You should talk to your teacher.
- I'm having trouble in math class.
(d) You could talk to your teacher. Or you could ask Ann to help you with your math lessons. Or I could try to help you. Should gives definite advice. In (c), the speaker is saying: "I believe it is important for you to do this. This is what I recommend."
Could offers suggestion or possibilities. In (d), the speaker is saying:" I have some possible suggestions for you. It is possible to do this. Or it is possible to do that."*
- I failed my math class.
(e) You should have talked to your teacher and gotten some help from her during the term.
- I failed my math class.
(f) You could have talked to your teacher. Or you could have asked Ann to help you with your math. Or I could have tried to help you. Should have gives "hindsight advice"**. In (e) the speaker is saying:"It was important for you to talk to the teacher, but you didn't do it. You made a mistake."
Could have offers "hindsight possibilities"**. In (f) , the speaker is saying:"You had the chance to do this or that. It was possible for this or that to happen. You missed some good opportunities.
* Might (but not may) can also be used to make suggestion (You migh talk to your teacher), but the use of could is more common.
** "Hindsight" refers to looking at something after it happens.

2-13 Expressing degrees of certainty: present time


- Why isn't John in class?
100% sure: He is sick.
95% sure: He must be sick. He may be sick.
less than 50% sure: He may be sick
He could be sick. "Degree of certainty" refers to how sure we are - what we think the chances are - that something is true.
If we re sure something is true in the present, we don't need to use a modal. For example, if I say, "John is sick", I am sure; I am stating a fact that I am sure is true. My degree of certainty is 100%
- Why isn't John in class?
(a) He must be sick. (Usually he is in class
every day, but when I saw him last night, Must is used to express a strong degree of certainty about a present situation, but the degree of certainty is still less than 100%.
he wasn't feeling good. So my best guess is
that he is sick today. I can't think of another
possibility.) In (a): The speaker is saying: "Probably John is sick. I have evidence to make me believe that he is sick. That is my logical conclusion, but I do not know for certain."
- Why isn't John in class?
(b) He may be sick. May, might and could are used to express a weak degree of certainty.
(c) He might be sick.
(d) He could be sick. (I don't really know. He
might be at home watching TV. He might
be at the library. He could be out of town.) In (b), (c) and (d): The speaker is saying: "Perhaps, maybe,* possibly John is sick. I am only making a guess. I can think of other possibilities."
(b), (c) and (d) have the same meaning.
* Maybe (spelled as one word) is an adverb: May be (spelled as two words) is a verb form: He may be sick.

2-14 Degrees of certainty: Present time negative.


100% sure: Sam isn't hungry.
99% sure: Sam couldn't be hungry.
Sam can't be hungry.
95% sure: Sam must not be hungry.
less than 50% sure: Sam may not be hungry.
Sam might not be hungry.
(a) Sam doesn't want anything to eat. He isn't
hungry. He told me his stomach is full. He
says he isn't hungry. I believe him. In (a): The speaker is sure that Sam is not hungry.
(b) Sam couldn't/can't be hungry! That's impossible! I just saw him eat a huge meal. He has already eaten enough to fill two grown men. Did he really say he'd like something to eat? I don't believe it. In (b): The speaker believe that there is no possibility that Sam is hungry (but the speaker is not 100% sure). Notice the negative use: couldn't and can't forcefully express the idea that the speaker believes something is impossible.
(c) Sam isn't eating his food. He must not be hungry. That's the only reason I can think of. In (c): The speaker is expressing a logical conculsion, a "best guess".
(d) I don't know why Sam isn't eating his food. He may/might not be hungry right now. Or maybe he doesn't feel well. Or perhaps he ate just before he got here. Who knows? In (d): The speaker uses may not/might not to mention a possibility.
2-15 Degrees of certainty: Past time


PAST TIME: AFFIRMATIVE
- Why wasn't Mary in class?
(a) 100%: She was sick.
(b) 95%: She must have been sick.
(c) less than 50%: She may have been sick.
She might have been sick.
She could have been sick. In (a): The speaker is sure.
In (b): The speaker is making a logical conclusion; e.g., "I saw Mary yesterday and found out that she was sick. I assume that is the reason why she was absent. I can't think of any other good reason."
In (c): The speaker is mentioning one possibility.
PAST TIME: NEGATIVE
(d) 100%: Sam wasn't hungry.
(e) 99%: Sam couldn't have been hungry.
Sam can't have been hungry.
(f) 95%: Sam must not have been hungry.
(g) less than 50%: Sam may not have been hungry.
Sam might not have been hungry
In (d): The speaker is sure.
In (e):The speaker believes that it is impossible for Sam to have been hungry
In (f): The speaker is making a logical conclusion.
In (g): The speaker is mentioning one possibility.
2-16 Degress of certainty: Future time

100% sure: Kay will do well on the test. Õ (The speaker feels sure).
90% sure: Key should do well on the test. Õ (The speaker is almost sure)
She ought to do well on the test.
less than 50% sure: She may do well on the test.
She might do well on the test. Õ (The speaker is guessing).
She could do well on the test.
(a) Kay has been studying hard. She should do/ought to do well on the test tomorrow. Should/ought to can be used to express expectations about future events.
In (a): The speaker is saying, "Kay will probably do well on the test. I expect her to do well. That is what I think will happen."
(b) I wonder why Sue hasn't written us. We should have heard/ought to have heard from her last week. The past form of should/ought to is used to mean that the speaker expected something that did not occur.


2-17 Progressive forms of modals


(a) Let's just knock on the door lightly. Tom may be
sleeping. (right now)
(b) All of the lights in Ann's room are turned off. She must
be sleeping. (right now) Progressive form, present time:
modal + be + -ing.
Meaning: in progress right now.
(c) Sue wasn't at home last night when we went to visit her.
She might have been studying at the library.
(d) Al wasn't at home last night. He has a lot of exams
coming up soon, and he is also working on a term
paper. He must have been studying at the library. Progressive form, past time:
modal + have been + -ing.
Meaning: in progress at a time in the past.

2-18 Using used to (habitual past) and be used to.

(a) Jack used to live in Chicago. In (a): At a time in the past, Jack lived in Chicago, but he does not live in Chicago now. Used to express a habit, activity, or situation that existed in the past but which no longer exists.
(b) Mary is used to cold weather.
(c) Mary is accustomed to cold weather. Be used to means be accustomed to. (b) and (c) have the same meaning: Living in a cold climate is usual and normal to Mary. Cold weather, snow, and ice do not seem strange to her.
COMPARE:
(d) Jack used to live in Chicago.
(e) Mary is used to living in a cold climate.
She is accustomed to living there. To express habitual past, used is followed by an infinitive, e.g., to live as in (d).
Be used to and be accustomed to are followed by an -ing verb form (a gerund*), as in (e).
(f) Bob moved to Alaska. After a while he
got used to/got accustomed to living in
a cold climate. In the expressions get used to and get accustomed to, get means become.

* See Chart 4-2, Using Gerunds as the Objects of Prepositions.
2-19 Using would to express a repeated action in the past


(a) When I was a child, my father would read
me a story at night before bed.
(b) When I was a child, my father used to read
me a story at night before bed. Would can be used to express an action that was repeated regularly in the past. When would is used to express this idea, it has the same meaning as used to (habitual past).
(a) and (b) have the same meaning.
(c) I used to live in California.
He used to be a Boy Scout.
They used to have a Ford. When used to express a situation that existed in the past, as in (c), would may not be used as an alternative. Would is used only for regularly repeated actions in the past.

2-20 Expressing preference: would rather

(a) I would rather go to a movie tonight than study grammar.


(b) I'd rather study history than (study) biology Would rather expresses preference.
In (a): Notice that the simple form of a verb follows both would rather and than.
In (b): If the verb is the same, it does not have to be repeated after than.
- How much do you weigh?
(c) I'd rather not tell you. Contraction: I would = I'd.
Negative form: would rather + not.
(d) The movie was okay, but I would rather
have gone to the concert last night. The past form:would rather have +past participle. Usual pronunciation:"I'd rather-of".
(e) I'd rather be lying on a beach in Florida
than (be) sitting in class right now. Progressive form: would rather + be + -ing.

2-21 Using can and be able to


(a) Tom is strong. He can lift that heavy box.
(b) I can play the piano. I've taken lessons for many years.
(c) You can see fish at an aquarium.
(d) That race car can go very fast. Can usually express the idea that something is possible because certain characteristics or conditons exist. Can combines the ideas of possibility and ability.
In (a): It is possible for Tom to lift that box because he is strong.
In (b): It is possible for me to play the piano because I have acquired that ability.
In (c): It is possible to see fish at an aquarium because an aquarium has fish.
In (d): It is possible for that car to go fast because of its special characteristics.
(e) Dogs can bark, but they cannot/can't talk. Negative form: cannot or can't. (Also possible, but not as common: can not, written as two words).
COMPARE:
(f) I can walk to school. It's not far.
(g) I may walk to school. Or I may take the
In (f): I can walk to school because certain condition exists.
In (g): I am less than 50% certain that I will walk to school.
COMPARE:
(h) I'm not quite ready to go, but you can leave
if you're in a hurry. I'll meet you later.
(i) When you finish the test, you may leave. Can is also used to give permission. In giving permission, can is usually used in informal situations, as in (h); may is usually used in formal situations, as in (i).
COMPARE:
(j) Tom may lift that box.
(k) Uncommon: Tom is able to lift that box.
(l) Ann will be able to lift that box.
Bob may be able to lift that box.
Sue should be able to lift that box.
Jim used to be able to lift that box. The use of be able to in the simple present (am/is/are able to) is uncommon (but possible).

Be able to is more commonly used in combi-nation with other auxiliaries, as in (l).

2-22 Past ability: could


(a) When I was youngers, I could run fast,
(Probable meaning: I used to be able to run
fast, but now I can't run fast.) In affirmative sentences about past ability, could usually means "used to be able to". The use of could usually indicates that the ability existed in the past but does not exist now.
(b) Tom has started an exercise program. He
was able to run two miles yesterday
without stopping or slowing down. If the speaker is talking about an ability to perform an act at one particular time in the past, was/were able to can be used in affirma-tive sentences but not could. Could is not appropriate in (b).
- Did you read the news about the mountain climbers?
(c) INCORRECT: They could reach the top of Mt. Everest yesterday.
(d) CORRECT:
They were able to reach the top yesterday.
They managed to reach the top yesterday.
They reached the top yesterday. Note that (c) is incorrect. Instead of could, the speaker needs to use were able to, managed to or the simple past.
(e) They couldn't reach/weren't able to reach
the top yesterday.
(f) Tom couldn't run/wasn't able to run five
miles yesterday. In negative sentences, there is no difference between using could and was/were able to.

2-23 Summary chart of modals and similar expressions

AUXILIARY USES PRESENT/FUTURE PAST
May (1) polite request May I borrow your pen?
(2) formal permission You may leave the room.
(3) less than 50% certainty --Where's John?
He may be at the library. He may have been at the library.
Might (1) less than 50% certainty --Where's John?
He might be at the library He might have been at the library.
(2) polite request (rare) Might I borrow your pen?
Should (1) advisability I should study tonight. I should have studied last night.
(2) 90% certainty She should do well on the test.
(future only, not present) She should have done well on the test.
ought to (1) advisability I ought to study tonight. I ought to have studied last night.
(2) 90% certainty She ought to do well on the test.
(future only, not present) She ought to have done well on the test.

Auxiliary Uses Present/Future Past
had better (1) advisability with
threat of bad result You had better be on time, or we will leave without you. ( past form uncommon)
be supposed to (1) expectation Class is supposed to begin at 10. Class was supposed to begin at 10.
be to (1) strong expectation You are to be here at 9:00. You were to be here at 9:00
must (1) strong necessity I must go to class today I had to go to class yesterday.
(2) prohibition
(negative) You must not open that door
(3) 95% certainty Mary isn't in class. She must be sick (present only)
have to (1) necessity I have to go to class today I had to go to class yesterday
(2) lack of necessity
(negative) I don't have to go to class today I didn't have to go to class yesterday.
have got to (1) necessity I have got to go to class today I had to go to class yesterday
Will (1) 100% certainty He will be here at 6:00. (future only)
(2) willingness The phone's ringing
I'll get it
(3) polite request Will you please pass the salt?
be going to (1) 100% certainty He is going to be here at 6:00
(future only)
(2) definite plan I'm going to paint my bedroom. (future only) I was going to paint my bed, but I didn't have time.
Can (1) ability/possibility I can run fast. I could run fast when I was a child, but now I can't.
(2) informal permission You can use my car tomorrow
(3) informal polite
request Can I borrow your pen?
(4) impossibility
(negative only) That can't be true! That can't have been true!

AUXILIARY USES PRESENT/FUTURE PAST
could (1) past ability I could run fast when I was a child.
(2) polite request Could I borrow your pen?
Could you help me?
(3) suggestion --I need help in math.
You could talk to your teacher. You could have talked to your teacher.
(4) less than 50% certainty --Where's John?
He could be at home. He could have been at home.
(5) impossibility
(negative only) That couldn't be true! That couldn't have been true!
be able to (1) ability I am able to help you. I will be able to help you. I was able to help him.
Would (1) polite request Would you please pass the salt? Would you mind if I left early?
(2) preference I would rather go to the park than stay home. I would rather have gone to the park.
(3) repeated action in the past When I was a child, I would visit my grandparents every weekend.
used to (1) repeated action in the past I used to visit my grandparents every weekend.
shall (1) polite question to make a suggestion Shall I open the window?
(2) future with "I" or "we" as subject I shall arrive at nine.
(will = more common)

B¶NG THAM KH¶O Giíi tõ
ADJECTIVE + of
Afraid of
Ashamed of
Aware of
(In) capable of
Certain of
Characteristic of: ®Æc tr­ng cña
Composed of gåm cã
(In) Considerate of:
Envious of: = Jealous of = ghen tÞ
Fond of
Free of: Tho¸t khái sù rµng buéc
Full of
Guilty of: cã téi
Hard of hearing
Indepenten of: ®éc lËp víi
Made of:
Positive of:
Proud of
Scared / frightened/teried of
Short of
Sure of
Tired of
Typical of
Worthy of: xøng ®¸ng
rude / mean / nice/kind/generous/ (in)polite / silly stupid/
(un) reasonable of sb to
Nh­ng rude / mean / nice/kind/generous/ (in)polite / silly stupid/
(un) reasonable to sb.
Surpicious / critical / tolerant of
A head of
Ignorand of
Shy of
north / south/ east / west of
--------------
Noun of
Cause of
Charge of
Choice of: Sù lùa chän trong
A good deal of
Impression of
A lot of / lots of
An advantage of / a disadvantage of
A photograph / a picture / a map / a drawing of...
--------------------
VERb + of
Take care of = look after
Dream of
Hear of
Think of
Remind sb of
Warn sb of / about
Accuse of
Suspect of
(Dis)approve of
Die of
Consist of
Beware of
Boast of (or about)
Complain of (or about)
Convince of (or about)
Cure of
Despair of
Excuse of (or for)
Expect of (or from)
Be/get rid of
Smell of
Tire (d) of

Verb + From
Borrow
Defend (or against)
demand (or of)
differ
dismiss
draw
emerge
escape
hinder
prevent
prohibit
protect (or against)
receive
separate
suffer
Verb + In
believe
belight
employ (ed)
encourge (d)
experience (d)
fail
help (with)
Include
Indulge
Instruct
Interest (ed)
Invest
Involve (d)
Persist
Share
Verb + On
Act
Base
Call
Comment
Concentrate
Congratulate
Consult (about)
Count
Decide
Depend
Economize
Embark
Experiment
Insist
lean (against)
live
operate
perform (In)
pride (one self)
rely
vote ( for sb)

Verb to
accustom
amount
appeal
apply (for)
attach
attend
belong
challenge
compare (with)
condemn
confess
confine
constent
convert
entitle
listen
mention
object
Occur
Prefer
React (against)
Reply
Respond
See
Submit
Surrenden
Turn
Yield
Verb + at
amused (by)
arrive (in)
Astonish (by)
Exclain
Glance
Guess
Knock
Look
point (to)
shock (by)
Stare
surprise (by)
wonder (about)
work (on)
Verb + with
Agree
begin
communicate
compare
do
compete (against)
comply
confuse
contrast (to)
cope
correspond
disgust
finish
help (in)
Interfere (In)
mix
occupied
please
quarrel (about)
reason
satisfied (by)
threaten

Adj + with
angry (with sb at sth)
busy (at)
consistent
content
familiar (to)
Identical
Patient
Polular
Adj + for
eager
Enough
Famous
Fit
grateful (to)
Qualified (in)
ready (to)
Responsible
Sorry
Sufficient
Thankful (to)
Valid
Adj + to
Close
Contrary
Cruel
Dear
Equal
Faithful
Fatal
Harmful
Indifferent
Inferior
liable
new
obedient
obvious
polite
previous
rude
sensitive
similar
useful

At
bad
clever
efficient
expert (in)
good
quick
sad (about)
slow
skillful (in)
About
curious
doubtful (of)
enthusiastic
reluctant (to)
right (in)
Uneasy
From
Away
Different
Fan
Resulting
Safe
In
Deficent
Fortunate
Honest
Weak
On
Dependent
Intent
Keen

In
Expressions of time c¸c c¸ch diÔn ®¹t thêi gian
+ century (In the eighteenth century)
In + decade (In the 1990s)
+ year (In 1975)
+ season (In the sunmer)
+ month (In July)
+ Parts of day (In the morning)
+ a few minutes / six months - (In a time in the future)
+ In for week (Eg I learnt to drive in four year)
Expressions of place: C¸c diÔn ®¹t n¬i chèn
+ continent (In Africa)
In + country (In Vietnam)
+ state (In Pennsylrania)
+ city / town (In Los Angeler)
+ buiding (In the bank)
+ room (In the bedroom)
+ a box
+ the world
+ a garden
+ a street
+ a queue
+ a row
+ a line
In + a photograph
+ a picture
+ a mirror
+ the sky
+ a book
+ a newspaper
+ a magazine
+ a letter (but "on a page")
+ a corner of the room (but "at the corner of a street")
"on the corner of a street")

+ the shop (but "at the shop - somebody giving directions)
+ In the bottle (bªn trong chai r­îu) nh­ng on the bottle (trªn bÒ mÆt cña chai)
Nouns that follow the preposition "In" C¸c DT theo sau lµ giíi tõ In
· In time (for & th / to do & th) = soon enough
Note: The opposite of in time is too late
· You can say just in time (= almost too late)
· In time ¹ on time (= puntual, not late)
· In person: tËn mÆt
· In place: ®Çu vµo ®ã
· In (the) place of (as a substitute for) thay thÕ cho
· In practice: rÊt giái
· In preparation for) s½n sµng
· In principle (In theory) trªn nguyªn t¾c, lý thuyÕt
· In peogress ®ang tiÕp diÔn
· In regard to: Nãi ®Õn
· In reply (to) phóc ®¸p
· In return (for) (In exchenge) §Ó tån t¹i, lÇn l­ît
· In ruins: Hoang tµn, ®æ n¸t
· In a rush = In a hury
· In prison = In the can: trong tï
· In search for: T×m kiÕm
· In sight of: thÊy
· In (high, food, low ... spirits tinh thÇn (cao, tèt, th¾ng ...)
· In spite of: mÆc dÇu
· In style: ®óng kiÕn
· In (good) taste: rÊt hîp
· In tears: §Çy n­íc m¾t
· In touch (with) th­êng ®i "get, keep, be" liªn l¹c
· In trouble (with) gÆp r¾c rèi
· In tune: >< out of turn ®óng ®iÖu >< sai ®iÖu
· In use: ®­îc sö dông
· In view of = because: trong tÇm tay, ®¸ng chó ý
· In the way of: chÆn ®­êng ¹ by the way
¹ on the way
· In other words: nãi c¸ch kh¸c
· In commom (with) ®iÒu chung
· In the end = finilly >< at first
· But at the end of sth
· In accordance with: phï hîp víi, ®óng nh­
· In addition (to sth): as well, also còng, n÷a, thªm vµo
· In advance = ahead of time tr­íc
· In case (of): trong tr­êng hîp
= at the address of: theo ®Þa chØ cña
· In charge of= responsible for: chÞu tr¸ch nhiÖm
· In comparison (to, with) ®em so víi
· In (good, bad ...)condition: trong t×nh tr¹ng (xÊu, tèt....)
· In contrast (to, with) ng­îc l¹i, so s¸nh víi
· In debt >< out of debt: mang nî
· In (the) direetion (of) (toward): ë, vÒ h­íng
· In doubt (about, of) = not sure, uncertain: nghi ngê, kh«ng ch¾c
· In any event = anyway,
· no matter what happens dï g× ®i n÷a

· In fact: thùc ra lµ
· In favor of = on the side of = In support of = ñng hé
· In fun: ®ïa
· In general: nãi chung
· In (good, bad ...) healts: søc khoÎ (tèt, xÊu..)
· In honor of: §Õ t«n vinh
· In the hope of, In hopes of: víi hi väng lµ
· In a (good, bad ...) humor (mood) vui vÎ, c¸u bÈn
· In a (great ...) hurry (rÊt) véi vµng
· In (a language) b»ng (1 ng«n ng÷ nµo ®ã)
· In the least » at all kh«ng chót nµo c¶. §­îc dïng trong c©u phñ ®Þnh
· In love (with) Yªu
· In the meatime trong lóc ®ã
· In mind: trong ®Çu
· In need (of) ®ang cÇn
· In one's opinion
· In to opinion of theo ý cña ai ®ã
· In order: theo thø tù
· In peace >< thêi b×nh
· In danger (of): nguy hiÓm
· In detail: chi tiÕt
· In existence: tån t¹i
· In a silk dress
· be rich in
· In no time at all trong thêi gian rÊt ng¾n
· In the past >< in future
· In the beginning lóc ®Çu >< In the end
· In a way
· In one way
· In some ways
· In the long run: rèt côc
· In vain: v« Ých
· In the rain / sun/ shade / dark / bad werther
· In Ink / biro / pencil
· In words / In figures
· In BLOCK LETTER
arrive In a country or town / city but
arrive at building, or events
arrive at the hotel
the party
work
arrive Æ home but
Stay at home
Be
Come in the house
In bed, prison, hopital

ON

Epression of time

On + days of the week (on wednesday)
+ dat es (on October 7)
+ Friday morrning (s)
Expression of place
On + street (on Ba Trieu street)
+ floor of a bilding (on the fourth floor)
+ Earth
+ the ceiling
+ the wall
+ the door
+ the table
+ one's nose
+ a page
+ an island
+ the glass
+ the chair
+ the beach
+ the left/right
+ a map/the menu
+ a farm >< in the field
+ a road
+ the coast
+ a river
+ the way
On + the back of a letter
Front
+ a bus >< in a car/taxi
+ a train
+ a ship
+ a plane
+ a bike/ by car
+ a motorcyle >< by bike
+ a horse
C¸c ®Æc ng÷ ®i víi on
On fire
On the other hand, on the one hand
On purpose >< by chance
On radio/television
On the whole
On bussiness
On the contrary: Tr¸i l¹i
On a diet but in one's diet
On earth: thÕ qu¸i nµo
On edge » (nervous) Bån chån
On guard >< off (one's) guard: g¸c >< hÕt phiªn g¸c
On horse back
On the house: miÔn phÝ
On hand: Cã s½n
On the job: §ang lµm viÖc
On one's + mind >< off one's mind: BËn t©m >< th¶nh th¬i
+ thought
On a (sad) note: B»ng mét nhËn ®Þnh buån
On a picnic: §i ¨n ngoµi trêi
On principle: Theo ®óngnguyªn t¾c
On sale: §ang b¸n
On strike: §×nh c«ng
On a trip: §i du lÞch
On vacation: ®i nghØ
On the whole: trªn tæng thÓ, xÐt chung
On duty >< of duty
On the phone
On time: ®óng giê
On foot = go for a walk
On arrival = when St arrive(d)
AT
Expressions of time:
At + time of the day (at 6a.m., at noon)
+ night
Expression of place:
At + the bust stop/the door/ the window
reception
address (at 132 Ba Trieu Street)
The top / bottom (of the page)
Sb (the dog rushed at one)
The traffic lights/ roundabout)
The bank / hospital/church
The end of streer.
· ChØ møc ®é, vËn tèc, gi¸ c¶:
+ Houses are rising at higher rate than Inflation
+ We are driving at 70 mph.
+ I bought this coat at half - price.
· ChØ tuæi t¸c:
She got married at 30
C¸c ®Æc ng÷ ®i víi at:
At all, notat all: Nµo - kh«ng , kh«ng cã chi
At least = not ...... les than: Ýt nhÊt
At ease: Tho¶i m¸i
At the expense of víi chi phÝ, chi tíi
At heart: Trong th©m t©m
At (the) most: Tèi ®a, cïng l¾m >< at least
At peace (with) Yªn æn (víi)
At any rate = anyway = In anyevent: Dï sao ®i n÷a.
At all costs: B»ng bÊt cø gi¸ nµo
At first/last: Lóc ®Çu; cuèi cïng
At the first sight: tho¸ng nh×n lóc ®Çu
At hand: gÇn ngay, s¾p x¶y ra.
At first hand: trùc tiÕp
At home/school/work/play
At large: Tù do
At once:
At one: ®ång lßng
At one's service: s½n sµng gióp ®ì ai ®ã.
At place/war/leisure:
At war (with/against)
At present/at the moment
At times = sometimes
At the same time
At will: Theo ý muèn
At worst: cïng l¾m, trong tr­êng hîp sÊu nhÊt.
At the peak (of)
At birth
At death
At random

BY
By th­êng ®­îc dïng víi c¸c h×nh thøc truyÒn th«ng vµ vËn t¶i
By is often used with form of communication and trasportation
By car/plane/phone/express mail
Note: If the noun is plural or is preceded by a determiner the prepositions In or on must be used
Chó ý: NÕu danh tõ lµ sè nhiÒu hoÆc cã tõ chØ ®Þnh ®øng tr­íc giíi tõ In hoÆc on nªn sö dông:
In cars, on a boat, on the telephone, In a taxi.
By is also used with gurunds to shou how an action happened
- Còng ®­îc dïng víi danh ®ång tõ ®Ó chØ mét hµnh ®éng diÔn ra nh­ thÕ nµo
How did you get an appointment with Dr Blish?
By calling his secretary
+ By (+ a time) = not later than
I posted the letter to day, so they should receive it by Monday
(on or before Monday, not later than Monday)
* By the time S + V (e, es), S + will have + PII
S + Ved + S + had + PII
* By then or by that time
Eg: Jame finally arrived at the party at midnight, but by then / or (by that time), most of the guests had gone.
We use by ........... In many expression to say how we do sth
· Pay by cheque
credit card (but pay in cash)
· By chance/mistake/accident >< on purpose.
We say sth is done by sb/sth - (passive)
· Have you even been bitten by a dog?
· Compare by and with
The door must be opened with a key (not "by a key")
· By » next to / beside / close to / near.
· By and until
+ We have to be at the stadium by 2.30
BiÕt râ thêi gian
+ We have to here until she cones back
Kh«ng biÕt râ thêi gian
Note: the following use of by.........
· Clane's salary has just gone up from
£1,100 a month to £100. So Its has
Increased by £100 /by ten percent
· By = past (ngang qua)
· By and by: L¸t n÷a, chèc n÷a.
· By degress: little by little
·By far: nhiÒu, bá xa, vùt tréi
· By hand
· By heart
· By means of: b»ng, b»ng c¸ch
· By name/sight: qua mÆt
· I know him by name not by sight
· By night/day
· By oneself
· By order of :theo lÖnh
· By reason of: = Because of
· By the way
· By the side of = beside = bªn c¹nh.
· By way of: Theo ®­êng
We'll go to London by way of Paris
· By surprise: ng¹c nhiªn
Their visit certainly took us by surprise last Sunday.
To / In to

Go to America
Return to Italy
Drive to the aiport
Been to a place Go to bed
Go to the bank
Go to a concert
Get to work/the party Take (sb) to hospital
Come to my house
Be sent to prison
Well come to my country
· Go home
Come home
Get home
Arrive home
On the way home
· In to
Go in to, get in to = enter (a room,a building/a car)...
· She got in to the car and drove away
· A birth flew in to the kitchen through the window.
Chóng ta cã thÓ sö dông In (thay thÕ bëi in to)
· Don't wait out side the house. Come in the house (or come into the house)
In to >< out of
She got out of the car and went into a slop
Note chóng ta cã thÓ sö dông get on/off a bus/a train/a plane.

OUT OF
Giíi tõ nµy cã nghÜa "ngoµi, ra khái" nã ®­îc dïng ®Ó chØ n¬i chèn Mrs Green is out of town this week.
Out of cßn ®­îc sö dông c¸c nghÜa kh¸c vµ c¸c ®Æc d­íi ®©y
Out of: v×, do, (chØ nguyªn nh©n)
We helped her out of pity
out of: Kh«ng cßn, hÕt.
He's been out of work for 6 months
· Out of business >< In business: hÕt kinh doanh >< ®ang kinh doanh
· Out of date (old - fashioned)
· Out of door
· Out of hand >< In hand
· Out of reach
· Out of sight
· Out of practise >< In practise TÖ >< giái.
· Out of the question: kh«ng thÓ ®­îc = Impossible, not to be considered
· Out of sorts (bùc béi)
· Out of style
· Out of town >< In town.
· Out of turn >< In turn: kh«ng ®óng phiªn, ch­a ®Õn l­ît >< ®Õn l­ît
· Out of work = jobless = unemployed.
FOR
· For example = For Instance
· For life
· For the most part: C«ng phÇn lín
· For (this, that, some) reason (s):
· For fun
· For good : vÜnh viÔn
· For nothing: kh«ng lÊy g× c¶, miÔn phÝ
· For the sake of: (For the benefit or adventage of ) V× lîi Ých cña ai....
· For good ness' sake: chóa ¬i.
· For sale
· Word for word: tõng ch÷ mét
· For awalk/a swim/ a drink (th­êng ®i víi ®éng tõ "go").
· For breakfast / lunch.
· Go for a place for a holiday.

Ex1 Verb + Preposition Ex2 Preposition + N
1. apply ................... (a job) 1...................sale
2. approve .............. 2...................cover of
3. believe .................. 3. tobe ..................interest
4. believe ................ sb 4....................contrast................
5. blame sth ............sth 5 to go .............. a journey / voyage / trip
6. complain ............sb ....sth 6. ..............no extra charge
7. cover sth ............ sth else 7................aid of
8. depend .................... 8. ................the aid of ..........
9. differ .................. 9.................doubt
10. mistake sb ............ sb else 10.................the left
11. overflow................sth 11.................the left hand corner
12. regard sb/sth................ 12.................the left hand end
13. Insist.............. 13..................danger of (+ ving)
14. succeed ........... 14..................the intention of ( + ving)
15. suffer ............ (a disease) 15 to be ................. the opinion that
16. take advantage ............ 16.....................the habit of + ving
Ex3 Adjective + Preopsition Ex4 Verb + preopsition
1. capable................ 1. benefit
2. compared............. 2 charge sb ........... (a crime)
3. contrary.............. 3 cheat sb ....... sth
4. convinced ............ 4 compliment sb ............
5. deprived ................ 5 con centrate.............
6. familiar ..................... 6 confess
7. fed up ................... 7 convince sb ............. sth
8. guilty ................. 8 deprive sb .................
9. Ignorant ................. 9 differ....................
10. keen .................... 10 disapprove..........
11. regardless ................. 11 plead guilty............
12. responsible .................. 12 prevent sb/sth........
13. satisfied ................... 13 rob sb..............
14. subject ................. 14. specialise ................
15. surprised ................... 15 suspect sb ................
16. suspicious.................. 16 threaten sb ................
Ex5 Adj + pre Ex6 Pre + N
1 according..................... 1.................the basic of / that
2 aimed .......................... 2.................business
3 aware........................... 3.................chance
4 capable........................ 4.................control of
5 confined ...................... 5..................all costs
6 content .................... (sth) 6..................debt
7 critical..................... 7..................fire
8 envious .................. 8...................the one hand
9 expert ..................... 9...................one's own
10 far ................. (sth / sb) 10..................other words
11 Ignorant....................... 11..................pressure
12 Interested ................... 12.................possession
13 peculiar...................... 13................present
14 preferable ................... 14................purpose
15 proud ....................... 15................use ( = being used)
16 sympathetic.............. 16................the whole

REFERENCE LIST OF VERBS FOLLOWED BY INFINITIVES

A. VERBS FOLLOWED IMMEDIATELY BY AN INFINITiVE
1. afford I can't afford to buy it.
2. agree They agreed to help us.
3. appear She appears to be tired.
4. arrange I’ll arrange to meet you at the airport.
5. ask He asked to come with us.
6. beg He begged to come with us.
7. care I don't care to see that show.
8. claim She claims to know a famous movie star.
9. consent She finally consented to marry him.
10. decide I have decided to leave on Monday.
11.demand I demand to know who is responsible.
12.deserve She deserves to win the prize.
13.expect I expect to enter graduate school in the fall.
14.fail She failed to return the book to the library on time.
15.forger I forgot to mail the letter.
16.hesitate Don't hesitateto ask for my help.
17.hope Jack hopes to arrive next week.
18.learn He learned to play the piano.
19.manage She managed to finish her work early.
20.mean I didn't mean to hurt your feelings.
21.need I need to have your opinion.
22.offer They offered to help us.
23.plan I am planning to have a party.
24.prepare We prepared to welcome them.
25.pretend He pretends not to understand.
26.promise I promise not to be late.
27.refuse I refuse to believe his story.
28.regret I regret to tell you that you failed.
29.remember I remembered to lock the door.
30.seem That cat seems to be friendly.
31.struggle I struggled to stay awake.
32.swear She swore to tell the truth.
33.threaten She threatened to tell my parents.
34.volunteer He volunteered to help us.
35.wait I will wait to hear from you.
36.want I want to tell you something.
37.wish She wishes to come with us.

B. VERBS FOLLOWED BY A (PRO)NOUN + AN INFINITIVE
38.advise She advised me to wait until tomorrow.
39.allow She allowed me to use her car.
40.ask I asked John to help us.
41.beg They begged us to come.
42.cause Her laziness caused her to fail.
43.challenge She challenged me to race her to the corner.
44.convince I couldn't convince him to accept our help.
45.dare He dared me to do better than he had done.
46.encourage He encouraged me to try again.
47.expect I expect you to be on time.
48.forbid I forbid you to tell him.
49.force They forced him to tell the truth.
50.hire She hired a boy to move the lawn.
51.instruct He instructed them to be careful.
52.invite Harry invited the Johnsous to come to his party.
53.need We needed Chris to help us figure out the solution.
54.order The judge ordered me to pay a fine
55.permit He permitted the children to stay up late.
56.persuade I persuaded him to come for a visit.
57.remind She reminded me to lock the door.
58.require Our teacher requires us to be on time.
59.teach My brother taught me to swim.
60.tell The doctor told me to take these pills.
61.urge I urged her to apply for the job.
62.want I want you to be happy.
63.warn I warned you not to drive too fast.
READING & VOCABULARY
1 Art factories
Several years ago an old factory on the edge of Paris was turned __(0)__ an exhibition centre. This help many artists __(1)__ had found it too expensive to work in the centre of Paris, and so for the __(2)__few years painters, musicians, actors and other people __(3)__ had space to work and perform. The people behind the idea now __(4)__ to change the use of the other old buildings __(5)__ the same reasons. Sometimes the use of the buildings can only __(6)__ for a short period of time, a year for example, __(7)__ the opportunity is always worth it for the young artists. On one occasion a businessman lent an old building __(8)__ the organizers for two years, and in that time artists were __(9)__ to put on concerts, art exhibitions and fashion shows to __(10)__ the local people.
0 A into B onto C up D out
1 A which B some C who D those
2 A other B past C late D remaining
3 A have B must C would D had
4 A think B like C go D want
5 A with B by C beyond D for
6 A take B be C seem D have
7 A but B so D because D since
8 A for B in C to D from
9 A suitable B able C better D successful
10 A attract B bring D provide D enjoy

2 Youth at the wheel
One in six drivers Britain is aged between 17 and 25. But more drivers in __(0)__ age group are responsible __(1)__ a greater number of accidents than older drivers, in __(2)__ one accident in four is the fault of a young, inexperienced driver. A team of researchers has __(3)__ two years studying the driving performance, attitudes and behaviour of young people. The report __(4)__ that not all young drivers are dangerous, __(5)__ a large number of males, particularly those aged 17 to 20, do not drive as carefully __(6)__ other age groups. These young drivers are more likely to have __(7)__ accident in their first year of driving __(8)__ when their experience increases. The report also notes that men are more likely to __(9)__ driving rules than women, and that a girlfriend or wife in the car has a calming __(10)__ on the driving pattern of young men.
0 A this B some C one D that
1 A to B for C with D from
2 A order B place C time D fact
3 A done B put C given D spent
4 A says B tells C speaks D talks
5 A and B but C since D because
6 A so B like C as D that
7 A the B this C an D some
8 A than B until C or D while
9 A crash B break C tear D escape
10 A way B effort C method D influence

3 Rail Disco
Every Saturday night at six o’clock during __(0)__ summer months up to 500 disco fans climb aboard a train in Turin in Italy. They __(1)__ the next six hours dancing away until the train __(2)__ a popular disco at one of the towns __(3)__ the Adriatic coast. The whole trip __(4)__ eighty dollars, including entrance into the disco. Italian railways started the idea __(5)__ away of trying to reduce the growing number of young people __(6)__ have accidents every weekend as they drive the 400 kilometres to the coast. Even __(7)__ the train pulls away from the platform the disco car is crowed with people __(8)__ all kinds of fashionable clothes. The discos stay open until four in the morning and __(9)__ at 05.30 the train is ready to begin its journey back to turn. It will arrive in __(10)__ for its exhausted passengers to get home for Sunday lunch!
0 A the B one C that D those
1 A go B spend C do D take
2 A comes B travels C reaches D arrives
3 A in B to C for D on
4 A pays B charges C makes D costs
5 A as B like C such D that
6 A what B these C who D they
7 A until B before C above D after
8 A dressing B having C wearing D showing
9 A then B where C when D since
10 A turn B case C fact D time

4 Birth of the computer
Most people think of computers as very modern inventions, products of our new technological __(0)__ . But actually the idea for a computer __(1)__ worked out over two centuries ago by a man __(2)__ Charles Babage. Babbge was born __(3)__ 1791 and grew up to be a brilliant mathematician. He drew up plans for several calculating machines __(4)__ he called “engines”. But despite the fact that he __(5)__ building some of these he never finished any of them. Over the years people have argued __(6)__ his machines would ever work. Recently, however, the Science Museum in London has finished building __(7)__ engine based on one of Babbge’s deigns. __(8)__ has taken six years to complete and more __(9)__ four thousand parts have been specially made. Whether it works or not, the machine will be on show at a special exhibition in the Science Museum __(10)__ remind people of Babbge’s work.
0 A age B year C time D days
1 A has B was C had D is
2 A known B recognized C written D called
3 A on B in C by D for
4 A whose B who c these D which
5 A wanted B made C started D missed
6 A until B whether C while D though
7 A some B the C an D that
8 A One B He C They D It
9 A than B therefore C when D then
10 A to B as C for D so

5 Holidays that don’t cost the earth
The tourist industry is considered to be __(0)__ world’s largest industry. Before 1950 about 1 million people __(1)__ abroad each year __(2)__ by the 1990s the figure had __(3)__ to over 400 million every year. __(4)__ large numbers of tourists, however, are beginning to cause problems. For example, Mount Everest in the Himalayas are reported to be covered __(5)__ old tins, tends and food that have been __(6)__ away. But at a time when we have greater freedom to travel __(7)__ ever before, more and more people are asking how they can enjoy their holiday __(8)__ causing problems by spoiling the countryside. Now there is a new holiday guide called Holidays That Don’t Cost the Earth. It __(9)__ you how you can help the tourist industry by asking your travel agent or your tour operator the right questions before you go on holiday.
0 A the B a C one D that
1 A travelled B came D sailed D were
2 A as b because C but D when
3 A gone B flown C risen D raised
4 A Such B More C Few D So
5 A which B you C who D they
6 A for B on C with D below
7 A put B thrown C given D tidied
8 A than B when C then D while
9 A outside B instead C beside D without
10 A says B offers C tells D givens

6 A new restaurant with a difference has opened in the High Street next door to the Royal Theatre in Bristol. It is called “Starters” and is __(1)__ by Calro and Philip Wells who opened a __(2)__ restaurant in London last year. Instead of a traditional three-course __(3)__ customers can choose whatever __(4)__ want from a list of __(5)__ a hundred starter or first courses. The list also includes recipes from all over the world and customers are recommended to __(6)__ at least 3 starters to __(7)__ a satisfying meal. Prices vary depending on what you have, __(8)__ it is impossible to eat quite cheaply if you __(9)__ want to spend a lot of money. The new restaurant is becoming very popular and it’s __(10)__ to book a table too avoid waiting.
1 A got B held C run D taken
2 A similar B same C several D like
3 A tea B meal C food D plate
4 A you B he C they D we
5 A only B up C more D over
6 A read B choose C look D want
7 A make B be C want D need
8 A so B then C unless D if
9 A do B can C don’t D will
10 A well B best C great D fine

7 “The Moon Trap” is a new film made by a young Canadian __(1)__ called Melvin Strang. The main parts in the film are __(2)__ by Sid Cheung and Julie Plein who last appeared in “Music For Ever.” In this new film __(3)__ star as a young married couple who buy an old house in the country. After living there __(4)__ a few weeks strange things begin to happen. Some of the furniture in the house disappears and can’t be __(5)__ windows break and pictures fall of walls. At night they __(6)__ crying noises, and when the moon is up loud screams can be heard from the woods nearby. As you might expect, the young couple try to discover the __(7)__ for all these strange events and this leads them into some very frightening situations. __(8)__ you are easily scared don’t go and see this film! But if you enjoy films with __(9)__ of adventure and murder __(10)__ this is the film for you.
1 A actor B leader C director D manager
2 A played B given C made D put
3 A the B they C she D by
4 A since B from D for D by
5 A taken B moved C made D found
6 A hear B make C seem D sound
7 A way B course C reason D use
8 A Why B If C How D Because
9 A lots B much C many D all
10 A as B when C than D then

8 There has been a revolution in the world of newspapers. Not many years __(1)__, newspapers were still being produced using techniques unchanged for __(2)__ hundred years. The journalists gave their storied to a typist, who prepared them for an editor, who passed them on __(3)__ the printer. The printer, who was a __(4)__ skilled man, set up the type. __(5)__ was then collected to make the pages. When the pages were complete, the printing machines could be __(6)__. Nowadays what __(7)__? The journalists type their stories into a computer. The __(8)__ checks their spelling, plans the page, shapes the articles. When the pages are ready, another computer may control the printing. __(9)__ can be no doubt about it, producing a newspaper is an entirely different __(10)__ now.
1 A before B after C ago D yet
2 A a B some C an D over
3 A to B by C through d with
4 A hardly B mostly D partly D very
5 A They B Which C This D All
6 A switched B started C stopped D moved
7 A gives B occurs C goes D happens
8 A computer B editor C typist D printer
9 A It B There C You D We
10 A skill B work C management D business

9 Mr Alex Fraser lived his entire life in a small town in the north of England. He never left the house __(1)__ he had been born, never married, never went on holiday and had no friends, He worked in a local factory for __(2)__ forty years but even the people who had worked with him for years __(3)__ very little about him. He wore the same old clothes year in year out, and __(4)__ he shopped regularly at the local store he bought only the most basic foodstuffs, never changing his purchases from one week to the next. So __(5)__ he died last month neighbours and local people were astonished to learn that Mr. Fraser was not just a rich man, he was in fact __(6)__ millionaire! He had not bank account, no money invested any-where but in the various drawers, cupboards and boxes in his house there were hundreds and thousands of bank __(7)__ and coins. It took police over two weeks to clear the house and the bank clerks took just as long to __(8)__ all the money. “We had absolutely no idea that he had been hiding his money over the years” one of his neighbours __(9)__. “In fact we used to feel sorry for him, we thought he was a poor old man unable to __(10)__ better for himself!”
1 A which B where C who D what
2 A until B above C over D across
3 A reminded B held C had D knew
4 A although B but C because D however
5 A while B when C during D that
6 A the B this C a D one
7 A papers B money C letters D notes
8 A number B count C guess D make
9 A said B spoke C mentioned D told
10 A pay B spend C afford D give

10 C & A probably one of the largest family fashion stores in the world, and their shops are a familiar sight in __(1)__ High Street in Britain. But many British people would be surprised to learn __(2)__ this fashion company has Dutch orgins. Founded in the small market town of Sneek in 1841, the first C & A shop __(3)__ opened by two brothers called Clemens and August Brenninkmeyer. The initials of their first names formed the name of the shop. As trade grew, more __(4)__ were opened across Europe and in 1922 C & A came to Britain. __(5)__ success was immediate and the store was a major influence in bringing down the __(6)__ of women’s clothes. It was the two brothers __(7)__ started the 5- day working week, ata time when shopkeepers in Britain expected their __(8)__ to work a 6-day week. Today C & A employs many thousands of people. All the stores are attractively __(9)__ with good use of space, lighting and plenty of individua changing rooms where __(10)__ can try on in comfort before they buy.
1 A every B most C more D each
2 A that B if C and D because
3 A were B have C had D was
4 A stores B places C parts D houses
5 A They B This C That D Their
6 A value B figures C cost D money
7 A which B who C what D whom
8 A staff B groups c officers D employers
9 A drawn B designed C set D put
10 A customers B patienis D one D persons

11 Advice for travellers who may fall ill while abroad
Most British people go abroad on holiday, to visit family, or on short business trips. People are __(1)__ to find out how to get urgent treatment before leaving the UK. They have to __(2)__ a form which explains what they __(3)__ do if they fall ill or __(4)__ an accident, and what arrangements exist in __(5)__ country for medical treatment. The regulations are fairly simple but __(6)__ people do not have this information, they may __(7)__ that private medical care is extremely expensive. It is not unusualfor people to discover that they do not have __(8)__ money with them to __(9)__ the total costa and __(10)__ such circumstances an already difficult situation becomes even more complecated.
1 A advised B suggested C said D spoken
2 A put B bring C fill D get
3 A ought b will C should D may
4 A have B get C happen D take
5 A their B each C one D this
6 A because B whether C as D if
7 A look B want C find D know
8 A enough B little C few D full
9 A pay B give C spend D have
10 A on B in C at D up

12 When you are driving you should make sure that you have all your documents with you. These __(1)__ your passport, your driving licence and insurance papers. It __(2)__ be very inconvenient if you __(3)__ any of these or if you cannot find __(4)__ quickly. You must also make sure that your car has a nationality plate which also shows the country where th e car is registered; for __(5)__, GB for Great Britain, F for France, N for Norway and so on. In some __(6)__ you have to pay if you don’t __(7)__ motoring laws and this can sometimes cost you a lot of money. For insurance, you may to pay immediately if you are stppoed by a police officer for taking not notice of traffic lights, speech __(8)__ or if you allow children __(9)__ the age of twelve to __(10__ in the front seat of a vehicle
1 A include B make C mean D contain
2 A should B can C is D has
3 A miss B hide C lose D pass
4 A that B those C their D them
5 A once B example C general D fact
6 A countries B positions C ways D routes
7 A do B allow C obey D continue
8 A marks B spots C limits D numbers
9 A under B lower C over D behind
10 A follow B pass C travel D wait

13 “My hone is in the air – I do an enormous amount of travelling. It is a fast life and __(1)__ of work , but I like it and that is the only way __(2)__ me. Everything is tiring – music, travelling – but what can I do? I am not __(3)__ to complaining. It is hard to imagine now __(4)__ I will ever be very long in one place. My home town is on the Caspian Sea. There is sea, wind, sun and __(5)__ many tourists and hotels. I have my own flat with four or five rooms, but I am seldom there. If I am there for a day or two I prefer to __(6)__ with my mother and grandmother. They live in a small house, __(7)__ it is very comfortable and my mother cooks for me. I like good, simple food. I have no wife, no brothers or sisters and my father __(8)__ when I was seven. He was an engineer and I don’t __(9)__ him very well. He liked music very much and wanted me to __(10)__ a musician.”
1 A most B full B complete D more
2 A for B to C in D by
3 A wanted B taken C used D known
4 A and B so C while D that
5 A far b too C much D more
6 A stay B go C do D spend
7 A but B since C even D which
8 A killed B gone C passed D died
9 A know B remember C remind D see
10 A become B turn C develop D grow

14 For many people, travelling by plane is an exciting experience. Others, however, find the whole idea quite terifying, __(1)__ fying is no more dangerous __(2)__ any other form of travel and some experts say it is considerably safer. It is known, however, that most accidents occur __(3)__ take-off and landing when a __(4)__ decisions are vitally important. The people __(5)__ job it is to look __(6)__ the passengers – the stewards and stewardesses – play an important part in helping passengers to __(7)__ safe and comfortable. Indeed for many passengers being __(8)__ such care of is all part of the total experience. __(9)__ other form of travel involes waiting on people in quite the same __(10)__, with food, drink, newspapers, magazines, music and even video films.
1 A although B too C and D because
2 A than B as C then D with
3 A while B during C for D through
4 A leader’s B chief’s C driver’s D pilot’s
5 A whose B which C their D that
6 A for B up C after D round
7 A feel B rest C experience D lie
8 A given B kept C shown D taken
9 A Any B No C All D Not
10 A way B kind C sort D part
READING COMPREHENSION
Bµi 1 Today every major anthology of nineteenth century poetry includes examples of the work that Christina Rossetti produced during her long literary career. Born in 1830, she began composing verse at the age of eleven and continued to write for the remaining fifty-three years of her life. Her brother Dante Gabriel Rossetti, himself a poet and painter, soon recognized her genius and urged her to publish her poems. By the time of her death in 1894, Christina had written more than eleven hundred poems and had published over nine hundred of them. Although this work has earned her recognition as the greatest woman poet of the Victorian Age, there is still no authoritative edition of her poetry.
1 The word “anthology” (line 1) probably means
A writer B collection C poem D poet
2 Christina Rossetti began writing poetry
A after her brother urged her to do so B when she was fifty-three years old
C when she was very young D when she genius was recognized
3 Christina’s brother was probably a good judge of her work because
A he loved his sister very much B he himself published poems
C he was a poet D he was a famous painter
4 The word “urged” (line 4) means closest to
A forbade B dared C encouraged D forced
5 By 1894, Christina
A had published only a few of the many poems she had written
B had published all more than poems she had written
C had published more than eleven hundred poems
D had published over nine hundred poems
6 At the time this passage was written, Christina Rossetti’s poetry
A was almost unknown
B was rarely published
C had made her known as the greatest woman poet of the eighteenth century
D had not been collected in an authoritative edition
Bµi 2 Early French visitor to the wilderness of the Lower Mississippi Valley were impressed by the hostility of the Natchez Indians. The LaSalle voyagers, who in 1682 stopped beneath the steep bluff on which the tribe resided, were sure that the Indians were plotting “some evil design” and were “resolved to betray and kill us”. Jesuits journeyed to the Natchez villages villages soon after the birth of the Louisiana colony at Biloxi in 1699, but so fruitless was their work that the mission was abandoned eight years later. The priest were shocked by the “barbarous” and “vicious” natives. Whether the Natchez were more unreceptive to Gallic ways than were neighboring Indians is moot, but certainly the French encountered in them a strong and unusual tribe
1 The Jesuits began their work at the Natchez villages
A in 1699 B in 1682 C around 1707 D around 1680
2 How did the Natchez respond to the French?
A They abandoned their mission B They founded the Louisiana colony at Biloxi
C They were very hostile to the French D They were receptive to French ways
3 The one thing about the Natchez that most impressed early French settlers was
A their unfriendliness B their numbers C their highly developed civilization D their method of government
4 The word “fruitless” (line 5) probably means
A successful B unpredictable C that the fruit trees the Jesuits planted were barren D unproductive
5 What quality was not attributed to the Natchez?
A Barbarity B Viciousness C Insanity D Strength
6 The word “resided” (line 3) means
A hunted B lived C hid D waited

Bµi 3 In most cases, you can transplant a tree successfully, at any time, if you follow the instructions for planting a tree. The most important thing is to dig out enough roots, but this process is difficult with a large tree. When you dig out the tree, leave a ball of earth around its roots. This ball of earth should measure about a foot wide for every inch of the tree trunk’s diameter. Dig deep enough to avoid cutting off too many taproots. It is wise to call in a professional tree expert to transplant a tree more than a few inches in trunk diameter.
1 Transplanting a tree is
A very different from planting a tree B so difficult that an expert should always be called in
C much like planting a tree D done successfully in the right seasons
2 The larger the trunk of the tree you are transplanting
A the less it matters whether you call in a tree expert B the more you should avoid cutting off the taproots
C the larger the ball of earth you must leave around the roots D the easier it is to dig out sufficient roots
3 The taproots are
A the heaviest roots B the principal, deepest roots
C the ball of earth D the same width as the trunk’s diameter
4 The best time for transplanting a tree is
A spring B fall C winter D any season
5 To decide whether you can successfully transplant a tree yourself, you should
A select your location carefully B measure the ball of earth around the tree roots
C measure the diameter of the tree trunk D cut off as many taproots as you can reach
Bµi 4The early expansion of the sugar industry was based on cane transported from two different parts of the Orient, first from India and second from the islands of the Southwest Pacific. From India, sugar cane was carried through the western regions of Asia into Arabia and later into the countries bordering on the Mediterranean. It was established in Sicily in about A.D. 730 and was carried to Spain in about A.D. 755. As early as A.D. 1150. Spain had at least 75,000 acres of cane. During this early period sugar cane was grown largely to supply local wants. The Crusades were partly responsible for the further expansion and improvement of the sugar industry and for interesting Europeans in the use of sugar.
1 From this selection, it appears that sugar cane was first grown in
A Europe B the Orient C Arabia D Sicily
2 Sugar cane was first introduced into Spain in
A A.D. 703 B A.D. 755 C A.D. 1150 D A.D. 1419
3 In the twelfth century, most cane was grown
A for exportation B for industrial uses C for sale in the large market cities D for local use
4 One thing that caused the sugar industry to shift westward was
A the favorable climate in the Orient B better means of transportation
C the Crusades D that cane came from different parts of the Orient
5 Cane was transported
A from the islands of the Southwest Pacific, to India, to Asia, into Arabia, and then to Spain
B from the islands of the Southwest Pacific, to the western regions of Asia, and then to the countries bordering the Mediterranean
C from India to the islands of the Southwest Pacific, to Asia, into Arabia, and then to the countries bordering the
Mediterranean
D from India to Asia into Arabia, and then to the countries on the border of the Mediterranean
Bµi 5 By the end of the first quarter of the nineteenth century a number of our Eastern institutions – Harvard, Yale, Columbia, and Pennsylvania – had some of the necessary ingredients of a university, but hardly yet the point of view. They were little clusters of schools and institutes. Indeed, just after the Revolution, the schools of Pennsylvania and Harvard had assumed the somewhat pretentious title of university, and, shortly after, the University of Virginia was founded under the guidance of Thomas Jefferson. In the South, Georgia and later North Carolina began to rise. The substance in all these was mainly lacking, though the title was honored. There were rather feeble law, medical, and divinity schools, somewhat loosely attached to these colleges. It has been commonly recognized, however, that the first decade after the close of the Civil War. that is, from about 1866 to 1876, was the great early flowering of the university idea in America
1 In the opinion of the author of this passage, in 1825
A only Harvard, Yale, Columbia, and Pennylvania could truly be called universities
B all American educational institutions could justifiably claim to be universities
C those institutions that called themselves universities were not justified in doing so
D no American institution of higher ingredients of a university
2 Thomas Jefferson founded
A the University of Pennsylvania B Harvard C the University of Virginia D the University of Georgia
3 The Civil War ended
A about 1866 B about 1876 C about 1856 D during the decade from 1866 to 1876
4 The words “little clusters” (line 3) most nearly means
A small groups B small colleges C small buildings D small organizations
5 The university idea really began to develop
A in the first quarter of the nineteenth B just after the Revolution
C during the last quarter of the nineteenth century D just after the Civil War
Bµi 6 In a very broad sense, legislation plays the same role in civil law countries as judicial decisions play in common law countries. Legislative rules provide the starting point from which lawyers and judges work toward their goal, the most just solution for the problem at hand. Usually the statute provides a clear answer to the problem. In those cases, the statute is strictly applied, more because it is just than because it is a statute. because of this it often appears that legislation is the law and that the judge’s role is simply to apply automatically the ready-made solutions provided by the legislature. Nevertheless, there are a great many cases where the judge’s role is far more creative.
1 When civil law lawyers and judges strictly apply a statute, it is usually because
A it provides a just solution to a problem
B statutes are laws, and must be obeyed
C the judge’s role is always simply to apply automatically the ready-made solutions provided by the legislature
D the role of the civil law judiciary is never really creative
2 Judicial decisions in common law countries
B legislation in civil law countries
C U.S. Supreme Court interpretations
D common law decisions in civil law countries
3 A “statute” is
A a judicial decision B a just solution to a problem C a law D the goal of lawyers and judges
4 When the author says that “the judge’s role is far more creative” (line 6) he means that
A the judge, not the legislature, makes the law B the judge applies the solution provided by the legislature
C the judge creates some cases he or she tries D the judge often does more than just apply the law
Bµi 7 Two key figures in American command arrangements in World War II were President Franklin D. Roosevelt and General George C. Marshall, Chief of Staff of the army, who enjoyed Roosevelt’s almost complete confidence. Even now historians are not agreed on the extent of Roosevelt’s role as commander-in-chief, nor on the nature of his relations with Marshall and the other staff. According to one view, Roosevelt was a somewhat passive war director, concerned only with winning the war quickly and largely reliant on the advice of his top military assistants. Professor Samuel P. Hunting-ton, in The Soldier and the State (1957), states flatly that “the military ran the war”. Nevertheless, says Professor William Emerson in Military Affairs (Winter, 1958-1959), the picture of the passive Roosevelt is deceiving. When the president wanted to, he could intervene in military affairs powerfully and decisively.
1 Professors Huntington and Emerson
A agree that Roosevelt was a somewhat passive war director
B agree that the military ran the war
C disagree as to the extent of Roosevelt’s role as Commander-in-chief
D both believe that the president could, and often did, intervene in military affairs powerfully and decisively
2 It seems to be generally agreed that President Franklin D. Roosevelt
A allowed General George C. Marshall decisions
B made all major military decisions himself
C intervened in military affairs powerfully and decisively
D trusted General George C. Marshall and, whether or not he always followed his policy, listened carefully to his advice
3 According to professor Emerson, Roosevelt
A sometimes took an active role in making military decisions B had a passive role in military affairs
C was closely supervised by the Joint Chiefs of Staff D had little control of the war machine
4 The phrase “two key figures” (line 1) means that
A these men trusted each other
B these men were held the keys to American defense headquarters
D these men equally shared the responsibility of command
Bµi 8 The alligator (Alligator mississippiensis), whose great size is legendary, is one of two members of the order Crocodilia found in the United States. The anatomy of the alligator has been studied from the middle of the last century up to the present, and hundreds of papers have been written on the subject. A fairly comprehensive treatise published by Reese in 1915 has been a guide for much of the more recent work, and is still helpful to those using the alligator for research. Neither the physiology nor the biochemistry of the alligator had been studied in much detail prior to the work described here. In the early years of the century when metabolism was being investigated in many different types of animals, several experiments were conducted on reptiles. Benedict, Krehl, and Soetbeer, and others used the alligator, and comparisons were made of the caloric requirements of cold – and warm – blooded animals.
1 Krehl and Soetbeer studied
A the size of the alligator B the metabolism of the alligator
C the natural history of the alligator D the anatomy of the alligator
2 Crocodilia
A has only one member, Alligator mississippiensis B has two members
C has two members that are found in the United States D has one member that is found in the Unite States
3 The aspect of the alligator that has been studied the longest is
A its great size B its metabolism C its anatomy D its caloric requirements
4 The word “legendary” (line 1) means
A famous B enormous C incredible D interesting
Bµi 9 According to the census of 1800, the United States of American contained 5,308,483 persons. In the same year the British Island contained upwards of fifteen million; the French Republic, more than twenty –seven million. Nearly one-fifth of the American people were black slaves; the true political population consisted of four and a half million free whites, or less than one million able-bodied males, on whose shoulders fell the struggle the land was still untamed; forest covered every portion, except here and there a strip of cultivated soil; the minerals lay undisturbed in their rocky beds, and more than two-thirds of the people clung to the seaboard within fifty miles of tidewater, where alone the wants of civilized life could be supplied
1 In the United States of American in 1800
A one out of every twenty-five Americans was a black slave B one out of every four Americans was a black slave
C two out of every three Americans were a black slave D one out of every five Americans was a black slave
2 Free white men in America numbered
A about four-fifths of the population B about four and one-half million
C 5,308,483 D less than one million
3 Two – thirds of the American people
A lived where the wants of civilized life could not be supplied B lived in Washington
C lived on the seaboard D lived within fifteen miles of tidewater
4 The struggle to tame the American continents had been going on
A about two hundred years B about fifty years
C a little more than a century D since 1750
5 This description of the United States in 1800 suggests that
A most of the new nation was undeveloped
B the people of the new nation had succeeded in taming the continent
C strips of cultivated land were everywhere
D settlers were beginning to mine the valuable minerals of the new continent
Bµi 10 Since the original sections of New Orleans had been built upon a natural levee or embankment which had been further heightened as the yeas pased, the natural drainage of all streets was away from the river in the direction of the swamp leading ultimately to Lake Pontchatrain. Whatever may have been the disadvantaged of this drainage system, it was possible to flush the gutters by means of hydrants located at the heads of those streets running diagonally from the river. In its aim to keep the streets as clean as possible, the Broad of Health ordered that public hydrants on the main streets be opened for one hour each morning and evening. The sixty-inch annual rainfall in New Orleans originally had been sufficient to clean out the gutters, but as the population grew and the dirt and refuse accumulated, the rainwater soon proved inadequate. Whatever impact flushing the gutters may have had on health – and this is debatable point – the aesthetic results must have justified the practice.
1 The city of New Orleans seems
A to have been located in a valley
B to have been located between a river and a lake
C to have had no natural levee to help in its drainage
D to have been built on land so high that it needed no further heightening
2 The streets of New Orleans drained
A into the river B away from the lake C into lake Ponchartrain D away from the swamp
3 New Orleans usually had
A little rainfall B sixty inches of rainfall a month
C sixty inches of rainfall a year D enough rainfall to eliminate completely the need for extra drainage systems
4 The flushing of the gutters
A definitely improved the health of the New Orleanians
B had no real effect on the health of the New Orleanians
C may have made an improvement in the health of the New Orleanians
D had some effect on the health of the citizens of New Orleans, but no other noticeable effect
Bµi 11 Embodying the bad as well as the good of America, Theodore Roosevelt was admired by his countrymen almost as much for hid fallings as for his “finer qualities.” If he gave voice to the nobler aspirations of the nation, his defects were those of a majority of the people. Harry Thurston Peck noted that “the self – consciousness, the touch of the swagger, the love of applause and of publicity, the reckless speech, the unnecessary frankness, and the disregard of form” that characterized Roosevelt were in reality “traits that … were national.” One of Roosevelt’s bitterest critics wrote, “Roosevelt is popular – as popular as any president in our history. America has a hysterical element. Official hysterics size means greatness. In them Roosevelt touches a responsive chord. Many of our people are boastful and self-assertive, Roosevelt is their ideal. Fulmination, bluster, clamorousness appeal to some of us. Roosevelt satisfies us.”
1 Roosevelt’s defects
A were peculiarly his own B were similar to those of other Americans
C far outweighed his good qualities D were well-hidden
2 Roosevelt’s personality was clearly
A shy and retiring B cautions and prudent C bold and informal D dignified and tactful
3 Physically, Roosevelt was probably
A short and fat B thin and sickly C a big man D a small man
4 The unidentified critic in this passage
A admired Roosevelt as a man, but he questioned his ability as a president
B thought that Roosevelt was popular mainly because he was different from the average American
C believed that Roosevelt was seen clearly and judged accurately by the American people
D disliked and disapproved of Roosevelt
Bµi 12 At the battle of Gettysburg, general George G. Meade, who succeeded General Hooker as commander of the Army of the Potomac, threw back Lee’s attacks and hurt the Confederate army badly. Meade had fought a skillful defensive battle, but he was satisfied with his victory as it was. He was content to see Lee leave his front, and his principal concern was to “herd” Lee back over the Potomac. Like other Federal generals, he lacked the killer instinct, which all the great battle captains have had, to finish off the enemy. After the engagement he issued a congratulatory order to his troops in which he praised them for having driven the enemy from “our soil”. After all, this was a civil war! When Licoln read the order, he exclaimed in anguish, “My God! Is that all?”
1 The Battle of Gettysburg
A was won by the Confederate army B was won by Hooker
C was won by Lee D was won by the Federal army
2 Geoger G. Meade did not
A hurt the Confederate army B fight a good defensive battle
C force Lee to retreat D completely destroy the enemy
3 When Lincoln heard of Meade’s order, he
A was delighted B congratulated the troops C was dismayed D prayed
4 The implication of the paragraph is that
A Meade was totally incompetent B Meade was ruthless
C Meade should have “finished off” the enemy D Meade was well-loved by his men
Bµi 13 Up to about 1915, movies were short and programs were made up of several works. Then, D.W. Griffith and others began to make longer films that provided the same powerful emotional appeal as did melodrama and presented spectacles far beyond what the theater could offer. Consequently, after World War I increasing numbers of spectators deserted the theater for the movies. This trend was accelerated in the late 1920s as a result of two new elements. In 1927 sound was added to the previously silent film, and thus one of the theater’s principal claims to superiority vanished. In 1929 a serious economic depression began. Since audiences could go to the movies for a fraction of what it cost to see a play, theatergoing became a luxury that few could afford, especially as the depression deepened. By the end of World War II, the American theater had been reduced to about thirty theaters in New York City and a small number of touring companies originating there.
1 One thing that movies could do better than the theater was
A provide longer programs B provide emotional appeal C provide more melodrama D provide greater spectacle
2 Up to the 1920s one objection to films was that
A they were too short B they were silent C they were too expensive D they did not tell a complete story
3 One thing that made people choose the movies over the theater was
A World War I B the fact that films were less expensive
C the fact that films were silent D the fact that films were shorter
4 By the end of World War II
A theater had become entertainment for the masses
B the theater was no longer considered a luxury
C professional theatrical performances were confined mainly to New York City
D there were no theatrical performances outside of New York City
5 When the author of this paragraph says “this trend was accelerated in the late 1920s – (line 4), he means that
A many more people went to the theater than to the movies
B the shift away from the movies to the theater was slowed down
C the popularity of the theater was gradually increasing
D the shift away from the theater to the movies was speeded up
Bµi 14 This family of some 14 genera and 35 species is worldwide in distribution except for New Zealand, New Guinea, Celebes, Polynesia, the Moluccas, Taiwan, Madagascar, the West Indies, most oceanic islands, and Antarctica. The dingo (Canis dingo) of Australia is probably only a breed of dog that was introduced to the continent by aboriginal immigrants. It had certainly been there a long time when Europeans first arrived. The demestic dog is often referred to as Canis familliaris, as if were a distinct species. Instead it is probably a dervation of the wolf or of several wolflike canids with which man has come in contack over the last ten thousand years or so of his history. Charles Darwin, in attempting to trace the evolution of the dog, finally gave up in despair, saying that its ancestry was concealed “in the mist of antiquity”. Admittedly much time has esapsed since primitive man can first be pictured cudding an orphaned puppy wolf and finding it responsive to his care and comforting to himself. The union was a happy one, for the ancestral dog possessed many qualities that equipped it for successful domestication. above all it, had a desire to please its master, and it seemed to enjoyed doing the things asked of it, such as participation in the hunt. And for man, it served all important functions as scavenger of camp leftovers and as a sentined to warm his owner of intruders.
1 According to the passage, the Canis dingo probably
A was native to Australia B was brought by early immigrants
C is not really a member of the dog family D was first introduced by Europeans
2 Which statements is closest to the mainnideal of the second paragraph in this passage?
A the domestic dog is often called Canis familiaris B Charles Darwin tried to trace the evolution of the dog
C The exact ancestry of the domestic dog is not certain D The domestic dog has been around a long time
3 The probable ancestor of Canis familiaris is
A an orphaned puppy B the wolf C Canis dingo D the domestic dog
4 What does this passage suggest is one reason for the worldwide distribution of the Canidae family?
A The family probably descended from wolflike canis B Charles Darwin studied the family’s evolution
C The family has a very long history D the family has had a long history of contact with man
5 Which of the following words is cosest in meaning to the word cudding (line 9) ?
A Hugging B Kissing C Feeding D Protecting
6 What would be the best title for this passage?
A The Canidae Family B The Domestic Dog C Canis dingo D The Distribution of the Dog
Bµi 15 The ancient natives of the Canary Islands were the Guanches, who lived a Stone Age way of life. While the term Guanche is properly used only for the former inhabitands of Tenerife, it has been commonly applied to all of the prehistory population of this islands. The Guanche language, which is related to the ancient idioms of North Africa, has disappeared except for a few words. The Quanches never Canary Islands have been described as robust, fair skinned, and handsome. They largely dedicated themselves to a pastoral life, caring for their goats, sheep, and pigs. They also practiced a limited agriculture, growing wheat and barley, amongother foodstuffs. Although a number Guanches lived in huts, caves sheltered the majority from the elements. Adult Guanches dressed in skins or grasses sewn together, while the younger people went about naked. On the larger islands, the Guanches had a king called mencey or quannartem, held land in common, and lived peacefully with one another except for occasional fights over the theft of animals. Their primitive weapons were mainly sticks, spears, and stones. They developed a system of government that included judges and laws. Their religion consisted of belief in a single god, and they carefully buried their dead after embalming the bodies. In the late nineteenth examined large numbers of Guanche mummies and skeletons.
1 Today, the Guanche language
A is spoken by the people of North Africa B is spoken by the Canary Islanders
C has finally bacome a written as well as a spoken language D has mostly disappeared
2 The word robust (line 5) means that the Guanches were
A healthy B intelligent C tall D red-haired
3 What is one way historians know that the Guanches embalmed their dead?
A The Guanches left written records B Their religion is still practiced
C Anthropologists have found embalmed bodies D Anthropologists have found skeletons
4 According to this passage, the native dress of the Guanches
A was worn only by adult women B was not worn by children
C was a simple piece of cloth wrapped around the body D was decorated with beads and shells
5 From this passage, the reader can infer that the Canary Islands
A had a temperate climate B had no land that could be cultivated
C did not have pasture land D had many volcanoes
6 This passage suggests that the Guanches
A cultivated no crops B built no shelters for themselves
C had no ruling class D spent most of their lives out of doors
Bµi 16 Just below New Orleans, the parish of St. Bernard spread its fields of cane and corn, its cypress’ and live oak forests, and its dark swamps under the warm Louisiana sun. Frechmen had settled it, and in 1818, only fifteen years after the cession of Louisiana from France to the United States, St. Bernaed was proudly and even fiercely French. About twenty miles from the city, in the center of the parish, stood Contreras, the plantation home of the Toutant – Beauregards. Jacques Toutant – Beauregard, the master of Contreras, could trace his French and Welsh lineage back to the thirteenth century. His grandfather, the first of the family to settle in Louisiana, had come out to the colony in the time of Louis XIV. Jacques numbered among his Louisiana ancestors Cartiers and Ducros, names of distinction in bayou country. His wife was a De Reggio, and had a family tree even more impressive than his. The De Reggios claimed descent from an Italian noble family, dukes no less, a scion of which migrated to France and founded a French line that eventually ended up in Louisiana.
1 Jacques’ wife’s ancestry was
A French B French and Welsh C Italian D French and Italian
2 At the time described in this passage, St. Bernard parish
A was still a part of France B was not yet a part of Louisiana
C had been part of the United States for fifteen years D was a part of Louisiana, but not a part of the United States
3 The first of the Beauregard family to settle in Louisiana was
A Jacques B Jacques’ grandfather C Jacques’ father D Jacques’ great-grandfather
4 The people of St. Bernard parish were
A ashamed of their French heritage B unaware of their French heritage
C unconcerned with their ancestry D proud of their French heritage
5 Jacques’ ancestry was
A less distinguished than his wife’s B more distinguished than his wife’s
C the most impressive in all of St. Bernard parish D as distinguished as his wife’s
Bµi 17 There can be little doubt that malaria was prevalent in all American colonies during the seventeenth century. Toward the end of the century and continuing into eighteenth, a rising incidence marked parts of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Maryland, Delaware, and other colonies situated in the coastal plains region. while a corresponding decline characterized New England. The significance of malaria in colonial history can scarcely be overrated, for it a major hurdle in the development of the American colonies. To the newly arrived settlers or “fresh Europeans,” it frequently proved fatal, and epidemics of pernicious malaria took a heavy toll of old and new colonists alike. In endemic regions the regular succession of spring and fall outbreaks, with the concomitant sickness and disability, deprived the colonies of much sorely needed labor.
1 Malaria occurred
A only in the spring B in almost any season C only in the fall D in periodic outbreaks
2 During the late seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries
A the number of malaria cases in Maryland declined
B the number of malaria cases in New England increased
C the number of malaria cases in the coastal plaints region declined
D the number of malaria cases in New Jersey increased
3 The words “endemic regions” (line 7) mean most nearly
A extensive regions B regions with poor climate
C regions where malaria was rare D regions where malaria was common
4 The importance of malaria in colonial history
A is difficult to exaggerate B was minimal C has never been assessed D is difficult to determine
5 Malaria affected
A only “fresh Europeans” B only old colonists C only newly arrived settlers D both old and new colonists
Bµi 18 Belize City, capital of Belize (once British Honduras), has always been the country’s administrative, cultural, and geographic center. It is a unique waterfront community charaterized by large frame houses with rambling, screened verandas. Located on the periphery of the hurricane zone, and at an average elevation of two feet above sea level, the city is vulnerable to any tidal wave. Hence, most buildings are on stilts, and many others have spartan furnishings at the street level. The cooling effect of sea breezes in a community surrounded on three sides by water relieves the otherwise oppressive climate. Located on the Caribean coast of Cantral American slightly more than more than eight hundred miles south of New Orleans and about the same distance west of Jamaica, Belize City had a population of nearly six thousand in 1859, ten thousand in 1900, and thirty thousand in the 1960s.
1 Jamaica is located
A about eight hundred miles south of New Orleans B about eight hundred miles east of Belize
C about eight hundred miles west of Belize City D about eight hundred miles north of New Orleans
2 Because of the danger from tidal waves, the houses of Belize City
A are on the waterfront B have large, screened verandas
C enjoy cooling sea breezes D are built on stitls
3 The word “vulnerable” (line 4) means most nearly
A protected against B immune to C attracted to D defenseless against
4 According to this passage, Belize City is
A in the center of the hurricane zone B well below sea level
C on the outer edge of the hurricane zone D more than two feet above sea level

Cloze Tests
Read the texts and think of the word which best fits each space.
Test 1
Jack Pask and his (1) ____ Dora were worried about their son Danny. The boy stayed out too long, not coming home (2) ____ very late at night. This bad habit the parents anxious. So one day Jack said to Mrs. (4) ____, “I’m going to teach our son a (5) ____. He’s got (6) ____ business being out till after midnight.” The next evening Danny left the house (7) ____ usual. “I’m going to a disco,” he (8) ____ mother. “There’s no need to wait up (9) ____ me.” Then the front door shut with a bang (10) ____ big Danny.
Test 2
One morning last summer Jessie (1) ____ some sandwiches for her busband’ lunch. They were sausage sandwiches. There was one small sausage (2) ____ over, so Jessie gave (3) ____ to Henry, her little dog. Henry ate it up. Half an hour (4) ____, the dog got ill. He kept (5) ____ shaking his head, and rubbing it (6) ____ his foot. Jessie thought, “He’s ill. He must have eaten (7) ____ that didn’t agree with him. Maybe that (8) ____ was bad.” Then she remembered her husband’s (9) _____. She ran to the telephone and (10) ____ Jim at his office in town.
Test 3
Edgar Lewis was a coal miner (1) ____ thirty years he had worked underground in a coal mine. It was hard and dangerous (2) ____. One day Edgar had an (3) ____ in the mine; a lot of stone fell on him. A sharp stone cut through his left leg like a (4) ____ through butter. Edgar lost consciousness. When he (5) ____, he was in bed in the mine doctor’s room. He felt around with his (6) ____. There was no left leg (7) ____ his left leg ought to be. “Nurse!” he called loudly. A nurse came. “What have you (8) ____ with my left leg?” Edgar de­manded. She pointed to a brown cardboard box (9) ____ the floor. “(10) ____ it is, Mr Lewis, in that box,” she said.
Test 4
We moved into our new house (1) ____ a warm September day. It was not really a new house; it was a hundred and four years (2) ____, but it was new to us. The house had runnig (3) ____, gas and electricity, but for (4) ____ reason there was no electric light in the kitchen. We bad not noticed this shortage (5) ____ we bad first looked over the house. It was something quite unexpected: a house with electricity but (6) ____ a kitchen light. It was especially puzzling because our (7) ____ was a large room, perhaps (8) ____ largest in the house. I telephoned for an (9) ____. He came and fixed it for us. And he charged £85 for (10) ____ the job.
Test 5
The big tree at my gate was old and beautiful. I was saddened when it blew (1) ____ in a winter storm. After the storm I sawed (2) ____ the remains of the tree to level (3) ____ the ground. Some of the wood was rotten. Pieces came away in my (4) ____. But a good part of the wood was alive and strong. I did not dig (5) ____ the roots of the tree. I (6) ____ them in the ground.
Three months (7) ____, in spring, the old tree began to grow again. It grew strong and beautiful, straight up (8) ____ the side of the sawn-off part. The colour and smell of its heart-shaped (9) ____ were exactly the same as (10) ____ of the old tree. I felt very happy.
Test 6
Brian’s father was a coward and not an honest man. He did not himself (1) ____ a lie to ajudge in a law case, but he wanted Brianto (2) ____ so, and that was worse. The facts were that Brian and Tim (3) ____ seen a man attack a boy, knock him down and kick him. The (4) ____ arrested the man and brought him before a judge. Brian and Tim hadk to go too, to describe (5) ____ had happened. Before Brian left home, his (6) ____ said to him: “Be careful, son. You didn’t see that man kick
the boy, (7) ____ you? Tell the judge you didn’t see the kick.’ Remem­ber, we have (8) ____ live in this village with that man.” But Brian was (9) ____ coward. He told the (10) ____ the truth about the attack
Test 7
A story is a work of imagination. The people (1) ____ write stories write them in order to give pleasure to (2) ____ who read stories. Storyreaders are, generally (3) ____ women of all ages and younger men. Readers love the start of a story, where there are new and sometimes strange people to be (4) ____ for the first time. They enjoy the story itself the gentleness and the violence, the loves and the (5) ____, with which a good writer interests his (6) ____. They enjoy the end of the story, whether it is happy or (7) ____. The reader’s chief purpose in all this is to (8) ____ from ordinary life for a short (9) ____. Older men, as a rule, find their ordinary lives (10) ____ pleasant to run away from.
Test 8
We have seen photographs of the whole earth taken from great dis­tances in outer space. This is the first time, the (1) ____ first time, in man’s long history that such pictures have been possible. (2) ____ many years most people have believed that the earth was ball-shaped. A few thought it was round and (3) ____ like a coin. Now we know, beyond doubt, that those few were (4) ____. The photographs show a ball-shaped (5) ____, bright and beautiful. In colour photographs of the earth, the sky is as (6) ____ as coal. The (7) ____ looks much bluer than it usually does to us. All our grey (8) ____ are a perfect white in colour; because, of course, the (9) ____ is for ever shining on them. We are (10) _____ to live on the beautiful earth.

Test 9
The big ship began to move slowly out of the port. (1) ____ board were nine thousand soldiers, on their way hom from the battlefield. They (2) ____ already spent five uncomfortable weeks on the ship. Now, as the ship (3) ____ some fishing boats at the port entrance, the soldiers on deck waved to the fishermen. The fishermen waved (4) ____ calling out ”(5) ____ luck!”. Suddenly there was a cry, followed (6) ____ a splash. “Man overboard!” someone on the ship shouted. A bell began to (7) ____. A white lifebelt was thrown into the (8) ____. The ship sailed on, faster now. No doubt the man was picked (9) ____ by the fishermen. In wartime, a big ship cannot stop just (10) the sake of one man overboard.
Test 10
Early each morning Jack Dobbins left the house (1) ____ he lived and walked to a newsagent’s. He bought the, morning paper and then (2) ____ home again. One day in 1954 Jack did that as usual, except (3) ____ one thing: he did not return to the (4) ____. Mrs Dabbins missed (5) ____ husband, but she was a brave woman. She took a (6) ____ in a shop, working there full-time and earning enough money to live (7) ____. She (8) ____ a lot of new friends and found new inter­ests. Many years (9) _____, five, ten, twenty... Mrs Dobbins grew old. One morning in 1979 Jack came home. He held up the morning (10) _____ .“Not much news today,” he said to his wife.
Test 11
The Kemp family lived (1) ____ door to me. They were interesting and intelligent people, but they (2) ____ always getting into some sort of trouble. It was usually either illness (3) _____ accident, but there were other things too. Their house (4) ____ fire twice, and twice the whole family had to stay (5) ____ me while repairs were made. The Kemps were always losing things, important things (6) ____ money or keys. Pictures often fell off the (7) ____ in their house; the children often fell out of their (8) ____ at night. I used to wake (9) ____ in the mornings and think: “What strange thing will happen (10) ____ that family to­day?”
Test 12
While travelling abroad, Ed Jackson ran short of money. So he wrote to his brother, asking (1) ____ £500. “Send the money (2) ____ telegram to the bank here,” he wrote. After a week Ed began calling at the bank. He showed his passport (3) ____ the bank clerk. “Nothing has come for you, Mr Jackson,” he (4) ____ told. This went (5) ____ for three weeks, and Mr Jackson got very worried. He then phoned his brother, asking (6) ____ the money was. The brother said it (7) ____ been sent three weeks before. That evening Ed Jackson was arrested for failing to (8) ____ his hotel bill. He tried to explain his problem, but no one (9) ____ believe him. He was (10) ____ to prison for sixty days.
Test 13
Iceland has been called the “land of frost and fire.” This is a very satisfactory _____ (1), for the mountains on this island in the North Atlantic are capped with snow the year round, and ____ (2) are scores of fiery volcanoes. Contrary ____ (3) what most people think, how­ever, Iceland’s ____ (4) is not extremely cold. Most days are quite agreeable because ____ (5) the warm current of the Gulf Stream. ____ (6) the Vikings began to settle in Iceland in 874 AD, they found books and crosses that showed the Irish had ____ (7) been there. It is likely that the Irish and Scotch had come to Iceland about seventy years ____ (8) the Vikings arrived. These explorers, however, had made ____ (9) lasting settlements. The first real colonists were Scandinavians who came directly ____ (10) Norway, Sweden, and Denmark.
The people of Iceland have very high educational standards. It is said that ____ (11) books are sold in Iceland in relation to its population thanin any other country in tbe world.Since Iceland is adjacent to one of the ____ (12) important shipping routes ____ (13) the United States and England, ____ (14) became very ixniiortant during ____ (15) Second World War.
Test 14
The body of the average adult has instorage (1) ____ food to last for several weeks. It has enough water to last for several (2) ____. At any one time, however, the body has only enough oxygen stored in the (3) ____ to last for three or four minutes! Fortunately, it is (4) ____ difficult for us to acquire the oxygen we need. (5) ____ a rule, we need only to breathe in the (6) ____ around us for an adequate supply.
The amount of oxygen needed (7) ____ a person, at any one time depends upon his activities. As the activities of the body increase, the use of oxygen (8) ____ increases. He begins to breathe deeper and faster to bring (9) ____ oxygen into the lungs. More red cells are thrown into the bloodstream to aid ____ (10) carrynig the added sup­ply of oxygen. Blood ____ (11) the stomach and the intestines is transferred into the blood vessels of the muscles (12) ____ are at work. This blood, helps to transfer the added oxygen to the (13) ____ of body that need it.
If blood is taken from the stomach right after a (14) ____, digestion of food will be hampered. It is best, therefore, (15) ____ to exercise strenuously right after eating.
Test 15
A comet is a heavenly body ____ (1) a long tail. Comets orbit about the sun. At rare intervals acomet may be ____ (2) from earth, appearing as a streak of light ____ (3) travels swiftly across the heavens.
The head of a comet contains a more or less solid portion ____ (4) the nucleus. The comet’s tail, however, contains so ____ (5) solid matter that the earth or another planet could pass through it without any harm-ful effects. Even ____ (6) one of the largest comets were to strike the earth head on, we ____ (7) notice only a shower of meteors. These meteors are hot celestial bodies entering the ____ (8) of the earth at great speeds.
It is hard, therefore, for us to imagine that the head of a comet may be over a million miles wide ____ (9) that a comet’s tail may extend over one hundred million miles in ____ (10)!
In ancient times, the ____ (11) of a comet aroused great alarm among people. It was ____ (12) that a comet would be followed by some great misfortune. Such fear is not surprising. ____ (13) the benefi of scientific knowledge, our ancestors had no ____ (14) of knowing the natural causes of ____ (15) an object.
Test 16
Glitteriing gems called diamonds are among the most (1) ____ of human possessions. Through the ages (2) ____ have been a lasting evidence of wealth. Lands may lose their soil, buildings may be destroyed, stocks and bonds may become worthless, (3) ____ the value of diamonds remains relatively unchanged.
Diamonds are not of value only (4) ____ signs of wealth. In addition, the diamond is one of (5) ____ hardest, longest-wearing substances known to man. Because of (6) ____, it is very valuable for practical use. In fact, about three-fourths of the total annual supply of diamonds (7) ____ used in factories and machine shops.
A diamond on the ____ (8) of a cutting tool can cut through the hardest steel but (9) ____ a diamond can cut (10) ____ diamond. Because of their unusual (11) _____, diamonds are use to sharpen grinding wheels. They are placed on the tips of the grinding drills used to cut through tons of bed rocks. In scores of ____ (12) waye, diamonds are essential to turning the wheels ____ (13) modern machines.
About 41/2 tons of diamonds are mined annually. The vast diamond (14) ____of South Africa produce most of these diamonds, bul in recent years many diamonds (15) ____ also come from Brazil.
Test 17
According to an old (1) ____, in the early seventeenth century a Peruvian Indian was cured of a terrible fever (2) ____ eating the bark of the cinchona tree. Quinine, the drug (3) ____ can be extracted from cinchona bark, was (4) ____ widely used as medicine until 1816.
Quinine has proved invaluable to modern medicine. It is used in (5) ____ treatment of malaria, a (6) ____ transmitted by the anopheles mos­quito and common in the tropical (7) ____ of the world. Quinine prepa­rations are also used to help cure typhoid fever, rheumatic fever, and (8) ____ sicknesses.
The cinchona tree belongs to the evergreen family and, unlike most evergreens, (9) ____ very fragrant flowers. Cinchonas are native to South America, but are now (10) ____ in such other places as India, Ceylon, and Java.
(11) ____ cinchona trees do not reach full size for about eight years, the bark can be taken (12) _____ three-year-old trees. First the young trees are cut down. (13) ____ the bark is carefully stripped off, dried, and packed. It is sent to a factory (14) ____ it is ground into a brown powder. (15) ____ this powder, the quinine is extracted
Test 18
Linguists believe that early men used many gestures to communi­cate ____ (1) one another. This, it is thought, was man’s first form of ____ (2) and the only one he had ____ (3) a long period of time. Even today we use some sign language: for example we shake ____ (4) to indicate yes or no, we point and we wave...
The first spoken words may have been early man’s attempt to ____ (5) the sounds made by animals. Then he may have developed sounds of his ____ (6). Gradually, man may have repeated certain sounds so ____ (7) that they became familiar and understandable to others. Once spoken language had begun, perhaps man invented new ____ (8) as he needed them to express himself verbally ____ (9) to name new objects. In this way we can imagine language growing.
____ (10) using words, parents were able to teach them to their children. The children in turn probably made up new ____ (11). Each generation, therefore, in the development of language, knew more words than the generation ____ (12) it. Language is still growing and chang­ing. Can you think ____ (13) some words that you use today ____ (14) were not used by your parents or grandparents _____ (15) they were children?
Test 19
Last autumn I ____ (1) a week at a big hotel in London. It was one of those modern hotels where ____ (2) room is the same size and ____ (3) the same furniture, and looks just ____ (4) every other room. My room was 311 on the third ____ (5). One night, quite late, I got back to the hotel ____ (6) a very good dinner with some friends. I walked into the lift and ____ (7) the button. When the lift ____ (8), I got out and walked to my room—or what I ____ (9) was my room. ____ (10) I opened the door I saw an astonishing scene. A man was pointing a revolver ____ (11) a woman sitting in an armchair, and the woman was saying in a frightened ____ (12): “Please ____ (13) shoot me!” I turned round; ran along the corridor and ____ (14) the stairs - I daren’t wait for the lift - and found the night porter in the ball. “Quick,” I cried, “someone is ___ (15) murdered in my room.” [...].
Test 20
When you see a firefly flitting through the air on a dark summer ____ (1), you may wonder ____ (2) the source of its light. This light ____ (3) from a mineral called phosphorus, which is found in small amounts in the ____ (4) of the firefly. Phosjchorus is also found in the bodies of many ____ (5) of deep-sea fish. Sometimes ____ (6) a large number of these fish congregate near the surface of the ocean, their bodies illuminate an area that can be ____ (7) for long distances.
Phosphorus is also found in many parts of our bodies ____ (8) is essential to human life. In modern times, many vital uses have been found ____ (9) this mineral, Large amounts of phosphorus are uti­lized in medicines, in agriculture, and in manufacturing.
Perhaps ____ (10) most generally familiar ____ (11) to find phospho­rus is in the heads of matches. Because phosphorus burns violently ____ (12) low temperatures, the small amount of heat produced by the fric­tion of rubbing the head of a match ____ (13) a rough surface is suffi­cient to ____ (14) the phosphorus in the match head to burn. As the head of the match ignites, it lights the wood or paper that forms the ____ (15) of the match.
Test 21
The normal body temperature of a full-grown person measures 98.6 degrees on a Fahrenheit ____ (1). ____ (2) the body’s tempera­ture may vary above and ____ (3) this point, the variations are usu­ally quite small. A change inthe body’s temperature of more than ten ____ (4) either way would probably cause death.
The regulation of body temperature is adelicate and continuous proc­ess. In man and other warm-blooded ____ (5), temperature is auto­matically kept uniform ____ (6) normal conditions. In the body, heat is produced at all times, ____ (7) at varying rates of speed. The beat is carried by the blood to the skin surfaces ____ (8) there, it passes off into the air.
If the body becomes ____ (9) warm, the surface blood vessels be­come larger and carry more ____ (10). In this way, more heat can be ____ (11) to the surface of the skin and sent out of the body. In addi­tion, as the body becomes warmer, the sweat glands pour out perspira­tion which evaporates and helps ____ (12) the body.
These processes are reversed when the body becomes ____ (13). ____ (14) keep the body temperature from dropping far below, the normal, the surface blood vessels grow ____ (15) and perspiraion is cbecked.
Test 22
What will the aeroplane of the future look like? An increasing number of journeys are being made (1) _____ air, and the airlines are therefore demanding a new kind of plane (2) ____ help them cope with increasing passenger numbers (3) ____of the revolutionary new designs (4) ____ developed is a “flying wing”, which is short but very wide, in contrast (5) ____ most planes, which are long and narrow. It will be capable (6) ____ carrying 600-800 passengers. It will be built of an extremely light material, and together (7) ____ the unusual de­sign, this will improve perfofmance. The new aeroplane will be quieter and more comfortable (8) ____ existing planes. It will also cost.less to operate, and will therefore help to keep fares (9) ____ affordable levels.
Computers will play (10) ____ important role in this plane. They would be used (11) ____ the flight as (12) ____ as on ground: ground crews will simply plug their laptop computers into the flight computers to check all functions.
An additional advantage of this plane is (13) ____ no new runways or terminal buildings will have to be built for it, (14) ____ it is being designed in such a way that it can (15) ____ existing ones.
Test 23
Many stolen paintings have a strange history. But one of the strang­est was that of a painting by the famous sixteenth-century painter Bruegel, stolen from the Courtauid Institute in London in the Eighties. It had fallen (1) ____ the hands of four thieves in London, (2) ____ were trying to (3) ____ a quick profit. Until they showed the paint­ing to an art expert, (4) ____, they had no idea how much it was worth. One of (5) ____ said: “We got this old chap to come in and (6) ____ a look at the painting. He was talking about something, then turned (7) ____, saw the painting and fainted. So I thought it was probably valuable.”
Two months later, the gang telephoned (8) ____ art expert. This expert told them that the painting was worth £2-3 million. They imme­diately hung up. They then tried to sell the painting back to the gallery from (9) ____ it had been stolen. The gallery contacted the police and a meeting (10) ____ arranged. The gang asked (11) ____ the money to be brought in two suitcases in unmarked banknotes. (12) ____ the meetng did in fact take place, the deal fell through and no money changed hands.
A short (13) ____ later the four were arrested. The police found the painting on (14) ____ of a wardrobe. When the gang were told they were (15) ___ arrested in connection with the Bruegel, one of them gaid “What’e a Bruegel? I thought it was rubbish.”
Test 24
Television owes its origins to many inventors. But it was the single-minded determination of an amateur inventor, John Logie Baird, that led (1) ____ the first live television broadcast.
Born in Scotland in 1888 and educated in Glasgow, John Logie Baird earned a living (2) ____ a razor-blade aalesman. In the 1890s Guglielmo Marconi showed that sound could (3) ____ sent by radio waves. Baird became convinced that a similar system could transmit a picture. He spent most of (4) ____ spare time working on his ideas in his tiny work­shop without (5) ____ commercial support. He (6) ____ to use his (7) ____ earnings to continue his research. In 1924, Baird successfully transmitted the general outline of a figure over more (8) ____ 3 metres. He continued to experiment and (9) ____ October 26, 1925 transmit­ted a recognisable image of a doll. Heran (10) ____ to the office on the ground floor and persuaded one of the office boys to come upstairs. (11) ____ boy became the first living image transmitted by television. Overnight, Baird became famous and the money (12) ____ he needed to continue his research was at (13) ____ made available. In 1927 he made a transmission from London to Glasgow and in 1928 he made (14) ____ from London to New York. He continued experimenting ____ (15) spent his last years exploring the possibility of colour television.
Test 25
Today, there are libraries in almost every town in the world. Even in areas (1) ____ there are no libraries, there are often mobile li­braries which take books from one village to (2) ____. But in the days when books were copied by hand (3) ____ than printed, libraries were very rare. The reason is simple: books took a very (4) ____ time to produce, and there were far (5) ____ copies of any given work around. The greatest library (6) ____ all, that in Alexandria, had 54.000 books. In the ancient world, this number (7) ____ considered huge. It was the first time that anyone (8) ____ ever collected so many books from all around the world (9) ____ one roof. There are many theories about (10) ____ these books were lost. (11) ____ is that the library acciden­ tally burned down. Another is that one of the rulers of the city ordered the books to (12) ____ burned. They were taken to various places and it took six months to burn them. (13) ____ happened, the collection there was priceless. Many of the library’s treasures were lost foreversome books were (14) ____ recovered. We cannot even know (15) ____ exactly the library contained.
Test 26
Many people believe that watching television has resulted in lower reading standards in schools. (1) ____, the link between tel­evision and printed books is not as simple as that. In many (2) ____, television actually encourages people to read: for example, when a book is turned into a TV series, (3) ____ sales often go up.
One study of this link examined six-year-old children who (4) ____ viewing a special series of 15-minute programmes at school. The series was designed to encourage love of books, as (5) ____ as to develop the basic mechanical skills of reading. Each programme is ____ an animated film of a children’s book. The story is read aloud (6) ____ certain key phrases from the book appear on the screen, beneath the picture. When­ever a word is read, it is also highlighted on the TV screen.
One finding was (7) ____ watching these programmes was very important to the children. If anything prevented them (8) ____ seeing a programme, they were very disappointed. What’s more, they wanted to read the books (9) ____ the different parts of the series were based on.
The programmes also gave the children (10) ____ confidence when looking at these books. As a result of (11) ____ familiarity with the stories, they would sit in pairs and read the stories aloud to (12) ____ other. On (13) ____ occasion, the children showed great sympathy when discussing a character in a book because they themselves (14) _____ been moved when watching the character (15) ____ television.
Test 27
Harry Ramsden’s is a remarkable establishment in Yorkshire, in the North of England. It looks more like a cinema or fire station than a world-famous restaurant, and it (1) ____a symbol of a certain attitude (2) ____ food in the North of England.
The car park beside (3) ____ unique place has up to sixteen coaches in (4) ____ at any time. Numerous cars, too, (5) ____ every type, size and age, are also parked there. Outside the building, a queue stretches around the side. Those waiting to be seated appear rather anxious, (6) ____ if they are children waiting to go into a theme park. (7) ____ is a sense of excitement. Harry Ramsden’s is (8) ____ merely a restaurant: it is an event.
Inside the vast carpeted dining room, elegant glass lights illuminate tables (9) ____ are laid with simple blue-checked table cloths, ordinary plates, cups and saucers (10) ____ bottles of sauce. Everyone is there (11) ____ enjoy the favourite food of the area-fish and chips, cooked to perfection (12) ____ a unique environment. This simple meal has been served to film stars, politicians and miners alike.
Harry Ramsden’s is an English celebration of simple, value-for-money food, served stylishly and enjoyed (13) ____ all. More Harry Ramsden’s restaurants (14) ____ opened since the original one, (15) ____ in Britain and abroad.
Test 28
Vegetarians don’t eat any meat, fish or poultry, and they avoid foods with animal products in them. Some people avoid red meat but they include chicken and fish (1) ____ their diet. These are often people who recognize (2) ____ health benefits of a vegetarian diet, but who find they can’t (3) ____ up meat completely. This half-way posi­tion is sometimes taken by people who are making the change (4) ____ a completely vegetarian diet. Vegans go one step further (5) ____ other vegetarians, avoiding all foods of animal origin, such as dairy produce, eggs and honey.
Vegetarians are growing in number. (6) ____ estimated seven per-cent of British people are now vegetarians and there are a (7) ____ many others who only eat meet occasionally. In the (8) ____ few years, food manufacturers have expanded their vegetarian ranges, and it has (9) ____ a lot easier to choose an animal-free diet. Many restau­rants also now offer a wide variety (10) ____ vegetarian dishes.
People might choose a vegetarian diet (11) ____ moral or health reasons, (12) ____ both. Some vegetarians simply don’t like the idea of eating other creatures, and they may dislike the conditions in (13) ____ many animals are kept before (14) ____ killed for food. Others may have become vegetarians (15) ____ of the health benefits.
Test 29
Festivals in the Caribbean can be huge, colourful events that stretch the imagination. One of the biggest of these, the Trinidad Carni­val, consists of five days of non-stop parties and music competitions that end (1) ____ a costumed parade through the streets of the capital, Port of Spain.
The music at the carmval is calypso. Calypso is (2) ____ than just music for singing and dancing. An evening in a “calypso tent” will give you a course in Trinidadian politics and (3) ____ you know all about the island gossip. But (4) _____ the topic of the songs, calypso’s main function is (5) ____ entertain.
One of the most important parts of the carnival s the calypso com­petition. This is divided (6) ____ two sections. First of all, on the Sunday, the best song is judged. Ten finalists each sing two songs in front of (7) ____ crowd of 30.000. The singers all do (8) ____ best to give performances that will have the crowd shouting and screaming (9) ____ more, and the winner receives the highly-prized title of Calypso Monarch.
Then, on the Monday, there is the Roadmarch competition, (10) ____ the best dance tune is decided. Dancers in fantastic costumes spill out onto the streets (11) ____ their thousands at 4 a.m and dance in a parade with the calypso bands. This goes on (12) ____ the carnival ends the following night. The winner is the person (13) ____ tune is being played most often as the bands pass the place where the judges (14) ____ situated.
And the music has to be good, to keep as (15) ____ as haifa million people dancing non-stop for five days.
Test 30
Sometimes you just know things about people the first time you see them - for example that you want to be friends with them or that you don’t trust them. But perhaps this kind of intuition isn’t as hard to explain (1) ____ it may seem. For instance, everybody gives out body language signals (2) ____ the time. The (3) ____ you hold your body, head and arms tells people about your mood. If you hold your arms tightly at your sides (4) ____ fold them across your chest, people will generally feel that you (5) ____ being defensive. Holding your head on one side shows interest in the (6) ____ person, while (7) ____ relaxed, “open” posture indicates that you are self-confident. All this affects (8) ____ we feel about someone.
Also, a stranger may (9) ____ you of a previous meeting with some­one. This may be because of (10) ____ as simple as the fact that he or she is physically similar (11) someone who treated you well — or badly. But your reaction doesn’t (12) ____ to be the result of the memory of a person you previously met — your feelings about the stranger could (13) ____ influenced by a smell in the air that brings to mind a place (14) ____ you were happy as a child. Since even a single word can bring back a memory (15) ____ as that, you may never realise it is happening.
Test 31
Cans made of steel are very easy to remove from domestic rubbish because steel is the only common metal that is attracted to mag­nets. Many waste removal authbrities have (1) ____ advantage of this fact and have installed large magnets, which, (2) ____ put it simply, pull all steel containers out of the general household rubbish. The sys­tem is known (3) ____ “magnetic extraction” and it has two great advantages.
Firstly, unlike most recycling schemes, the recycling (4) ____ steel cans through “magnetic extraction” requires almost (5) ____ effort from the public. As long as you throw your used steel can into the rubbish bin, it will be collected (6) ____ then the waste removal authority will (7) ____ the rest. Other packaging cannot be recycled (8) ____ the public collect the material and take (9) ____, usually by car, to a central collection point. This often uses up more energy in petrol than (10) ____ eventually saved by recycling the material.
Secondly, local authorities actually save public money (11) ____ recovering used steel cans. Magnetic extraction equipment is simple and cheap, and the steel that has (12) ____ saved is sold to companies who re-use it (13) ____ making’ new steel products. (14) ____ the value of the metal is greater than the cost of magnetic extraction, the process has financial benefits.
So, magnetic recycling of steel cans from waste saves your time, ef­fort and money, as (15) ____ as saving energy for us all.
Test 32
For anyone who wants either to film or study great white sharlw, Australian expert, Rodney Fox, is the first contact. Fox knows ex­actly ____ (1) the sharks will be at different times of the year; and can even predict ____ (2) they will behave around blood, divers and other sharks. He understands them as well as ____ (3) else alive. .In fact, he’s lucky to be alive; a “great white” once ____ (4) to bite him in half.
Three decades ____ (5) this near-fatal attack, Fox still carries the physical scars, but feels ____ (6) hate for his attacker. Instead he organises three or four trips ____ (7) year to bring scientists and photographers to the kingdom of the great white shark ____ (8) main aim of these trips is to improve people’s understanding of an animal ____ (9) evil reputation has become an excuse for killing it.
Great while sharks are not as amusing as dolphins and seals, ____ (10) their role in the ocean is critical. They kill off sick animals, helping to prevent the spread ____ (11) disease and to maintain the balance in the ocean’s food chains. Fox feels a responsibility to act ____ (12) a guardian of great white sharks ____ (13) the scientists, film makers and photographers can communicate their sense of wonder ____ (14) other people, he is confident that understanding ____ (15) replace hatred.
Test 38
There is little doubt that one of the chief roles of the horse in art, just ____ (1) in life, is that of our servant and companion. We can have very little idea of ____ (2) a horse feels in its natural state. Left to itself; ____ (3) is unlikely that it would pull a plough, take a soldier ____(4) a dangerous Situation in battle ____ (5) do most of the other things that have attracted painters and writers to the animal ever _____ (6) the dawn of history.
The horse is controlled ____ (7) the wishes of its owner. When we describe it, we say it has ____ (8) virtues and qualities we most admire in ourselves and it is as the symbol ____ (9) these qualities that it has so often ____ (10) praised by painters and poets. Then we must consider the horse’s own beauty, speed and strength ____ (11) truth, the picture, we ____ (12) most frequeptly moved by, in both art and literature, is actually a single image that combines all the advantages of the animal and its rider, An outstanding example of ____ (13) is provided by the school of sculpture and painting in ____ (14) the authority and personality of individuals is emphasised by the ____ (15) that they are on horseback.
Test 34
Taking a corner is one of the most satisfying moves you can make on I a bike. It’s fun, it’s exciting, and it also happens ____ (1) be one of the hardest things to learn. Even ____ (2) experienced rider can always ____ (3) improvements in this area. Good cornering is a abil­ity to cycle through a turn ____ (4) full control, no matter ____ (5) the conditions. This might mean racing ____ (6) high speed down a winding descent, but just ____ (7) important is the ability to deal with a slow, sharp turn ____ (8) you are touring with lots of luggage. In ____ (9) these cases there are some general points to remember.
When going very slowly you can steer through a corner using your hands on the handlebars ____ (10), as speed increases, any sudden turning of the front wheel ____ (11) likely to result in loss of control. To avoid ____ (12) effect, a bike must be turned by leaning it, by steer­ing with the body instead of the hands. On sharp turns of more ____ (13) about 70 degrees, even this is ____ (14) enough: you must also lower your body towards the bike as much as you ____ (15) to help keep it from slipping out from under you. When you are cornering correctly you will feel very solid. It’s a good feeling - exciting but not really dangerous.
Test 35
Bodies are made to move! They are not designed for sitting around in front of the television or reading magazines. Keeping fit doesn’t ____ (1) you have to be a super-athlete, and even a ____ (2) exercise can give you a lot of fun. When you’re fit and healthy, you’ll find you look better and feel better. You’ll ____ (3) more energy and self-confidence.
Every time you move you ____ (4) exercising. The human body is designed to bend, stretch, run, jump and climb. The ____ (5) it does; the stronger and fitter it will become. Beet of ____ (6), exercise is fun. It’s ____ (7) your body likes doing most - keeping on the, move.
Physical exercise is not only good ____ (8) your body. People who take regular exercise are usually happier, more relaxed and more alert ____ (9) people who sit around all day. Try an experiment — next time you’re ____ (10) a bad mood, go for a walk or play a ball game in the park. See how ____ (11) better you feel after an hour.
A sense of achievement is yet ____ (12) benefit of exercise. People feel good ____ (13) themselves when they know they have improved ____ (14) fitness. People who exercise regularly will ____ (15) you that they find they have more energy to enjoy life. So have a go—you’ll soon see and feel the benefits!
Test 36 Science fiction films and books are full of robots that look, and even think, exactly like humane. Some people believe it will not be long ____ (1) such machines become a reality. However, most advanced, electronic machines still look ____ (2) like people. These machines can not yet think in the same way ____ (3) a person; some say they never ____ (4). But they are able to make decisions and solve problems. An, airliner’s automatic pilot, for example, can control ____ (5) plane, even during take-off and landing.
Computers issue detailed instructions in order ____ (6) control the way robots act. The simplest robots just follow a set ____ (7) instructions and repeat the same movements again and again. Many factories rely ____ (8) such robots to carry out the sort of tasks that a human worker ____ (9) certainly fijid very boring and they can do many jobs more rapidly and with great accuracy. Very advanced robots have sen­sod with ____ (10) they can collect information ____ (11) their surroundings. These robots can move ____ (12) place to place, using tiny television cameras to find ____ (13) way.
Many scientists are convinced that robots will soon be intelligent ____ (14) to explore other planets more effectively ____ (15) humans.
Test 37 Where do you start if you want to write a successful story? Clearly, what you need first of ____ (1) is an idea which you can develop into a strong plot. But ____ (2) do ideas like this come from? The ____ (3) is “anywhere and everywhere”. They may come from some­thing that has ____ (4) to you or to ____ (5) else, from a newspaper, an interesting picture, or even a song. It is a good idea to keep a notebook nearby ____ (6) that you can write down the details or any odd incidents _____ (7) catch your imagination. Make a note of ideas ____ (8) titles too, and any special phrases or descriptions that you think of. A small tape recorder can ____ (9) useful for this purpose. Some writers even keep ____ (10) by their bed in ____ (11) they wake up with the “idea of the century”.
Another method of developing the story is to make use ____ (12) the characters tbemselvea Why not ____ (13) putting three people you know well into a situation such as a wedding, where feelings may be very strong, and see ____ (14) happens. But don’t make the final characters too much like your Aunt Jane or Uncle Jim or you may find ____ (15) in real trouble.
Test 38
A family portrait is a valuable picture — it is fun to look at now, it’s great for relatives far ____ (1), and it will bring back memores in the years to come. Families change quickly as children grow, ____ (2) don’t wait, whatever your position in the family — photograph your family group now, and plan to make this ____ (3) regular event. Your family album isn’t really complete ____ (4) this record of all of you together.
Getting the____ (5) of the family together isn’t always easy, and so you will need to plan ahead to be sure ____ (6) has time to pose. A relaxed, friendly feeling is ____ (7) makes the picture, and you can’t expect people to relax ____ (8) they’re in a hurry to do ____ (9) else. Make your plans when you’re all together and ____ (10) a cheer­ful, friendly mood — say, during a meal, and set a tine convenient _____ (11) everyone.
A family portrait takes some technical planning, too. Make ____ (12) your mind in advance ____ (13) room you want to use; choose your camera position and check the lighting. If you want to be in the picture, make sure you know exactly ____ (14) the self-timer on your camera operates. With most cameras, you’ll have from eight _____ (15) twelve seconds to get into the picture after you press the shutter button.
Test 39 In the front room of their home, the Henry family gathered around eir TV set ____(1) a popular soap opera began. “Look, there’s Mum!” shouted 11-year-old Kathy, pointing ____ (2) the screen. “She’s sitting at that table ____ (3) the corner.” Sure enough, there was Julia Henry, enjoying a relaxed drink in ____ (4) of the country’s most famous TV programmes.
Julia’s family see ____ (5) unusual in her job ____ (6) a “bit-part” actor, or “extra”, because they are all doing it. Her husband, Tony, ____ (7) been in several drama series as ____ (8) as numerous adverts, while Kathy and her 13-year-old brother, Robin. have also ap peared ____ (9) TV countless times.
It all started four years ____ (10) when Tony, an amateur actor from Lancashire, decided to leave his job and take ____ (11) acting profes­sionally. At the age of 41, it was a big step to take, but he has ____ (12) regrets about it at all. Soon the whole family were being offered chances to play small parts just like him, though Tony admits there are times when he wishes he ____ (13) a star. “We really enjoy our lives,” says Tony, “although it is difficult to ____ (14) plans. A couple of phone calls can turn our week upside down, but we love ____ (15) minute of it!”
Test 40
Ice from the Rocky Mountains in the United States is being exported to countries on the other ____ (1) of the world. From Seattle to Tokyo ____ (2) seem a long way to send ice, but the idea is certainly not new ____ (3) early as 1833, Frederick Tudor ____ (4) as the “Ice King”, sent a shipload of ice from America to India. About half ____ (5) ice melted during the long journey, but Tudor would have ____ (6) a profit even ____ (7) he had lost three quarters of his cargo.
Most people think ____ (8) ice as rather short-lived but, when it was cut from frozen lakes in huge blocks and stored in the depths of a sailing ship ____ (9) life was considerably extended. In Britain in the 1840s ____ (10) was already a local commercial ice trade, but the im­port of ice, first from America and then from Norway ____ (11) about a revolution in the food business. The main port of entry for Norwegian ice was London, from ____ (12) the firm of Carlo Gatti, the largest dealers, distributed ice around the country. It was Gatti ____ (13) introduced the penny ice-cream in the 1850s ____ (14) then, ice-cream had been a luxury, but the penny ice, served in Gatti’s cafes, became a Victorian fashion and brought hundreds of ltalian ice-cream sellers ____ (15) the streets of the capital.
Test 41 The Amercans are keen to win the race to send human beings to Mars. In 1992, the new boss of NASA*, Dan Goldin, called on the American people to be the first to send explorers to ____ (1) planet in the solar system. He reminded them ____ (2) the symbolic gift car­ried to the moon and back by the Apollo 11 mission. It bears ____(3) message intended for the crew of the first space ship to visit Mars, Goldin thinks _____(4) is time to begin the preparations ____ (5) this his­toric journey. His speech echoed the words of the President ____ (6) promised that in 2019, 50 years after Neil Armstrong ____ (7) the first man to set foot on the Moon, the first astronaut ____(8) stand on Mars.
____(9) the end of the twentieth century, various tinmanned space­ships will ____(10) thoroughly investigated the surface of the planet. But, however clever a robot ____ (11) be, it cannot match the type of information ____ (12) can be gained from direct human experience. The first geologist on the moon, Harrison Schmitt, was ____ (13) of interpreting the story of the landscape on the spot. _____(14) humans walk on the red deserts of Mars, we will net he able to determine the history of this fiozen world ____ (15) any detcil.
* The North Atrierican Space Agency
Test 42
I have always founn it difficult to say ____ (1) certairx what my memo­ries from my ____ (2) childhood are. Are ____ (3) memories learnt at a letter age from overhearing our parents tell of our exploits? ____ (4), there is a particular incident that I would love to claim as a genuine memory.
When I was ____ (5) three years old, I went to tbe post office with my mother ____ (6) she was going to buy some stamps. While she was ____ (7) served, I happened to notice a small stocking ____ (8) was hanging from the counter. It was there ____ (9) collect contributions for a charity for ____ (10) blind. While ____ (11) back was turned, I took the stocking and emptied ____(12) contents into my coat pocket. Of course, I was ____ (13) young to know any better. When it was realized what I ____ (14) done, everybody roared with laughter ____(15), that is, for my mother who was a little embarrassed. She ____(16) emptied the money back into the stocking ____ (17), incidentally, a few pennies of my ____(18). One of the clerks was something of an amateur cartoonist and he _____(19) a drawing of me robbing an old lady. This cartoon ____ (20) displayed in the post office for the next couple of years.
Test 43
When people are asked why they choose ____ (1) live in big cit­ies, most of them usually talk about the variety of entertainment to be ____ (2) there. But I wonder how____(3) of them actually feel like ____ (4) to the theatre or a concert after a hard day ____ (5) the office and a crowded ride home on the Underground. And how many of them visit the famous galleries and museums other than ____ (6) they’re caught in the rain without an umbrella?
Meanwhile, those tourists ____ (7) make shopping and travel ____ (8) the centre of town so difficult in the summer months, are visiting the sights which the inhabitants are so proud of, but don’t quite have the time ____ (9) see. It was only ____ (10) moving to the country that I realised how to enjoy my free time. Living there ____ (11) me aware that legs are not intended simply to ____ (12) you _____(13) your front door to your car! Evenings are filled ____ (14) little more ____(15) a leisurely drink with friends who’d ____(16) talk about darts than discotheques. Of course, there are days when I’m tempted ____ (17) the entertainment page of the national newspaper to go up ____ (18) town, but when you have to take the dog ____ (19) a walk across the fields, talk to the postman, and see the amateur dramatic society’s latest production, you’re far ____ (20) busy to find the time!
Test 44
Most ghost stories are set in mysterious, old houses ____ (1) castles. The ghosts themselves ____ (2) spirits wander the earth at night, are usually the ____ (3) of some horrible crime. This is not always the case as the ____ (4) story shows.
When my friend, Paul, was a schoolboy, he often ____ (5) to chat to Mr Scott, an elderly gentleman ____ (6) on his own. Mr Scott was a keen gardener. He ____ (7) always be looking after his lawn or his flowers and Paul was ____ (6) the habit of saying a few words to him over ____ (9) fence.
____(10) summer’s evening, as Paul was ____ (11) his way home from school, he saw, as usual, Mr Scott in his garden. The old man was busily weeding his ____ (12) beds. When he saw Paul, he invited him into the garden with a wave of his hand. Slowly, they strolled ____ (13) round, admiring the variops flowers. Then, to Paul’s sur­prise, Mr Scott bent ____ (14) and picked a bunch of his finest dahlias. “Here boy,” he said. “Give these to your mother.”
No ____ (15) had he arrived home than he presented the flowers to his mother. He then told her that they were with Mr Scott’s compli­ments. His mother’s face went red ____ (16) anger.” ____ (17) wicked boy!” she shouted. “How _____(18) you say such a thing! I bumped _____ (19) his daughter in the supermarket this morning. She told me the poor old chap had passed ____ (20) in his sleep last Friday.”
Test 45
This chapel, which is set in the grounds of King’s College, is ____ (1) question the ____ (2) beautiful building in Cambridge. It is ____ (3) five hundred years old and is a magnificent ____ (4) of late medieval architecture.
It was _____(5) by King Henry VI in 1446, but was not completed until the _____(6) century. This probably explains ____ (7) use of different types stone in ____ (8) construction. The exterior is an elegant combination of stone and glass. We ____ (9) best admire its beautiful stained-glass windows ____ (10) the inside. It took crafts­men from Belgium over 30 years to put ____ (11) in.
We can _____ (12) see The Adoration of the Magi, an imposingpainting ____(13) the artist, Paul Rubens, ____ (14) was given to the chapel in 1961. The painting ____ (15) the three wise men with the baby Jesus in the stable at Bethlehem. The chapel is also famous ____ (16) its choir of boy singers ____ (17) the regular recitals it gives. ____ (18) Christmas, people ____ (19) for hours to get a seat for the carol concert which ____ (20) broadcast all over the world.
Test 46
King Arthur is ____ (1) of the most famous kings of England but e may never _____ (2) existed. Many stories are told ____ (3) his life, and the_____(4) known one tells of the way be became king. It is ____ (5) that lie ____ (6) taken away from his father, the King, as a baby in ____ (7) to save him ____ (8) the King’s enemies. He was ____ (9) up as an ordinary child ____ (10) Arthur was still a young man, his father died. Nobody knew he had ____ (11) a son, and the country ____ (12) a new king. One day a huge stone ____ (13) a sword ____ (14) it magically appeared in a churchyard. On the stone were the ____ (15): “Whoever pulls this sword out of this stone ____ (16) the trueborn King of England.” Many men ____ (17) to pull the sword out, but ____ (18) of them succeeded. A few days ____ (19), Arthur, who was looking ____ (20) a sword for his brother, saw the sword in the stone and simply pulled it out.
Test 47
One cold winter’s evening, Carlo, an old friend of mine, was driving past ____(1) of the huge cemeteries ____ (2) outside Rome. It was freezing cold and he ____ (3) to notice a young girl hitchhiking by the ____ (4) of the road ____ (5) though it was winter, she was just wearing a thin dress.
Carlo pulled up and ____ (6) the passenger door to let her in. Her lips were blue with cold so he gave her the jacket he was ____ (7) to put over her shoulders. After a few moments’____ (8), he asked her ____ (9) she wanted to go and she whispered her instructions. He glanced at her and noticed ____ (10) the first time that she was ex­tremely beautiful. She had a delicate pale face ____ (11) long blonde hair and large green eyes. He ____(12) what she had been doing standing by the side of the road _____(13) guessed that she looked so sad ____ (14) she must have had a row with her boyfriend who had left her there.
They ____ (15) on in silence, the girl making little gestures to show him which route to take. They finally turned ____ (16) a narrow street in an old part of town. As soon as the girl got out, she took off the ____(11) and held it out to Carlo. Carlo refused to take it because she ____ (18) looked cold and he wanted an excuse to see her ____ (19). She smiled mysteriously and disappeared through a dark doorway, ____ (20) saying a word...
Test 48
It was a cold night. The train ____ (1) through some very lonely I countryside. There was ____ (2) sign of human life and the station at Brest seemed ____ (3) an oasis. The passengers ____ (4) advised to get ____ (5) the tram because they were going to be there ____ (6) a long time. The customs officers had to ____ (7) their duty, searching the entire train looking mainly ____ (8) illegal literature. They ____ (9) quite a lot, including some interesting magazines to ____ (10) home to their families ____ (11) this was happening, the train moved away from the platform to ____ (12) its wheels changed. It ____ (13) lifted up and swung over on to ____ (14) wider set of wheels. But the passengers in the station did not know ___ (15) this. To them it was a long, unnecessary wait, ____(16) worse by the fact ____(17) their luggage disappeared with the train for at _____(18) an hour. If they bad_____(19) given a better explanation of what was going on, they ____(20) have been in a better mood.
Test 49
Many years ago people believed tbat all ____ (1) the heavenly bodies moved around the earth ____ (2) we watch the sun rise and set and the stars move across the sky, it is easy to see ____ (8) the ancient people believed ____ (4) they did.
Today, we know that the earth ____ (5) many of the other heavenly bodies move around the sun. The sun and all of the heavenly bodies ____ (6) move around it, make up the solar system. Since we owe almost everything we have on this earth to the sun, it is really the most ____ (7) member of the solar system.
_____ (8) the sun’s light, this would be a dark and gloomy world. Day and night have become_____(9) a habit with us that it is hard to imagine living without _____(10). Our plants need light to make their food. We need light for our health, work and play. A small amount of light comes to us from other stare ____ (11) the sun, but this light alone would not be ____ (12) for living things to grow.
The sun gives us heat as ____ (13) as light. If for any reason the sun should stop _____(14), all living things would soon be frozen. Even coal fires would _____(15) give enough heat to keep us warm. Within a short time all the lakes, rivers and oceans would be covered with ____ (16). Within a ____ (17) weeks the oceans would be frozen all the way to the ____ (18). The air around the earth would first change _____ (19) a liquid and cover the earth’s surface. Then, even this liquid air would freeze and become solid. The temperature would soon ____(20) to 465 degrees below zero Fahrenheit.
Test 50
When they get ____ (1), most animals move about and search for food. They fly, crawl, swim, hop, walk or run. Some animals are ____(2) to move about and therefore must wait for food to come to them. If an animal ____ (3) get food, it will die.
Most plants cannot move about to search for food. They cannot fly, crawl, swim, hop, walk or run. Their ____ (4) hold them firmly in the soil. Yet they are ____ (5) to keep growing and seem to have plenty of food.
For a long time people believed that plants ____ (6) only soil for food. A _____(7) thoughtful people noticed that plants ____ (8) grew in pots did not seem to use up the soil. No matter ____ (9) large such plants became, the amount of soil in the pots remained about the ____ (10). This was very puzzling.
At last a man thought of an experiment to find out ____ (11) plants use soil for food. He placed a pot of soil in the oven. He heated it until the water was driven off and the soil was very ____ (12). Then he weighed the pot of soil very carefully and wrote down its exact ____ (13). Next he ____ (14) some seeds in the soil, and gave them plenty of water. When the seeds had ____ (15) into large plants, he removed these plants, roots and all, ____ (16) the pot. He ____(17) the pot of soil again and weighed it. It weighed only a very little less than it _____(18) before. The plants had gained a great ____(19) in weight, but the soil had ____(20) only a very little in weight.
Test 51
One of the most famous and extraordinary cases of contact with ____ (1) dead was the so-called Chaffin Will affair. In 1921 _____ (2) certain James Chaffln died _____(3) his entire fortune to his third son, Marshall, in a will which had been written a full 15 years ____ (4) in 1905 and signed in front of witnesses ____ (5) wife and two other Sons were virtually cut off ____ (6) a penny. Marshall was not inclined to split up the inheritance he had come into any more fairly. Four years went ____(7) and then, strangely, James Chaffin’s ghost started to ____(8) before one of his other two sons. The apparition had on an old overcoat which Chaffin had often ____ (9) in life. On the ghost of Chaffin’s second visit ____ (10) his son, he told him that he would ____ (11) a will in the overcoat pocket. The coat was actually ____(12) the possession of the third brother. Once it was found, they came _____(13) a note sewn in the lining of one of the ____ (14) saying they should look in an old family bible. This bible was found in the keeping of Chaffin’ widow and examined, in front of independent witnesses. Sure ____ (15), there in the bible they ____ (16) a later version of the will, one ____(17) divided the property and money up evenly ____ (18) the widow and the ____ (19) sons. The will appeared to be genuine and Marshall was ____ (20) prepared to challenge it in court.
Test 52
Six years ago, when I was a student, I was short of money. So once a week I___(1) to go home to see my parents and get a decent meal. Although I bad a good relationship with my mother, I never got ____ (2) well with my father. I could never live up to ____ (3) high expectations of me.
One day I did a _____(4) terrible thing. I stole some money from him. I ____(6) lend me ten pounds. He refused saying he bad ____ (7) given me enough and it was____(8) I became more responsible with money. You know what it is like ____ (9) a student. I’d run out of money and wanted to take a girl out. When he refused, I ____ (10) him of being mean and we had a terrible row. He left the house and I was ____ (11) angry that I stole ten pounds from his wallet.
When he found out that the money was gone, he ____ (12) who had _____(13) it and banned inc from the house ____ (14) then I have returned but he has never really forgiven me and still looks down on me for ____ (15) I did.
My mother is very upset and I really,____(16) to work towards creating a happy relationship with my father for ____ (17) our sakes. Half of me wants to say “sorry Dad” while ____ (18) other half still thinks be is ridiculous ____(19) having kept this attitude up for so long. How can I bridge ____ (20) endless misunderstafldiflg?
Test 53
Sam is a puppy belonging to pub landlord, Steve Lock. A short time ___(1) Steve’s friend John ____ (2) helping to lay a carpet when he slipped and chopped ____(3) the top of his finger ____(4) a knife. The horrified landlord picked ____(5) the piece of finger and put it on the table ____ (6) he bandaged his friend’s bleeding wound. They had ____ (7) that they could have the finger stitched ____ (8) on when they got to hospital. ____ (9), Sam-the puppy had other ideas. The dog waited until the two men were ____ (10) of the room and then jumped _____(11) the table and ate the finger. Fortunately, ____ (12) to pub landlord Steve, his friend John ____(13) the funny side ____(14) the story. John says that the finger ____(15) hurts a little but that it should be all right ____(16) the end even if it is a little flat on _____(17). He is keeping his eye _____(18) Sam to make _____ (19) that be doesn’t come hack for a ____ (20) helping.
Test 54
My father waved me good-bye and the bus set off. The person sit­ting ____ (1) to me was a government engineer going to Peshawar ____ (2) inspect the roads. He said that travelling by bus was ____ (3) excellent way to test the roads.
We passed many villages ____ (4) the way and stopped once or ____(5) to buy cold drinks, ____ (6) it was very hot and dusty. The countryside was brown and dry and ____ (7) were long stretches ____ (8) no people or villages in sight. We ____ (9) to stop once at some road works, too ____ (10) made my travelling cornpamon____ (11) happy.
Most of the ____ (12) were dazing in the afternoon heat when we were waken by a sudden noise, which ____ (13) like a shot from a gun. As the bus swerved and then stopped at the side of the road, I remembered all the stories I ____ (14) heard about bands of robbers who used to attack travellers on deserted roads _____(15) this. Many of the other passengers looked as bewildered and frightened as I ____(16) have looked.
My neighbour, however, reassured me: “Nothing to worry ____(17). Only a burst tyre. But we shall have to wait ____(18) he changes the wheel.”
My cousin Anwar met me at the bus station. “Well, there you ____(19),” he said. “ I was beginning to wonder what had ____ (20) to you.”
Test 55
When my mother finally became too old to live alone, we decided that she should stay with us ____ (1) town. I was surprised ____ (2) the amount of furniture she had, but there was no ____ (3) in our flat to store it, so we had to leave it in her house. I always intended to dear it out and sell the place, but somehow I kept putting it ____ (4).
____ (5) night I woke suddenly ____ (6) four o’clock, almost in tears. I was extremely upset_____(7) a dream in which I saw two men _____(8) a window, climb ____(9) my mother’s house, and start to take her belongings. Then the burglars must have heard someone’s voice outside or a door ____ (10) closed, because they dropped ____ (11) they were carrying and left in a hurry. The dream ____(12) me feel very guilty that I had not taken better care of the house.
Later ____ (13) that morning I received a phone call ____ (14) a lady who lived next door to the house. ____(15) my astonishment, she told me that it had ____(16) broken into during the night. Fortu­nately, something ____(17) have disturbed the burglars because they left ____ (18) taking anything. I didn’t _____(19) to believe ____ (20) the supernatural, but now I’m not so sure!
Test 56
Ask most people ____ (1) is happening ____ (2) the world’s population and they are likely to say ____ (3) is exploding. Ask them ____ (4) there will be enough food next century and they will say no. Ask them ____ (5) the world’s energy supplies and they will say they are running ____ (6) and we will ____ (7) be sitting in the dark and cold next century. Ask them what they think about ____ (8) materials and they will say we are using ____ (9) up at a rate ____ (10) will mean there are none ____ (11) for our grandchildren.
These statements have two things ____ (12) common. They are too gloomy, if _____(13) about this century_____(14) the next. And they are all wrong. Or so____(15) is persuasively argued in a book ____ (16) tries to chart our future over the next quarter century. ____ (17) of the attention the hook ____ (18) received so far has concen­trated ____ (19) its forecasts for Britain and the prospect ____(20) five million unemployed.
Test 57
Throughout the ages, the (1) ____ of the earth has been built up in some places and worn down in other places. The wearing down of the land is called erosion.
Wind, water, air, ice and heat all help to (2) ____ erosion. As the wind (3) ____ over the land, it often picks up small grams of sand. When these grains of send strike (4) ____ solid rocks, the rocks are slowly worn away. Later; the wind may pick up these new rock particles, and with them wear away other rocks. In this way even very (5) ____ rocks are worn away by the wind.
When articles of rock or soil become loosened in any way, running (6)_____carries them down the hillsides. Some rock and soil particles are carried into streams. The streams may then carry them into rivers, and the rivers may carry them into the (7)____
Land that is (8) ____ with trees, grass and other plants wears away very slowly, and so (9) ____ very little of its soil. The (10) ____ of plants help to hold the rocks and soil in place. When ran falls in a forest, the leaves of the trees and the soft soil beneath them are able to hold a great deal of (11) ____. Water that falls on grasslands runs away more slowly than does water that falls on (12) ____ ground. Water that flows slowly carries (13) ____ soil particles than water that flows rapidly. Thus, forests and grasslands help to (14) ____ down erosion.
Even (15) ____ the land is thickly covered with plants, some ero­sion goes on. Sometimes there is a long period of rainy (16) ____. In the spring the (17) ____ snow turns to large quantities of water. At these times the soil cannot (18) ____ all the water. It then runs down bill in streams. As the streams carry away some of the soil, the stream (19)_____gets deeper and deeper. After thousands of years of such (20)_____, wide valleys are often formed.
Test 58
One day Tom and Peter decided to climb down to explore some caves near the sea. They set ____ (1) early in the morning ____ (2) a length of rope and ____ (3) food for twenty-four hours. Reaching the cliff they fastened the rope to a ____(4) trunk and Peter began to lower ____ (5) over the edge. Half-way ____ (6) he noticed the first of the caves and stopped on a ledge in front of it. When Tom joined him they ____(7) the cave together. Inside it was very ____ (8) and they waited a moment for their eyes to become adjusted. Looking ____ (9) they gradually made out some dim shapes at the back of the cave. Feehing excited and a little frightened they___(10) moved forward. Ap­proaching the first shape Tom stretched out his hand and touched it.
It was curiously soft, warm, but with something hard inside ____ (11) he realised ____ (12) it was and, with a cry of terror, jumped back. “Quick,” he shouted,“ ____(13) get out of here before it’s ____ (14) late.” They turned and ran as fast as they ____(15) to the rope ____ (16) outside. Grabbing it, Tom began to climb but almost immediately the rope broke and he fell back on to the ledge ____ (17) Peter.
They stared at each ____ (18) in horror. They were trapped! At_____(19) moment they heard the sound of the creature inside begin­ning to move slowly_____(20) them.
Test 59
Almost ____ (1) a year ago, in a small village in Northern India, Andrea Milliner was ____ (2) on the leg by a dog. “It must have fancied your nice white flesh,” joked the doctor____(3) he dressed the wound. Andrea and her husband Nigel were ____(4) not to let ____ (5) spoil their holiday, and thought no more ____ (6) the dog, which had meanwhile disappeared from the ____ (7).
“We didn’t realise there was ____ (8) wrong with it,” says Nigel. “It was such a small, likeable dog that rabies ____ (9) enter my mind.” ____ (10), six weeks later, 23-year-old Andrea was dead. The dog had been rabid. No one had thought it _____(11) to give her anti-rabies treatment. When, back home in England, she began to _____(12) the classic symptoms-unable to drink, catching her breath-her own doc­tor put it ____(13) to hysteria. Even when she was loaded into an ambulance, hallucinating, recoiling in terror at ____ (14) sight of water, she was directed _____(15) the nearest mental hospital.
But ____ (16) her symptoms received little attention in life, in death they achieved a publicity close to hysteria. Cases ____ (17) Andrea are rare, but rabies is still one of the most feared diseases____(18) to man. The disease is transmitted by a bite _____(19) a lick from an infected animal. It can, in very ____ (20) circumstances, be inhaled-two scientists died of it after inhaling bat dung in a cave in Texas.
Test 60
He came to the cafe every day at four o’clock, sat down ____ (1) the same corner table, and ordered black coffee and ____ (2) bacon sandwich. No one knew who he was, and no one ____ (3) asked. We ____ (4) him “Topper” because ____ (5) the hat he always ____ (6) but his ____ (7) name, as we discovered later, was Jamieson. He looked ____ (8) a painter, or a musician ____ (9) had known better days. He was obviously ____ (10) a rich man, but his old clothes were el­egant. He had a neat grey moustache ____ (11) curled up at the ends, and his brown _____(12) were kind. He was always alone.
And then, one autumn day, he was joined by a young woman. “Topper _____(13) to be very anxious and drank several ____ (14) of black coffee. Suddenly, he got _____(15) and walked out of the cafe, leaving his companion to pay the ____ (16). We never saw him ____ (17). A few days later, ____ (18) police were asking questions ____ (19) a man wearing a grey tophat. Apparently he had shot his wife. We were shocked and puzzled, because he didn’t look ____(20) if he could hurt a fly.
Test 61
For a fortnight each summer, we ____ (1) to rent the same house by the sea. The house____(2) owner worked with my uncle, was on a cliff top overlooking _____(3) Channel. ____ (4) it was only a couple of hours’ drive away ____(5) our house, our preparations ____(6) have done justice to a polar expedition. Suitcases were ____ (7) down from the attic and filled with clothes for ____ (8) kinds of weather ____ (9), all these things would find ____ (10) pushed into the boot ____ (11) extra was placed ____ (12) the seats. ____ (13) everyone had climbed into the car, there was just a ____ (14) space for me between my mother and grandmother. On the way, three ____ (15) always happened: we would stop at a pub to please my grandfather, we would eat an ____ (16) picnic, and I would ____ (17) car sick ____ (18) experiences probably help ____ (19) explain why I always insist ____ (20) travelling light, preferably by train.
Test 62
British parents are always complaining that their children spend too much time glued to the telly and not enough time ____ (1) other activities ____ (2) sports and readings. A survey recently carried out on people’s viewing habits ____ (3) not disapprove it. It shows that young people in Britain spend on ____ (4) 23 hours a week in front of the television, ____ (5) works out at over three hours every day.
____(6) is surprising, however, is the fact that the average adult watches _____(7) more: an incredible 28 hours a week. We ____(8) to have become a nation of addicts. Just about____ (9) household in the country has a television and _____(10) half have two or more ____(11) to the survey, people nowadays don’t ____ (12) watch television sitting in ____ (13) living-rooms, they watch it in the kitchen and in bed as ____ (14).
The Education Minister said a_____(15) weeks ago that Britain’s pupils _____(16) spend more time reading. Unfortunately, parents are not setting a good example: adults do _____(17) reading than young people. In fact, reading is ____(18) the bottom of their list of favourite pastimes. They would ____(19) listen to the radio, go to the cinema or hire a video to ____(20) on their televisions at home.
Test 63
We were late as ____ (1). My husband had insisted on doing his packing by ____(2), and when he discovered that he couldn’t manage he’d asked me for help at the last ____ (3). So now we had an hour to get to the ____ (4). Luckily, there wasn’t much traffic on the ____ (5) and we were able to get there just in ____6). We checked in and went straight to the departure ____ (7) to wait for our _____(8) to be called. We waited and waited but no announce­ment was ____(9). We asked at the information ____ (10) and the girl there told us that the plane hadn’t even arrived yet. In the ____(11) there was another announcement telling us that passengers waiting for Flight LJ 108 could collect a ____ (12) meal voucher and that the plane hadn’t left Spain because of ____ (13) problems. We thought that meant that it wasn’t safe for the plane to ____ (14). We waited again for _____(15) until late evening when we were asked to report to the ____ (16) desk again. This time we were given vouch­ers to spend the ____(17) at the airline’s ____ (18) in a nearby hotel.
The next morning after a sleepless ____(19) because of all the planes taking off and landing, we reported back to the airport. Guess what had ____(20) while we were ____ (21)! Our plane had arrived and taken off again leaving us ____ (22). All the other ____(23) had been woken up in the night to catch the plane, but for some ____ (24) or other we had been forgotten. You can imagine how we felt!
Test 64
One of ____ (1) most enjoyable jobs I’ve ____ (2) done was when I _____(3) a student. When you ____(4) what it was you may be a____(5) shocked, but _____(6) I know it sounds unpleasant I can assure you that it was ____(7) fact delightful. Believe it or ____(8), I was a grave’digger for a ____(9) summer. It was one of ____ (10) hot, dry summers which made the ____ (11) as hard as rock and it needed a great deal of ____(12) to dig the graves. Now, a grave-digger doesn’t have ____ (13) to do with dead bodies. All he has to do is dig two-metre deep holes and fill them in ____ (14) when the coffin has been put in. As I ____(15), it was a marvellous summer and I’m glad to say ____ (16) I didn’t have to work on my ____ (17). I had a workmate who had been digging graves ____ (18) 1930. In ____ (19) of his depressing trade he was a cheerful character, always laughing and ____ (20) jokes. He used to tell me ____ (21) about his experiences and I ____ (22) to him for hours on end. Mind you, we had to work quite ____ (23) and usually there were two or three graves to dig every day. By the _____(24) I had to go_____(25) to college I was fitter, browner and in some _____(26) a wiser person.
Test 65
Many years ago when the summers seemed longer and life was_____(1) complicated, we had rented a cottage by a river in the heart of the country where we were going to____(2) three weeks holiday. There were four of us: me (aged 9), Mum and Dad and Mum’s ____ (3) Auntie June. Oh, and I mustn’t forget to _____(4) Spot, our little dog. I was allowed to go off by ____ (5) all day ____ (6) that I promised to be careful and took Spot with me for ____ (7).
One day I was out fishing with Spot when we heard a lot of shouting in the ____(8) followed by a scream and a splash. I was a bit ____(9) so I called Spot and we both hid _____(10) a bush where we could see but not be ____(11). After a few moments a straw hat came floating down the river followed by an oar, a picnic basket and____(12) car. Then came the rowing boat itself, but it was floating___(13) down! Afew moments later my Dad and Auntie June came running____(14) the river bank, both wet ____(15). Spot started ____(16) so I came out of hiding and said hello. My Dad got really angry with me for not ____ (17) to catch the boat as it went past. Luckily, however, the boat and both the oars had been caught by an overhanging tree a little further downstream, but not the bat or the picnic basket. So I had to let them ____(18) my sandwiches. Dad and Auntie June both made me ____ (19) not to tell Mum what had happened in ____ (20) she was worried.
Test 66
My family are a funny lot. Take my father’s brother, Uncle George, for ____(1). He’s the black sheep of the ____ (2) and no­body ever mentions him ____ (3) they are asked a direct ____ (4) about him. He ran away to sea at the ____ (5) of 15 and no-one heard a ____ (6) from him until lie returned 20 years ____ (7). During his absence he’d had a lot of adventures but he’d made ____ (8) money at all and his brothers had to ____ (9) him until be found himself a job, ____ (10) took a long time because he had no skills or training in any trade ____(11) from seamanship. During this time he ____ (12) getting into trouble and this also made him unpopular ____ (13) his brothers. They____ (14) the other hand, worked hard all their lives, supported their families and had no sympathy ____ (15) people who seemed to have no sense of responsibility ____ (16) Uncle George. As far as I am ____ (17) this makes them all much ____ (18) interesting than him and I don’t think it’s right that they should look ____ (19) on their brother. He may be the black sheep to them but to me after all his years of excitement and hardships at sea he seems a ____ (20).
KEY
Test 1:
1 wife 2 till 3 made 4 Pask 5 lesson 6 no 7 as 8 said 9 for 10 behind
Test 2
1 made 2 left 3 it/that 4 later 5 on 6 with 7 something 8 sausage 9 lunch 10 called
Test 3
1 For 2 work 3 accident 4 knife 5 woke 6 fingers 7 where 8 done 9 on 10 There
Test 4
1 on 2 old 3 water 4 some 5 when 6 without 7 kitchen 8 the 9 electrician 10 doing
Test 5
1 down 2 off 3 with 4 hand (s) 5 up/out 6 left 7 later /ago 8 from 9 leaves 10 those
Test 6
1 tell 2 do 3 had 4 police 5 what 6 father 7 did 8 to 9 no 10 judge
Test 7
1 who/that 2 those/people 3 speaking 4 met 5 hates 6 readers 7 sad/unhappy 8 escape 9 time 10 too
Test 8
1 very 2 For 3 flat 4 wrong 5 earth 6 black 7 sea 8 clouds 9 sun 10 lucky
Test 9
1 On 2 had 3 passed 4 back 5 Good 6 by 7 ring 8 water 9 up 10 for
Test 10
1 wherr 2 walked 3 for 4 house 5 her 6 job 7on 8 made 9 passed 10 newspaper
Test 11
1 next 2 were 3 or 4 caught 5 with 6 like 7 wall 8 beds 9 up 10 to
Test 12
1 for 2 by 3 to 4 was 5 on 6 where 7 had 8 pay 9 would 10 sent
Test 13
1 name 2 there 3 to 4 climate 5 of 6 when 7 already 8 before 9 no 10 from11 more 12 most 13 between 14 it 15 the
Test 14
1 enough 2 days 3 lungs 4 not 5 As 6 air 7 by 8 also 9 more 10 in 11 from 12 which 13 parts 14 meal 15 not
Test 15
1 with 2 seen 3 which/that 4 called 5 little 6 if 7 would 8 atmosphere 9 and 10 space 11 appearance 12 believed 13 Without 14 way 15 such
Test 16
1 precious 2 they 3 but 4 as 5 the 6 this 7 is 8 end 9 only 10 another 11 hardness 12 other 13 of 14 mines 15 have
Test 17
1 story 2 by 3 that 4 not 5 the 6 disease 7 regions 8 other9 has 10 grown 11 Although 12 from 13 Next 14 where 15 From
Test 18
1 with 2 communication 3 for 4 heads 5 imitate 6 own 7 often 8 words 9 or 10 By 11 ones12 before 13 of 14 that 15 when
Test 19
1 spent 2 every3 has 4 like 5 floor 6 after 7 pressed 8 stopped 9 thought 10 When 11 at 12 voice 13 don’t 14 down 15 being
Test 20
1 night 2 at 3 comes 4 body 5 kinds 6 when7 seen 8 and 9 for10 the 11 place 12 at 13 against14 cause 15 body
Test 21
1 themometre 2 Although 3 below 4 degrees 5 animals 6 under7 but 8 From 9 too 10 blood 11 brought 12 cool 13 cold 14 To 15 smaller
Test 22
1 by 2 to 3 One 4 being 5 to 6 of 7 with 8 than 9 at 10 an 11 during 12 well 13 that 14 since 15 use
Test 23
1 into 2 who 3 make 4 however 5 them 6 have 7 around 8 another 9 which 10 was 11 for 12 Although 13 time 14 top 15 being
Test 24
1 to 2 as 3 be 4 his 5 any 6 had 7 own 8 than 9 on 10 down 11 The/This 12 which 13 last 14 one 15 and
Test 25
1 where 2 another 3 rather 4 long 5 fewer 6 of 7 was 8 had 9 under 10 how 11 One 12 be 13 Whatever 14 never 15 what
Test 26
1 However 2 cases 3 its 4 were 5 well 6 and 7 that 8 from 9 which 10 more 11 their 12 each 13 one 14 had 15 on
Test 27
1 is 2 to 3 this 4 it 5 of 6 as 7 There 8 not 9 that 10 and 11 to 12 in 13 by 14 have 15 both
Test 28
1 in 2 the 3 give 4 to 5 than 6 An 7 great 8 last 9 become 10 of 11 for12 or 13 which 14 being 15 because
Test 29
1 with 2 more 3 let 4 whatever 5 to 6 into 7 a 8 their 9 for 10 when 11 in 12 until 13 whose 14 are 15 many
Test 30
1 as 2 all 3 way 4 or 5 are 6 other 7 a 8 how 9 remind 10 something 11 to 12 have 13 be 14 where 15 such
Test 31
1 taken 2 to 3 as 4 of 5 no 6 and 7 do 8 unless 9 it 10 is 11 by 12 been 13 for 14 Because 15 well
Test 32
1 where 2 how 3 anyone 4 tried 5 after 6 no 7 after 8 The 9 whose 10 yet 11 of 12 as 13 If 14 to 15 will
Test33
1 as 2 how 3 it 4 into 5 or/and 6 since 7 by 8 the 9 of 10 been 11 In 12 are 13 this 14 which 15 fact
Test 34
1 to 2 an/the 3 make 4 with 5 what 6 at 7 as 8 while 9 both 10 but 11 is 12 this 13 than 14 nor 15 can
Test 35
1 mean 2 little 3 have 4 are 5 more 6 all 7 what 8 for 9 than 10 in 11 much 12 another 13 about 14 their 15 tell
Test 36
1 before 2 nothing 3 as 4 will 5 the/a 6 to 7 of 8 on 9 would 10 which 11 about 12 from 13 their 14 enough 15 than
Test 37
1 all 2 where 3 answer 4 happen 5 someone 6 so 7 which 8 for 9 be/prove 10 one/thiers 11 case 12 of 13 try 14 what 15 yourself
Test 38
1 away 2 so 3 an 4 without 5 whole 6 everyone 7 what 8 if/when 9 something 10 in 11 for 12 up 13 which 14 how 15 to
Test 39
1 as/when 2 at/to3 in 4 one 5 nothing 6 as 7 has 8 well 9 on 10 ago 11 up 12 no 13 were 14 make 15 every
Test 40
1 side 2 may 3 As 4 known 5 the/his 6 made 7 if 8 of 9 ats 10 there 11 brought 12 where 13 who 14 Until 15 to/onto
Test 41
1 another 2 of 3 a 4 it 5 for 6 who 7 became 8 would 9 By 10 have 11 may/night 12 which/that 13 capable 14 until 15 in
Test 42
1 for 2 early 3 these 4 However 5 about 6 where 7 being 8 which 9 to 10 the 11 here 12 its
13 too 14 had 15 except 16 immediately 17 including 18 own 19 did/made 20 was
Test 43
1 to 2 has 3 many 4 going 5 at 6 when 7 who 8 in 9 to 10 after
11 makes 12 take 13 from 14 with 15 than 16 rather 17 by 18 to 19 for 20 too
Test 44
1 or 2 whose 3 victims 4 following 5 used 6 living 8 would 8 in 9 the 10 one
11 on 12 flower 13 all 14 down 15 sooner 16 with 17 You 18 dare/can 19 into 20 away
Test 45
1 without 2 most 3 over 4 example 5 built 6 next 7 the 8 its 9 can 10 from
11 them 12 also 13 by 14 which 15 shows 16 for 17 and 18 At 19 queue 20 is
Test 46
1 one 2 have 3 of/about 4 best 5 said 6 was 7 order 8 from 9 brought 10 when
11 had 12 needed 13 with 14 in 15 words 16 is 17 tried 18 none 19 later 20 for
Test 47
1 one 2 just 3 happened 4 side 5 Even 6 opened 7 wearing 8 silence 9 where 10 for
11 with 12 wondered 13 and 14 because 15 drove 16 into 17 jacket 18 still 19 again 20 without
Test 48
1 travelled 2 no 3 like 4 were 5 off 6 for 7 do 8 for 9 found 10 take
11 While 12 have 13 was 14 a 15 about 16 made 17 that 18 least 19 been 20 would
Test 49
1 of 2 As 3 why 4 as 5 and 6 that 7 important 8 Without 9 such 10 sunshine
11 besides 12 enough 13 well 14 shining 15 not 16 ice 17 few 18 bottom 19 into 20 without
Test 50
1 hungry 2 unable 3 cannot 4 roots 5 able 6 used 7 few 8 which 9 how 10 same
11 whether 12 dry 13 weight 14 planted 15 grown 16 from 17 dried 18 had 19 deal 20 lost
Test 51
1 the 2 a 3 leaving 4 earlier 5 His 6 without 7 by 8 appear 9 worn 10 to
11 find 12 in 13 across 14 pockets 15 enough 16 discovered 17 which 18 between 19 three 20 not
Test 52
1 used 2 on/along 3 his 4 really 5 had 6 could 7 already 8 time 9 as 10 accused
11 so 12 knew 13 taken 14 Since 15 what 16 want 17 all/both 18 the 19 for 20 this
Test 53
1 ago 2 was 3 off 4 with 5 up 6 while 7 hoped 8 back 9 However 10 out
11 on 12 according 13 saw 14 of 15 still 16 in 17 top 18 on 19 sure 20 second
Test 54
1 next 2 to 3 an 4 on 5 twice 6 because 7 there 8 with 9 had 10 which
11 very 12 passengers 13 sounded 14 had 15 like 16 must 17 about 18 while 19 are 20 happened
Test 55
1 in 2 at 3 room 4 off 5 One 6 at 6 by 8 break 9 into 10 being
11 what 12 made 13 on 14 from 15 To 16 been 17 must 18 without 19 want 20 in
Test 56
1 what 2 to 3 it 4 if 5 about 6 out 7 all 8 raw 9 them 10 that
11 left 12 in 13 not 14 then 15 it 16 that 17 most 18 has 19 on 20 of
Test 57
1 surface 2 cause 3 blows 4 against 5 hard 6 water 7 ocean 8 covered 9 loses 10 roots
11 water 12 bare 13 fewer 14 slow 15 where 16 weather 17 melting 18 hold 19 beds 20 erosion
Test 58
1 off 2 with 3 enough 4 big 5 himself 6 down 7 entered 8 dark 9 ahead 10 slowly
11 so 12 what 13 Let’s 14 too 15 could 16 hanging 17 beside 18 other 19 that 20 towards
Test 59
1 exactly 2 bitten 3 as 4 determined 5 it 6 about 7 village 8 anything 9 didn’t 10 But
11 necessary 12 show 13 down 14 the 15 to 16 if 17 like 18 known 19 or 20 execptional
Test 60
1 at 2 a 3 ever 4 called 5 of 6 wore 7 real 8 like 9 who 10 not
11 which 12 eyes 13 seemed 14 cups 15 up 16 bill 17 again 18 the 19 about 20 as
Test 61
1 used 2 whose 3 the 4 Although 5 from 6 would 7 taken 8 all 9 Finally 10 themselves
11 Anything 12 under 13 when 14 small 15 things 16 enormous 17 feel 18 These 19 to 20 on
Test 62
1 doing 2 like 3 does 4 average 5 which 6 what 7 even 8 seem 9 every 10 over
11 According 12 just 13 their 14 well 15 few 16 should 17 less 18 at/near 19 rather 20 watch
Test 63
1 unusal 2 himself 3 moment 4 airport 5 road 6 time 7 lounge 8 flight 9 made 10 desk
11 end 12 free 13 technical 14 fly 15 ages 16 information 17 night 18 expense 19 night 20 happened
21 asleep 22 stranded 23 passengers 24 reason
Test 64
1 the 2 ever 3 was 4 hear 5 bit 6 although 7 in 8 not 9 whole 10 those
11 ground 12 effort 13 anything 14 again 15 said 16 that 17 own 18 since 19 spite 20 telling
21 all 22 listened 23 hard 24 time 25 back 26 ways
Test 65
1 less 2 spend 3 sister 4 mention 5 myself 6 provided 7 company 8 distance 9 scared 10 behind
11 seen 12 another 13 upside 14 down 15 through 16 barking 17 trying 18 share 19 promise 20 case
Test 66
1 instance 2 family 3 unless 4 question 5 age 6 word 7 later 8 no support 9 which 10 apart
11 hept 12 with 13 on 14 for 15 for 16 like 17 concerned 18 less 19 down 20 hero

RUT GäN Tù VùNG Vµ VIÕT L¹I C¢U